_pi ,J!>, Londo*,?r\med by • White, jfcfohn Crumpe, atthcSJgo of the 1 hree Bibles fn St. P**ft Church- Yard. M To the ^ght Honourable HENRY Lord Howard, Earl O F *C R W 1 C H , IEarl Marftial of England* My LOR®, r Tf """SH E Art of Painting was a thing which of old Princes admired, JL Kings did affect, Emperours and tfybk men of almoft all Ages did love and make ufe of. Not to men- tion Jubaj btain but' lo much as your Honours leaft Approbation ^ I fliall think my (elF happy ; and hope, that with your 7>{ame and Memory this Work may be confecrated to eternity. May your Lord/hip daily increafe in Ho* nour and Glory, be replenished with all earthly BUffings , and for ever enjoy the full fruition of all Happinefs both in thisWorld y and that which is tocome y is the Prayer of, MY LORD, Your Honours molt Humble and Affectionate Servant, A $ WitthmSxlmon. THE PREFACE TO THE READER. THE SubjeEb of the enfuing Work^ is the Art of Painting: a name not only too fingular, but alfo too (Jwrt or narrow, to exprefs what is hert intended thereby : For we do not only exprefs that Art, ( as it is generally received ) but alfo Drawing, Engraving, Etching, Limning, Warning, Colouring and Dying : all which being considered in their proper extent, infinitely exceed that curt aiCd name o/Pain- ting : which that we might joyn all in one proper and com- prehenfive word, we made choice of that Greek, Compound POLYGRAPHICE. To perfwade any one to the Study or Practice of this Art, would be a great folly ; fmce Ignorance ( which is alwayes blind ) can never be able to judge aright : Porto him that already underflands it, the labour would be ufelefs and unprofitable ; to him which is already delighted there- in, it would be necdltfs and fuperfluous *, and to the averfe and ignorant, it would be fhe putting a Jewel into a Swine s fnout : the exquifite knowledge of which, is impojfible ever to be attained or under flood, byfuchprejudicate and cloudy Soulf, although it is fufficiently known to many already :> Mnd its ufefulncfs as apparent as it is excellent : To enu- merate The Preface to the Reader. nutate the one, or reherfe the other, is but toperfwade tht* world, that it is day-light, when the Sun is upon the Meridian *, or at leafi toinculcate^n. ignorance of thole things, which have been manifeftly known even a long time ftnee. The Method of this work^is wholly new, wherein we have united and made one, fitch various fubjetts as have been the uncertain, obfettre and tedious difcourfe of a great number of various and Urge Volumes. What fliall we fey ? Things far afunder, we have laid together : things uncertain) are here limited and reduced: things ob- /cure, we have made plain : things tedious , we have made fhort : things erroneous , we have rectified and corrected : things hard, we have made facil and eafie : things various ) we have collected: things (in abear- ance ) heterogene, we have made fyomogene : And in a word, the whole Art we have reduced to certain heads ; brought under a certain method , limited to practical rules-, and made it perfpicuous, even to a very mean underfianding. In the Compofure of this Work^ ( be fides our own Ob» fervations} we have made ufe of the beft Authors now ex- tant, that we could pojftbly procure, or get into our hands \ wherein our labour was not fmall \ what in Reading, Comparing, Tranfcribing, Choofing, Correcting, Di- fpofing and Reviling every thing, in refpett of Matter, Form and Order. The which had we any Prefident to have followed , any Path to have traced, any Exam- ple to have imitated, any Help to have confulted, or any Subject entire : Or otherwife, had the Number of our Authors been fmall , their Maxims truths, their Rules certain, their Meanings not obfeure, or their Precepts been reduced to Method and Order : We might not only y with much more eafe, pleafure and certainty , lefs la- bour, trouble and pains ; greater perfpicuity , plainnefs A 4 and The Preface to the Reader. ' and CwguUrity, better order, method and language ; but alfo in ihdrter time have brought to perfection , ik we here prefent you withal. In this third Edition we have not only inserted federal Copper Cuts, with more than two hundred fever al ad- * ditions of fmgular ufe, through the three firfi B»oks; but ' there is alfo a whole fourth Book, containing above four- ' fc ore Chapters of fuch neceffary matter, that the work^with- ont them may really he accounted defective. There is tot only fever al neceffary things added ( which were omitted in the three firfi Boohs \) as alfc the varidus depicturings of the Antients, according to the cufiom of every Nation,drawn from the befi, moll- experienced and faithfuUcft Authors now extant, ( whether" Englifa, Italian or Latin ) but alfo- the various ways of Painting , Beautifying and Adorning the Face and Skin, fo artificially, as it (hall be imperceptible to the Scrutiny of the mofi curious and piercing eye : to which we have Added ( as a neeejfary Afpendice ft the whole Pcxflrine of Perfumes , never written on (to our know- ledge) in this order before) together with the Original, Advancement WPerfe'&lontff thefe Arts. 3 -. Laflly, the Reader h ^de fired to take notice, that in ths following Worl^, there are many excellent fecrets , mt vulgarly known, which fell into our hands from fever d fpecinl fronds. ( whofe exqitifitc knowledge in thefe kmds tf 'jMyfirries tru^y declares them to be absolute Mafters thert- vf ) which for the publick.good are freely communicated ;• the world. From: t1l e Eaftcnd of William Salmon. l J aul.u near rhe tree- School, London. .. .' '■ . TOLYGRATHICES * Liber Primus. - * . OF D RAWING. CHAP. I. Of Polygraphice in General. p I, V "% Olygraphice is an Art, fo much imitating Na ture, as that by proportional lines with an- fwerablc Colours, it teacheth to reprefent to the life ( and that in piano ) the forms of all corporeal things, with their refpective paflions. II. It is called, in general, in Greek Xfa^mw, in La- tin Pittttra, and in Englifh the Art of Painting. III. It is fevenfold( to wit) in Drawings Engraving, Etching, Limning, Painting, Wajhing and Colouring. IV. Drawing is , that whereby we reprefent the fhape and form of any corporeal fubftance in rude lines only* V. It % Tolygr&fhtcts. Lib. I.. V. It confifts in proportion and paflion, as it hathi relation to motion and fituation, in refpect of Light: and Vifion. VI. Sanderfon faith, This admirable Art is the limi- tation of the furface of Nature in Colour and Propor- tion, i. By Mathematical demonftration. 2. By Chco- rographical defcription, 3. By fhapes of living crea- tures, 4. And by the forms of Vegetables \ in allwhich it prefers Likefiefsto the life, confervs it after deatih* and this altogether by the Senfe of Seeing. VII. The proportion fhews the true length, breadth or bignefc of any part ( in known meafures) in reipecTt of the whole , and how they bear one to another :: The pajfion reprefents the vifual Quality, in refpect ofif love or hatred, forrow or joy, magnanimity or cowar- dife,majeftyorhumilitj,-, of allwhich things we ihall fpeak in order. CHAP. II. Of the Infiruments of Drawing, I. T"*He Infiruments of Drawing are fevenfold, viz.. . I Charcoals, feathers of a Ducks wing,biack and red Lead Pencils, Pens made of Ravens quills, Rulers, Compares and Paftills. n. Charcoals are to be chofen of Sallow- wood fplit into the form of Pencils, and fharpned.to a point,being chiefly known by their pith in the middle. Their ufe is to draw lightly the draught over at firfi , that if any thing he drawn amifs , it may be wiped out and amended. III. The Feathers ought to be of a Ducks wing , ( though Chap*** The Inflruments of Drawing. j ( though others may ferve well enough ) with which you may wipe out any ftroke of the Charcoal where it is drawn amifs , left variety of Lines breed con- fufion. IV. Black and red Lead Pencils, are to go over your Draught the fecond time more exactly, beoauie this will not wipe out with your hand, when you come to draw it over with the Pen. V. Pens made of Ravens quills (but others may teryej are to finifh the work : but herein you muft be very careful and exact, for what is now done amils, there is no altering of. VI. The Eulers, which are of ufe to draw ftraightor perpendicular lines, triangles, fquares or polygons, the which you are to ufe in the beginniag, till practice an4 experience may render them needlefs. VII. Compa/fes made of fine Brafs with Steel points, to take in and out," that you may ufe black or red Lead at pleafiire. Their ufe is fir ft to meafure ( by help of a curious fc ale of equal parts upon the edge of your Ruler ) your proporti- ons, and whether your work, is exaEt which is do-ne with the Charcoal. Secondly, To draw Circles, Ovals and Ar- ches withal. VIII. Paftils are made of feveral Colours to draw withal, upon coloured Paper or Parchment. Thus, Take Plaifier of Paris or Alabafter calcined, of the colour of which you intend to make your Paftils with , ana q. f. grind them firft afunder , then together, and with a little water make them into pajte , then with your hands roul them into long pieces like black-lead Pencils , then dry them moderately in the Air : being dryed, when you ufe them, fcrape them to a point like an ordinary Pencil. And thus may you make Paftils of what colour you pleafe , fitting them for the Faces of Men or Wo- men 4 Tolygraphices'. Lib, D w#z , Land-skips , C/otfuk , Sunbeams , Buildings eund Shadows. IX. To the former add good Copies, Patterns and Examples of good Pictures, and other Draughts, with- out which, it is almoft impoffible, that the young Artift mould ever attain to any perfection in this Art. Thofe that defire to be furnijhed with any excellent Pat- terns, Copies or Prints, may haw of all forts, whether of Humane .fiiape, Per fpeBivc defign, Landskip, Fowls, Beafts y Infects, Plants, Countreys, or any other artificial Figures, exquifitely drawn, at 'very reafonable rates, where this Book, is to be fold. • CHAP. IIL Of the Precepts of Drawing in general. I. "D E f ur€ to have all the neceffaries aforefaid in 1J readinefs, but it will be good to pra&ife as much as^ may be without the help of your Rule and ^ompaiies *, it is your eye and fancy mult judge with out artificial meaiurings. II. Then fir ft begin with plain Geometrical Figures, as Lines, Angles, Triangles, Quadrangles •, Polygons, Arches, Circles, Ovals, Cones, Cylinders and the Hie. For thefe are the foundations of all other proportions. III. The Circle helps in all orbicular forms, as in pe Sun, Moon, &c. the Oval in giving a juft proportion to the Face and Mouth •, the mouth of a Pot or Wdl, the foot^- Glafs,c^c the Square confines thePiftire y>u Chap. j. The Precepts of Drawing. 5 you are to copy, &c. the Triangle in the half-face j the Polygon in. Ground- plats, Fortifications, and the like •, [Angles and Arches in Perfpective •, the Cone in Spires, tops of Towers and Steeples : the Cylinder in Columns* Pillars, Pilalters, and their Ornaments. IV. Having made your hand fit and ready in gene- ral Proportions, then learn to give every object its due fhade according to its convexity or concavity, and to elevate or deprefs the fame, as the object appears ei- ther nearer or farther off the light, the which is indeed the life of the work. V. The fecond Practice of Drawing, confifts in forming Fruits 1 as Apples, Pears, Cherries, Peaches, Grapes, Strawberries, Peafcods, &c. with their Leaves : the imitation of Flowers, as Rofes, Tulips, Carnations,^. Herbs, asRofemary,Tyme, Hyfop, &c. Trees, as the Oak, Fir, Afh, Wallnut, &c. VI. The third Practice of Drawing imitates, i. Beafts, as the Lamb, Elephant, Lion, Bear, Leopard, Dog, Cat, Buck, Unicorn, Horfe, &c. 2. Fowls , as the Eagle, Swan, Parrot, Partridge, Dove, Raven, &c. B. Fifties, as the Whale, Herring, Pike, Carp, Thorn- back, Lobfter,Crab, &c. of which, variety of Prints may be bought at reafonable rates. VII. The fourth Praxis imitates the Body of Man wi:h all its Lineaments, the Head, Nofe, Eyes, Ears, Checks, Hands, Arms, and Shadows all exactly pro- portional both to -the whole, and one to another, as wdl to fituation as magnitude. VIII. The fifth Praxis is in Drapery , imitating Cloathing , and artificially fetting off the outward Coverings , Habit and Ornaments of the Body , as Cloth, Stuff, Silk and Linen, their natural and proper folds-, which although it may feem fomcthing hard to do , yet by much exercife and imitation of the choiceft 6 iPolygraphkes. Lib.. I. choiceft Prints, will become facil and eafie. IX. In drawing of all the aforegoing forms , or what ever elfe, you mult be perfect, firit in the exjact proportions : fecondly in the general or outward limes, before you fall to fhadowing or trimming your work within. X. In mixed and uncertain forms, where Circle and Square will do no good ( but only the Idea thereof in your own fancy ) as in Lions, Horfes,and the like , you mull work by reafon in your oivn judgement, and ib obtain the true proportion by daily practice. That \ Having the fhape of the thing in your mind, firft draw it rudely vrith your coaly then more exactly with your Lead or pencil ", then perufe it well, and confider where you have erred, and mend it , according to that Idea, which yon carry in your mind ', this done, view it again, correcting by degrees the other farts, even to the leaft Iota, fo far as your judgement wilt inform you , and this yoU may d» with twenty, thirty, forty or more papers of fever al things at once: having done what you can, confer it with fome excellent pattern or print of like kind, ufing no rule or com- pafs at all, but your own reafon, in mending every fault, giving every thing its due place , and jufi- proportion j by this means you may rettife all your errors, andftep an in- credible way on to perfection. XI. Having then good Patterns and Copies to ui raw by,the young Artift muft learn to reduce them to other proportions either greater or finaller, and this by of- ten and many tryals ( as we mall hereafter more par- ticularly teach ) this requires great judgement, for in a cut, you fhallfind neither circumfcribing ftrokes, nor difference between light and light, or fiiadow and fha- dow •, therefore fenous obfervations are required in the fite of thofe things, whether coming forwards or going backwards. XII. The Chap. 4. Tk Art of Drawing. f XII. The drawing after Plaifter-work , done by skilful Matters, as the Gladiator and children oiFran- cifcoy the Rape of the Sabine Women, the Wraftler, the Vemts of Greece, Hercules, Hermes, anatomical DifTecli- ons, and other pieces of antiquity, are main and ne- ceflary Introductions to attain a perfection in drawing after the life. XIII. This done, let the young Artift now begin to exercife in drawing after the life •, ( for that is the compleateft, beft, and molt perfect Copy , which Na- ture has let for obfervation ) wherein the liberty of imitation is preferred in the largeft latitude : and this muft be attained by much Practice and dili- gent Exercife , adjoining the Inftructions of a good Matter. XIV. In this Practice of Drawing , let there be a perfection attained , before ever there be the leait thoughts of Colours or Painting: for that afterwards all things belonging to Painting, will in a Ihort time be eaiily and perfectly underftood. CHAP. IV. Of particular Ohfervations in the Art of Drawing, 1. TN drawing after i* Print or Picture, put it in I fuch a light, as that the glofs of the Colours hinder not your light, fo as that the light and your ey may equally obliquely fall upon your piece; which place at fuch a diftance , that at opening of your g folygraf hkes. Lib. 1 * your eyes, you may view it all at once, the greater youir Picture is, the further off you muft place it to draw ait- tcr : the which you muft always be fure to put right before you, a little reclining. II. Then obferve the middle of your Picture to be copied, which touch upon your paper with thepoinit of your coal: then obferve the mod: perfpicuous and uppermoft figures (if more than one J which touch gently in their proper places, thus running over tine whole draught, you will fee the Skeleton, as it Were, of the work. But if you go on without thefe conpderations , whereunf your Draught will tend or run ; then having ended your work,, yon will be forced to draw the fame many times over and over again, and, it may be, every time to as little purpofc •, by the tedioufnefs of which, your ingenuity will be dulled. III. Be fecureof a right and true draught, though you do it flowly •, what you think may be done in two or three hours , it will be better to beftow two or three days upon : by this means ( though you act leifurely, yet you will ad prudently, and) you will both fooner and better than can be imagined, attain the- pcrfedion of what you defire. IV. Thefe out-fchetches being made, view them dili- Eentl*' whether they anfwer your rwrtfrn annarenrly ■-. for the Geftures of the life ought to fhewUemfclves eminently in the firft and rudeft draughts thereof , without which, be fure your work will be faulty. V. Having viewed thefe fchetches, begin to cor red and amend them ( where you find them amifs ) and gradatim by adding or diminilhing a little here and there, as you fee it differ from your pattern, you will- bring it nearer and nearer to the life. - Tbu J> Chap. 4. The Art of Drawing. 9 This with a Charcoal yon mayea/ily do } bccanfybil may wipe away what is anufs. V I. l"n drawing. after Plaiflcr and emboflal works, choofe a good North light, which letdeicend from .above, not dilating or icattering it felf too much, b y which you may the more pleafantly fhade your work. Jf the Room has a South light ; put oiled Paper before itbe window , or if you draw by Candle-light , have a Lama jfiaded with oiled paper \ for a Candle will (rrow lower iand lower, which catifes the fliades to change, all which yyoit avoid in a Lamp. VI I. Then fet your felf down about three times as ffar from the Pattern as the Pattern is high •, fo as your eyes in a direct line may view the fame : then with a jplumb line obferve what parts of your Pattern appear tco you, by the extending {freight thereof,and how one uinder another they come in light, and accordingly rmakeyour fundamental fchetches, as we have jitlt be-, febre taught. VIII. In drawing the Mufcles of a human body you mull: firlt have either the life or very good pat- terns made either of Plaifter, or drawn in Pictures, enough of which are to be found in Anatomical BJooks •, but chiefly the Book of Jacob Vander €racht i ccompleated with many varieties and curioiities -, from vv/hence the alterations and changes, rifing and filling, c:.\tenlion and contraction , and other operations of tine Mufcles, Arteries arid particular members are in innitationofthe life excellently depicted. I X. In drawing after a naked body, all the Mufcles aire not fo plainly to be exprefied as in Anatomical Fi- gures •, but that fide whofe parts are mult apparent rind; lignificant in the performing of any action, molt more' orrkfs appear according to the force of that action. to (Polygraphkesl Lib. t. X. In young perfons the Mufcles mull not mani- feltly appear io hard, as in elder and full grown per- fons : the fame obferve in fat men , and flcfhy , and fuch as are very delicate and beautiful. And in Wo- men you mult fcarce exprefs any at all, becaufe that in the life they either appear not at all, or very little, unlefs it be particularly in fome forceable action : and then you muft reprefent them but very faintly , left you fpoil the fingular Beauty of the body. The like obferve in little Children. X I. In drawing of thefe Mufcles the motion of the whole body is alfo to be confidered : in the rifing or falling of the Arms, the Mufcles of the Breafl more or lefs appear ■ the Hips the like according as they bend outward or inward ; and the fame chiefly in the Shoulders, Sides and Neck, according to the feveral actions of the body : all which alterations are firft to be obferved in the life. CHAP. V. Of "the imitation of the Life. I. J N order hereunto itwiii be necefiaxy (having X fixed a convenient time and place ) to choofe a good Mailer, with whom you may fpend two days in a week at leafl ; or elfe a fociety of about half a fcore or a do2,cn young men, who are experienced to draw after the life , by the advice and example of whom , and your own diligent obfervations and care , ,ou may come not only to mend one anothers faults, ut alfo one anothers judgements. 1 1- Then choofe a well-fhap'd man , one of large fhoulders* I Chap. j. Tin Imitation of the Life. u moulders, of a fair breaft, ftrongly mufcled, full thighs, long lcggs,and of a proportionable height , not too tall nor too fhort, not too thick nor too (lender, but a perfon every ways of an admirable lhape. 1 1 1. Let this Exemplar be made to Hand in a good poliure , reprefenting fome noble action of the life , letting the head turn it felf to the right fide if the left be fhadowed •, and contrariwife, making the parts of the apparent fhoulder fomewhat higher than that which is obfcured-, and the head if it looks upwards, leaning no farther backwards than that the eyes may be feen •, and in the turning of it, let it move no far- ther than that the chin may only approach the fhoui- der \ making alfo the hip on that fide the fhoulder is loweft, a little to flick out-, and that arm foremoft, where the leg is behind, and contrariwife. I V. The fame you muft obferve in all fourfooted Beaits *, and this generally to make the limbs crofs- wifeto cohere together-, and in the turning of it for- ward, backward, upward, downward, fideways,evec to counterbalance it by the oppofition of other parts, the right knowledge of which is a great Hep to the Imitation of the life. V. This done, let him, whofe turn it is to begin, firft fchetch on the paper his own Idea's (being fixed in a convenient place and light, as in the former Chapter ) wherein you mult endeavour to make every part to agree with the whole, firft in form,fe- condly in proportion , thirdly in action : after this begin again, running over your Draught, bring it to a conclufion, as we fhall hereafter teach you. VI. Obferving always, that after you have fchetcht your whole Figure,that you choofc a part) which yon molt defire to finifti) to perfect the fame , in regard that wjth the reft Hands in a good pofture •, thcrea- B 2 ion M PoljgYcifhices. Lib. f. fon is, becaufe time will not always eafily permit to finifli or compleat a whole Figure, unlefs it be with expert Artifts: it being much better to perfect a part than to leave the whole imperfect •, which as each Pra- ctitioner arrives and draws nearer to perfection , he may with fo much the more boldnefs, fecurity and certitude attempt the compleating of the whole. V 1 1. You are alio to conlldcr after what manner you would have your Figure to be feen, whether upon even ground, or from aloft •, for accordingly you mult make the pofitionof your Exemplar. VI 1 1. Let the young Artift alfo at his conveniency , / cmetimes view the Country, and practife upon the drawing of Landslips, as much reprefenting Nature (i. in tneir diftance, 2. in their mutual pofition, 3. in vilible afpect) as pofllble may be : by this means he will come to have a general and compleat underftand- ing in theunivcrlal meafuresof a!l things. CHAP. VI. Of the ImltAtim of Draught r. I. hpHe Learner mult, by many and often tiyals A get a habit of Imitation *, which if it be to be done with the Pen, beware of fcratching and making] thin and lean ftfoaks, but rather broad , which yoi ilin.ll draw from above, downwards-, but according to the fhadeSjfome of the hatches muft be fharp , fomej broad, fome unequal, and fome equal. II. Hold your pen or pencilibmewhat long, (and] not fo upright as when you write,) feemingas though] you laid it ltraicht forward : and if they be paflils accultoiuj Chap. 6. The Imitation of Draughts, ij V accuftom your felf to turn them in your hand, by this means you will prevent their becoming lb foon blunt , and they wearing to a point may ferve without ilrap- ingthe making of a whole Draught. III. In lhadowing of your Draught, you muftfirft begin to do it faintly and fmoothly,and ltraight againlt the edges of the light, fo that it may look as if it had been dafiit with a bruin-pencil •, and then here and there overfhadow it again in the darker! (hades farther out, and adorn it with hatchings ^ and where any thing more is required, put the lame in nimbly and clearly by gentle touches, the which will add a great grace unto your work. I V. Doefling (whichisacertainbefmceringofthc work ) is to be done with Crions of red or black Chalk, touching the Draught eafily all over fmooth- ly and evenly with the points thereof, and not with Cotton or the like put up into Quills, as fome ufe : though that may be done in fome cafes, as where one work is to be brought into another. V. If Copies be taken (chiellyupon coloured pa- per) to make it curious and neat, let the edges of the heightening be fmoothed a little (not with cotton, but) with the like coloured paper rouled up to a fharp point at one end, and by this means you will take a- way the fharpnefs and hardnefs of your edges , and make them look fweetandpleafant. V I. In performance of thefe things a certain kind of waffling is fometimes necellary, performed with Pen- cils dipt in ibme coloured liquor, and fo laid upon co- loured paper-, and this is to be done cither through the whole work, or in a part thereof, to wit, in fome principal flat {hades •, which may be afterwards {oof y wrought over with a Pen or black Chalk , the which will look very pleafantly. J3 3 VII, 14 Tolygraphices. Lib. l, V I I This Warning mult be firft done very weak and faint, yetfinooth (without fmoothing of it at the edges, except by a new ftroak of your pencil moiften- ed with voir tongue - 7 for much fmoothing willfpoii your work) this firft warning being dry, go over again with your work, yet only thofe parts where there ought to be a darker made •, and afterwards again give fome deeper and harder touches without fniootn- uig, the which will very much fet your work off VIII. Faint fhadows, and things obfcure, mult be prefentedas faintly as may be, chiefly upon colour- ed paper, where the heightning helps you •, but be- ware you go not too often over your fliades .left you fpoil them, by making them too hard and ill- favoured. . , _ _. ., „„ IX. In drawing, whether it be after a Draught or the Life-, firft obferve the thing in general, inreipect of the circumferentftroaks •, for them are they, which bound and contain all the parts of the whole, and without which the particular parrs can never be perfedly diftinguifhed, nor reprefent themielves in their being: This done, then confider in like manner the parts, and fuppofing the parts each to be a whole; you may come to reprefent the parts of parts, ana oy the fame means to exprefs the whole of any Draught Whatfoever. CHAP- lerwrnft Chap. 7. Drawing the Face of a Man. ij CHAP. VII. Of Drawing the Face of a, Man. J. TN drawing of the Faceyouarefirfttoobferve its J. motion whether upwards, downwards,forwards, Or fideways •, whether it be long or round, fat or lean, great or little. For if it be fat, the cheeks will feem tofwcll: if lean, the jaw-bones will ftick^ out , and the cheeks fall in - y but if neither too fat nor too lean , it will be for the mofi part round. I I. Touch lightly the feature s where the eyes , mouth , nofe and chin fhonld ftand , ( having firft drawn the circle or oval of the Face ) then make a ftroak down from that place of the forehead which is even with the chin , coming down where you mould place the middle or tip of the nofe, and middle of the mouth, which ftroak muftbe made ftraight down in a full right Face, but arched or oval in an oblique Face , leaning that way towards which the Face doth turn : then crofs the ftroak about the mid. die of the eyes, either with a ftraight line in aright Face,or with a Curved either upwards or downwards according to the prefent action or pofture of the Face : then make another anfwerabletothat, where the end of the nofe fhould come •, and another for the mouth that it be not made crooked. III. This Crofs is difficult to be underftood in yla- vo \ but upon a Face made upon a folid body,inform or fhapeofanEgg, the fcvcral variations of the faid crofs are molt excellently demonitrated : and from B 4 hence \6 (Polygraphkes. Lib. i. hence may the learner underftand all the alterations of a Face, and thereby draw it all manner of ways, as fideways , upwards , downwards , forwards , back- wards, &c. and that only by the motion of the faid oval folid, accordingly as in the following Figures you may eafily perceive. 1 V. Then if the face look upwards towards Hea- ven ? or downwards towards the Earth , let the Eyes, Nofe , Month and Brows looks accordingly with it \ and now proceed to the placing of the Features. V. In a jufl: proportioned Face,the diftances, i. be- tween the top of the forehead and the eye-brows :> %. betwen the eye-brows and the bottom of the nofe,^ 3. between the bottom of the nofe and the bottom or the chin are equal. V I. In drawing the utinoft Circumference of a Face , take in the Head and all with it, kit you be deceived in drawing the true bignefs. V I I. Then confidcr all thofe chief touches which give life to a face , adding grace thereto, and fome- thing difcovering the difpolitionof the mind. So the mouth extended and the corners a little turning yp, flews a foiling countenance: the eye-brow bending , and the forehead and top of the nofe between the eye- trows wrinkled , flews one frowning : the upper eye -La coming fomething over the ball of the eye, flews one fi- ber and flayed : with many other touches which give life and fpirit to a face, which in good prints , by little and little , and diligent vbfervation you will at lafi fnd i>ut. VIII. The diftances between the eyes, is the length of one eye in a full face , but in a three-quarter or half- face, it is leflcned proportionably : and exactly underneath the corners of the eyes place the noftri!$. IX. Having 1 ,0&y) JwShcrwm WShawinJ Chap* 7. Drawing the Face of a Man. 17 I X. Having given touches where the eyes, nofe, mouth and chinfhouldbe placed, begin to draw them more exattly, and fo proceed till the Face be finiflied •, and then make the hair , beard , fhadows, and othcr things about it. X. Be fure to make the fliadows rightly , and be fure not to make them too dark, where they ihould be faint ; for that can never be made light again, and fo the whole Face is marr'd. 'The Jljadows are fainter and lighter in a fair Face than in a fwarthy. XI. When you have finiflied the Face, give here and there fome hard touches with your pen where the fliadows are darkeft *, then come the cars and hair , wherein having drawn the one-line, draw the princi- pal curls, or mailer ftroaks in the hair, which will be a guide to you in the lcfTer curls, whofe dependance are on them : alway make the curls to bend exactly according to the pattern, that they may lie loofe, or carelefly, and not as if they were (tiff and forced ; the curls being rightly drawn, in the laft place ftrike in the loofe hairs which hang fcatteringly out of the Circles. X 1 1. In forming the Ear,defcribe an oval as it were, and proceeding lightly, joyn ftroak to ftroak, in fuch manner as you fee in the Figures , fo that the ear may be entirely formed, without digrefling from the bounds of Nature or Art. XIII. Laftly having pracftifed a little by rule , and brought your hand in :, in drawing of any thing, firft ftrike the out-ftroaks , principal veins and mufcles lightly , and afterwards fhadow them, ever following cxquillte patterns and prints, which will both encreafe your judgement, and bring command to your hand. CHAP, 18; tPolygrtiffbicesl- Lib, i. CHAP. VIII. Of Drming the Extreme ptrts'. I. TN drawing the Hands, draw not all the joints, 1 veins or other things to appear plainly but on- ly lightly and faintly,andftrike out thebignefs of the hand and the manner of its turning with faint touches, and not with hard ftroaks ; then that being done ?lt pan the fingers according to the pattern with 1 fe ftint ftroaks t then mark that place where any of the fingers do ftVud out from the others, witha faint refembfance: thisdone, proceed to dra« r.tmoreper^ feftly,making the bending of the joynts, the wnfts and other principal things more exaaiy ;, and I laftly , go over with it again, drawing every fmall bending or "welling of the fingers, nails, knuckles and veins, lo 'T/'letrnT/good prints the juft proportions of the hands with FheireWl ^*™, obferv.ng this rnk, that according as it turns one way or another,to ihorten proportionally as they appear to the eye. VoriomHch M « turm «*»;j'» s "; •)*> J- • three or more i, loft to om fight, whebyou muft aceor^ngly even now enumerated, at the firft and fecond Seftion of this Chanter- are roh? ivtferftoo<< here. r w W Sherwm fe Chap. 9. Of V rawing the w, bole Body, ip CHAP. IX. Of Drawing the whole Body. I. pirft begin with the head, and be fure to give it J? its juft proportion, anfwerable to what you in- tend the whole body fhall be •, then draw the fhoul- ders in their exact breadth :, after them, the trunk of the body beginning at the arm-pits, and fo drawing down to the hips on both fides, obferving withal the exact breadth of the wafte : laftly , draw the legs , arms and hands , exactly to your pattern. I I. But firft draw with a coal, and that very lightly and faintly , drawing nothing perfect (that you may the eafier mend it if it be amifs) and then af- terwards finifh one thing after another as curioufly as you can. III. Let the parallel finews , mufcles, veins and joynts, be placed oppohteone to another in a ftraight line (as fhoulder to moulder, hip to hip, knee to knee, &c.) for which purpofe draw ftraight crofs lines to guide you therein j obferving that which way foever the body turns or bows, thefe lines may anfwer accordingly. I V. Let all perpendicular joints , and parts alio , be placed in a right line one under another (as they are in your pattern) for which end, draw a ftraight line ( if the body be ftraight ) from the throat tho- row the middle of the breaft and privities, to the feet, to which line draw all thofe particular points parallels, that the body may not appear crooked or awry, V. In 20 Polygraphices. Lib. i. V. In bowings and bendings of the body, let the cxtuberaiice of the outward part be juft equal to the compreflion of the inward part -, maki all things of an equal proportion, that as oppofite parts may be equal (as the arm to the arm, leg to leg, &c!) fo every part may be proportionable to. each other . (as the Hand not too big for the arm, nor the anr for the body , nor the body for the legs, &cC) onlj with t hi J difference , that ( as the one part may ap pear fully to the eye , or the other may turn awa} cither in part or in whole, or be fecn fide-way ) it b< made fo much lcfs than the other, by fo much as i; turns away from the fight. V I. As you obferveajuft proportion in bignefs,f( alfo in length, that as every oppofite part be of e qual length, fo that each part may not be too Ions one for another, but according to the propofed mag nitude: And in this cafe that if the body by awry, o. any ways hid, thofe parts may fhorten accordingly to what is out of fight. V I I. Laftly, Obferve the juft diftanceof one thinj from another , for by that means you will be mor * exact in your draught •, and in fhort time , perfecll imitate your pattern or nature- C H A I ■2,1 ! Chap. 10. Of Drawing a naked (Body. 21 C II A P. X. Of Drawing a naked Body. I. TN drawing after the life, as there are variety A of faces, fo no certain Rules can be delivered for the lame , yet the following precautions may be ufeful. I I. Draw out the head in an oval, one fourth part for the hair, one fourth part for the forehead and brows , one fourth for the nofc, and the laft for the mouth and chin. III. Having drawn outthehead,meafure out eight times the length of the head ( the head making one of the eight parts) anddrawaftraight line from the top of the head to the fole of the foot. I V. One heads length from the chin is for the breafl ; the next eighth part reacheth to the navel , the fourth part to the privities , the fifth part to the middle of the thigh, the fixth part to the lower part of the knee, the feventh to the fmall of the leg, and the eighth part to the heel. V. The mufcles you muft obferve to draw exactly as they are in the life : the breadth of the fhoulders, is about two meafures of the head : the breadth of the hips, two meafures of the face : the arms ftretch- ed out , are juft the length of the whole figure , the breafts alfo accounted •, but without the breads they arc but fix. V I. The arms hanging ftraight down reach within a fpan ofthe knee : the length of the hand is the juft length ofthe face. See the two figuers following. V 1 1. Ob- 2X (polygraphices. Lib. 1. V I I. Obferve firfb to draw the head exactly, and next, the fhoulders in their juft breadth : then draw the trunk of the Body, and the reft asatthefirft Se- ction of the ninth Chapter. VIII. Be ftire to place the joynts, finews , and mufcles in their natural places,and alio proportionate- ly •, in refpect of Magnitude , Similitude, and Parts : left it feem crooked and deformed. I X. See that every parallel joynt bend moderately, fo as to anfwer in nature its oppofite. CHAP. XI. Of Shadowing a Naked Body. I. »-pHe Shadows of the Neck, in a child or young X woman, are very fine, rare and hard to be feen: In a man, the finews and veins are expreiTed by ihadowing of the reft of the neck, and leaving them white : the fhoulder is fhadowed underneath : the brawn of the arm muft appear full and white, fhadow- ed on one fide. I I. The veins of the back of the hand and the knuckles are made with two or three hair ftroaks with a fine touch of the pen. I I I. The paps of a man are {hewed by two or three ftroaks given underneath , in a woman with an or- bicular fhade,fomewhat deep •, the ribs retain no fhadow except you reprefent one lean or ftarved. I V. The belly is made eminent by fhadowing un- derneath the breaft bone and the flank : The brawn of Ute thigh is fhadowed by drawing fmall hair ftroaks from Chap, ni ThewayofSiiaiow'mgi 2$ from the hip to the knee , and croITed again over- thwartly. V. The knee is to be finely fhadowed underneath the joint ; the fhin-bone appears by Ihadowing one half of the leg with a fingle fhadow. VI. The ankle-bone appears by ihadowing a little underneath (as in the knees ) and the finews there- of mult feem to take beginning from the midft of the foot-,and to wax bigger as they grow nearer to the toes. VII. Laftly, the fhado ws of the foot mult take place according as reafon and occafion requires, for which (asalfo in all the former precepts ) the having of good prints will be no fmall advantageunto you. CHAP. XII. The way and manner of Shadowing. I. TF it be a furface only,it is belt fhadowed by|draw- JL ing lines either ftraight or oblique, (according as the fuperficies is) through the better hah thereof. I I. If it be in a body, it is a double ihadow, and is tiled when a luperficies begins to forfake your fight, as in Columns and Pillars , where it is double ■ dark- ned, and reprefenteth to the eye, as it were the back- fide, leaving that wifhadowed to the light. I I I. The treble Ihadow is made by crofting over a- gain the double (hadow , and is ufed for the inward parts of things,as in clefts of the earth, wells , caves, the infidesof pots, cups and difhes. IV. In Ihadowing, let the fhac low always fall one way, that is, on the fame fide of the body *, leaving the other to the light. So 14 (Polygrapkices. Lib. I. So in drawing a man, if I begin to fliadow his rigl.t cheeky J rnuf (l)adow the right part of his neck^ arm , fide , thigh , leg., &C V. But if the light fide of the body be darkned by the oppoiition of ibme other body Handing between the light and it, it muft receive a contrary fhadow ac- cording as the light is obfufcated. So if three pillars ft and together, that in the midft muft receive ajhadow on both fides. V I. All circular bodies muft have a circular fhadow ( by the firft Section of this Chapter ) according to their form or appearance,and the orbicular lhadow of the object which cafteth it. V 1 1. Let your fhadow grow fainter and fainter , according to the greatnefs of the diftance from the opacous Body fhadowing. And the reafon is, becanfe all fiiadows are pyramidal, in which cafe, Jpace of place prevails with the light againfi the foadow. V 1 1 1. Where contrary fhadows concur,let the mean- eft and moft folid body be firft ferved •, and in double and treble fhadows, let the firft lines be very dry for tear of blotting, before you crofs them. I X. All perfect lights receive no fhadow at all ; but being manifeft, are only to be made apparent by that body which receives them •, whofe fhadow muft be ac- cording to the efflux of light : but the colour of the light ought to agree with the medium which receives it, whether it be Air, Cryftal, Water, Amber, Glafs, Tranfparent-wine, or the like. CHAP. Chap. 13. OfPaffeons in the Countenance. 25 CHAP. XIII. Of Expreffinv Paffims in the Countenance* K,r * ; /. T Ove is exprefled by a clear, fair and pleafant I ' Countenance, without clouds, wrinkles, or unpleafant bendings : giving the forehead an ample height and breadth with majeftick grace •, a full eye with a fine lhadow at the bottom of the eye- lid, and a little at the corner : a proportionable nofe , noftrils not too wide : a clear cheek made by ftadowing of it on one fide : and a fmiling mouth made by a thin upper lip , and fhadowing the mouth-line at the cornel's. I I. Fear is exprefled by making the eyes look hol- low , heavy and downward , thin fain cheeks, dole mouth, and flaring carelefs hair about the ears, III. Envy is belt decyphered by the only hanging of the cheeks, and a pale countenance •, and fometimes by grinning of the teeth. I V. Let every Palfion be reprefented according to the outward appearance thereof, as it is in thofe per- fons in whom it reigns ; obferving the rules ax the fcflfe Section ofthefeventh Chapter. CHAP. it Polygraphias] -Lib. i. CHAP. XI V. Of Humane Proportion. I. , ~p H E length of an upright body is equal to eight X times the length of the face or head : The arm hanging ftraight down, reacheth within a fpan of the Knee : The length of the hand muft be the length of the face •. The arms extended muft be the juft length of the body. I I. Thofe parts of the oody near to the Eye muft be made greater and longer than thofe farther off, ( be- taufe the eye judgeth fo ofthem) and according to the diftancefrom the eye, ib muft you vary from that which is other wife the real true proportion of thofe parts. III. In forefliortening you muft take things as they appear to the eye, and not to draw the full proportion of each part, but to Ihorten all, according to the rate or reafbn which is obfufcated. ~„ y jv„ WV**- ~- >-r, fi J'YJ- -■'&■'■> Yf Z : T - but only her foreyart (for the reft being hid cannot be ex- preft : ) the like of an horfe looking fall in my fate , or a man lying along, I muft here of necejfity forejhorten, to ex- prefs the Vifuai 'property : And in this cafe your eye and reafon muft be your chief guide to give the true reajon and me afire of the fe appearances, whether in Drawing, Limn- ing or Painting. IV. The ufe of this forefliortening is to exprefs all manner of actions in man or teaft} to reprefent many things ■.sa^oi******* - * 8 ^. ,/ V**J»**J '"? * ■ 2.7 Chap. ij. Of Drapery. if things in a little room •, to ihevv at one view to the eye and mind, the whole body of a Temple, with all its arches and pillars whether the infide or outfide , as alio the {'undry fides of Cities, Cailles and Forts, andfuch like. Laftly, That in every cafe you make Nature the pattern of all draughts, lb that nothing be expreft, but what doth agree and accord with nature •, and that nothing be either forced beyond nature, not yet any thing to come Ihort of nature. ■As if in drawing the picture of a man^ be fare yon draw not fitch apoflure as is impojfible for him to imitate with his natural body. CHAP. XV. Of Drapery, I. I""\Rawthe out-lines of the Garment lightly, anct \_J herein be careful, for the whole grace of the pi&ure lies there \ then draw the greater! folds firft , and ftroak thofe into Idler •, and be lure they crofs one another. I I. Snteyour garments to the body and make them bend with the body, according as it ftandsin or out, ftraight or crooked, or turns one way or another : the clofer the garment fits to the body, the narrower and fmaller mult the folds be. III. All your folds mult confiit of two lines and no more, which you may turn with the garment at pleafure*, fhadowing the innermoit deeper, the outer- C 2 moft- 2 8 Polygraphices. Lib. i. molt more light •, and if the folds be never focuri- onfly contrived , fpare not to fhadow them ( if they fall inward from the light ) with a double or treble fhadow, as the occafion requires. I V. The greater folds muft be continued through the wliclc garment, the lcifer you may break off and fhortcn as you pleafe. V. The (hades of filk and fine linnen are very thick and fmall , which require little folds and a light and rare fhadow, commonly but double at molt - 7 and lb alio fine Drapery requires more and fharper folds than courfe. V I. That part of a garment which fits clofeto the body muft not be folded at all , but only fweetly fhaded , to reprefent the part of the body which lies under it. V 1 1. Obferve the motion of the wind and air , for driving loofe apparel all one way,drawing that part of the garment firlt which lies higheftand clofeftupon the body , before you draw the loofer part that flies eff from the body, left by drawing the loofe part of the garment firft you fhoidd be out , and fo place the body crooked or awry. CHAP. XVI. Of mixed and uncertain Forms, I. T?Or the drawing the form of any beaft , begin Ml with your lead or coal at the forehead , draw- ing downward the nofe , mouth, upper and nether chop, ending your line at the throat-, then viewing it again where you begun , from the forehead, over the head, % 8 W Shawm. fc Chap. 16. Of mixed Forms. 29 head, ears, and neck, continuing till you have given the full compafs of the buttock , then mark out the legs and feet : Viewing it again touch out the breaft with the eminency thereof-, Laftly, finifhthc tail , paws, tongue, teeth, beard, and fever al fha- dows. I I. In drawing beafts you mult be well acquainted with their fhape and a&ion, without which you fhall never perform any thing excellent in that kind : and here if you draw it in an Emblem or the like , you ought to fhew the Landskip of the Country natural to that beaft. III. In birds begin alfo the draught at the head, (and beware of making it too big) then bring, from under the throat the breaft line down to the legs, there ftay and begin at the pinion to make the wing, which being joyned to the back line will be prefently finiihed : the eye, legs and train muft be at laft, letting always ( in birds as in beafts ) the fartheft leg be fhorteft \ their feathers (as the hair in beafts ) muft take their beginning at the head very fmall, and fall in one way backwards in five ranks, greater and greater to the conclufion. I V. Infefts, as flies, beesjwafpsjgralhoppersjworms , and fuch like, are eafie to be drawn and not hard to be laid in Colours •, in doing thefe , it will atfirftbe abfolutelyneceffary to have the living pattern before your eyes. V. To draw a flower,begin from the bofs tufftor wart in the middle-, as in a Rofe or Marigold, with the yellow tufft, which being made , draw lines e- qually divided, from thence to the greateft compafs or extent of your flower : you may draw them ei- ther fully open or in the bud, and laden with dew , wet and worms, and then you may draw rudely with C 3 the 30 Tolygrapbices. < Lib. 1. the coal or lead the leaves afterwards , giving them their veins or jiggednefs. V I. To take the natural and lively fnapc of the leaf of any herb or tree. Firfr , take the leaf that you would have, and gently bruif tioe ribs and veins on the bacVzfide of it : after- wards wet the fide with Unfed oyl , and then, prefs it hard upon a piece of clean white paper, and fo you f) all have the perfect figure of the Jaid leaf, with every vein thereof fo exatlly cxprefl, as being lively coloured it will feem to be truly natural. CHAP. XVII. Of Landslip. I. T Andskip is that which exprcfleth in lines the i_^ perfect vifion of the earth, and all things there- upon, placed above the horizon, as towns, villages, cailles, promontories,monntains,rocks,valleys, mines, rivers, woods, forcfts, chafes, trees, houies and all other buildings, both beautiful and ruinous. II. Firft, Always cxprefs a fair horizon, fnewing the heavens cloudy or clear, raore or iefs according to the occafion; and if you exprefs the Sun, let it be- either as rifing or fetting, and as it were behind or " over fome hill or mountain. Tne Moon and Stars are feldotn or never depilled, un- lefs it be in reprefentation of twilight " 7 becaufe all things are fuf f»dto '"'• Ceen by dav. III. Secondly, If youexprefs the Sun,make his light toreiiedt apon aii the trees, hills, mountains, rocks, or buildings •, madingthe contrary fide, after wich manner Chap. 17. Of Landskip. 31 manner alfo fhadow clouds, mifts , and the like : making the fhadows to fall all one way. I V. Thirdly, be very careful to augment or leflen every thing proportionably to their diitance from the eye, making them either bigger or leiTer. V. In exprefling things at large diftances, as ten , twenty or thirty miles off-, where the object is hard to be difcerned, as whether it be Temple, Caftle , Houfe or the like •, (hew no particular figns thereof, or any eminent diftinction ; but rather as weakly , faintly , and confufedly as the eye judgeth of it. V 1. If Landskips be laid in Colours, the farther you go , the more you muft lighten it with a thin and airy blew , to make it feem as if it were afar off, beginning at firft: with a dark green , fo driving it by degrees into a blew , according to the di- itance. VII. Make your Landskip to ihoot (as it were) away, one part lower than another, making the neareft hill or place higheft , and thofe that are farther off, to moot away under that , that the Landskip may appear to be taken from the top of an hill. VIII. Let every thing have its proper motion, as in trees when they are fhaken with the wind, making the fmaller boughs yielding-, the ftiffer lefs bending: in clouds that they follow the winds : in rivers , the general current, and flaming of the waters againir. the boat fides : in the Sea , the waves and other pro- per agitations •, and laftly, let every thing which mov- eth, whether elfentially or accidentally, have its pro- per reprelentation. I X. Let your work imitate the feafon you intend it for. As if yon intend it for a. winter piece, re\r:fcnt fd~ C 4 Uvjr jl tyolygraphices. s Lib. 1. ling of wood ; fliding upon the Ice ', fowling by night } hunting of Bears or Foxes in the fnow\ making the trees every where naked or laden with the hoarfrofi ; the earth bare without greennefs , flowers or cattel ', the air thicks water frozen, with Carrs paffwg over it and boyes upon it> &c. X. Laftly , let every fite have its proper parerga, adjunfts, or additional graces , as the Farm-houfe , Wind-mill, Water-mill , Woods, Flocks of fheep, Herds of cattel, Pilgrims, mines of Temples, Caftles and Monuments •, with a thoufand fuch other only proper to particular fubje&s. CHAP. XVIII. Of DUpering and Antiqued I. ip\ Tapering, is a tracing or running over your 1_J work again when you have, as it were, quite done, with damask branches, and fuch like. It is ufedto counterfeit cloth of gold , filver, damath^y what faflrion you'pleafe : it is derived from the Greeks word tyA'mi&bo, tranfeo, to pafs over, and only fignifes a light pajfing over the fame again. I I. If you Diaper upon tola's, let your work be bro- ken off accordingly , and taken as it were by the half. For reafon foeweth that the fold cover ethfomething which cannot be feen by reafon of it, which if it was drawn out at length would appear plain. III. Let the whole work be homozene ; that is , let Chap. 18. Of Diapering and Antique. 2$ let the lame work be continued throughout the whole garment , fetting the faireft branch in the moll emi- nent and perfpkuous place , cauling it to run up- wards, for elfe your work would be ridiculous. 1 V. You may either fhadow the ground and leave your work white •, or lhadow your work and leave the ground white •, and as you lhall pleafe in this kind your filling may be with fmall pricks, which will Ihevv very fair. V. Antique ( ab antes ) are butterefles whereon the building is ftayed, as alfo the outwardmoft ranges, ufed in fore-fronts of houfes, in all manner of Com- partments , curious Architecture , Armours, Jewels, and Columns. V f. The form of it is (only for delights fake ) a general or irregular composition of men, beafts, birds , fifties and flowers and fuch like, without either rule or reafon. V 1 1. Laftly, obferve the continuation of one and the fame work, through the whole piece, without the leaf! change or alteration. As if it be naked boys, playing, Wing, fitting, 0Y riding upon Goats, Eagles, Dolphins and the tikg } firings of pearl, Satyrs, Tritons, Apes, Dogs, Oxen, bearing or drawing Fruits , Branches, or any wild fanfie after your own invention, with a thoufand fuch other idle toys ; be fare yon obferve the continuation. CHAP. 34 tPolygraphices". Lib, u » , __, <• 1 ' . ! . CHAP. XIX. To take the f erf eel draught of any Picture: I. 'TpAkea meet of fine J^»«* Paper, wet it all over JL withlinfeed oyl on one fide thereof, which then wipe off as clean as you can - ? let the Paper dry, and lay it on any painted or printed Picture , then with a black-lead pen you may draw it over with eafe : put this oy led paper upon a meet of clean white paper, and with a little pointed flick or feather out of a fwallow's wing, draw over the ftroaks which you drew upon the oyled paper -, fo fhall you have the exact form upon the white paper, which may be jfct out with colours at pleafure- 1 1. Or thus , The picture being drawn as before in the oyled paper, put it upon a (beet of white paper , and prick over the drawing with a pen : then take ibme lmall coal, powder it fine, and wrap it in a piece of fome fine linnen, and bind it up therein loolely , and clap it lightly all over the pricked line by little and little , and afterwards draw it over again once III. Or thw-, Rub a meet of white paper all over on one fide with black-lead , or elle with vermilion mixed with frelh butter •, lay the coloured fide upon a meet of white paper ,then lay the picture you would copy out upon the other fide of the coloured paper, and with a fmall pointed ftick or f wallows quill, go o- ver all the ftroaks of your picture, and it will be exact on the white paper. I V. OrthiH) Lay a piece of Lanthorn horn upon the picture , Chap, i p. To take a perfeB draught. rjj piclure, then draw the ftroaks ofyour pi dure with a hard nibbed pen upon the horn •, and when it is dry, breath upon the horn twice or thrice,and prefs it hard upon white paper a little moiftned. V. Or that, Take an oyled fheet ( as at the firft Se- ction of this Chapter ) rub one fide of it with lamb- black or lake •, lay it upon a fheet of fair paper with the coloured fide downwards , and upon it lay the pi- cture you would coppyout, and trace it over with a i wallows feather. V I. Or thus, Take fine lake mixed with linfeed oyl , and draw with it , inftead of Ink, alltheout- ftroaks of any pidure,ancl other material parts :, then wet the contrary fide of the pi&ure and prete it hard upon a fheet of paper, and it wili leave behind it all that which you drew over. VII. Or thus, Grind Printers black fine, and tem- per it with water, and with a pen dipt in it, draw over the out-lines and mailer ftroaks : wet then fbme white paper with a fpunge or the like, and prefs it hard thereupon •, and you fliall have the ftroaks you drew upon the white paper. VIII. Or thus, Lay the print ( the back-fide of it) upon a clear glafs, or oyled paper, then lay a clean pa- per upon the print*, hold it up againft the light , fb will you fee all the ftroaks which you may draw out, and fhadow alfo if you pleafe. CHAP, 2 6 Polygrtyhices. Lib, i. CHAP. XX. 1* extend or contract a. picture keeping the proportion, I. TJ Ncompafs your picture with one great fquare, Sjj which divide into as many little ones as you pleafe : this done, according as you would have your picture either greater or lefs , make another fquare greater or lefs, which divide into as many equal fquares which be drawn with a black-lead plummet. I I. Take your black-lead pen, and draw the picture by little and little , palling from fquare unto fquare (by the example of the pattern ) until you have gone all over with it : obferving that in what part of the fquare the picture lies, you draw the like part in the fquare anfwerable thereto, till you have finimed the whole. III. Then draw it over with a pen, in which fe- cond drawing of it you may eafily mend any fault, and ihadow it at pleafure. I V. Laftly, When it is throughly dry, rub it over with the crum of white-bread, and it will take off all the black-lead ftroaks , fo will your draught remain fair upon the paper. CHAP. Chap. 21. Offerfpttive in general; 37 CHAP. XXI. Of Per fpe [five in general* o , n T 1 k yC in Greek, PerfpeHiva in Latin , the _ ' Art of feeing in Englifh •, is that by which we be- hold, contemplate, and draw the likenefs of all mag- nitudes, juft in form and manner as they appear to the Eye. II. The mattertobefeenorfpecnlatedisa magni- tude : the manner of fpcculation is by radiations of Light, either direct, reflected or broken. III. A magnitude isthat which hath form j and it is either lineal, fuperficial, or folid \ that is, either a complication of points, a complication of lines , or a complication of fuperficies. V I. A line is a complication of points \ that is (ac- cording to Euclid ) a length only without either breadth or thicknefs. V. A fuperficies is a complication of lines*, that is, a length having breadth without thicknefs. For as the continuation ofpointi makes a line : fo the couching of lines makes a fuperficies : which is only the laying of points cr of s-wife. VI. A folid is a complication of fuperficies j that is, a length and breadth, having depth or thicknefs. And indeed it is nothing but the continuation of points upon a fuperficies either perpendicularly or bending. VII. The Contemplation of the Object reprefents the matter to the mind, in the lame manner as its out- ward appearance doth to the Eye. And from hence comes Judgment where by the Artifi i$ enabU4 38 Volygraphkes. Lib. 1. enabled to defcribe the fame in lines *, and delineate it , according to its apparent or vifual proportions. VIII. To draw or defcribe the Appearance in lines is the active part of this Art, whereby the Idea con- ceived in the mind (by fight and contemplation ) is brought to light. I X. A radiation is a beam of light, conveighing the likenefs of the thing, to the Eyes, or light - and the Knowledge thereof to the mind or underftanding. And this radiation is twofold-, either external from the external light, or intelleHnalfrom its being and power. X. Dirett radiations are thofe which confider the direct or ftreight beams, which pafs between the eye and the object. And this is the firfi kind of perfpective ; and is many times {alone ) called the Opticks. XL Reflected radiations are thofe Which confider the reflection of beams, and their lhape upon anypo- lifh'd body, as on a Globe , Gone, Cylinder, Pyramid, or any regular folid. And this is the fecond kind of Perfpettive ; which is called the Art Catoptrica. XII. Broken radiations are thofe which confider the breaking of beams , as they are to be feen through a glafsora Cryftal cut into feveral plains Or luperficies. And this is the third and loft kjnd of Perfpettive, which is called the Art Dioptrica. CHAP, Chap. %i> The aElive part of cal figure is ffraight,perpendicular, or parallel to its bafe, befoalfo in its Scenographick delinea- tion. II. Let the lines which in the object return at right Angles from the fore-right fide , be drawn Sce- nographically from the VHual point. III. Let all itraight lines, which in the object re- turn from the fore-right-fide, run in a Scenographick figure into the Horizontal line. I V. Let the object you intend to delineate ftanding on yo»r right hand, be placed alfo on the right hand of the vifual point : and that on the left hand, on the left hand on the fame point: and that which is juil be- fore, in the middle of it. V. Let thofe lines which are ( in the object ) E- quidiftant to the returning line, be drawn in the Scenographick figure, from that point found in the Horizon. VI. In fetting off the altitude of Columns, Pe- deftals and the like,meafure the height from the bafe- line upward in the front or fore-rigbt-fide ■, and a vi- fual ray drawn , that point in the front (hall limit the altitude of the Column or pillar, all the way be- hind the fore-right-fide or Orthographick appearance, even to the vifual point. This rule yonmufi obfervc m all figures -,a c well where there is a front cr fore-rwht-fide, as where th.re is none. D 2 Vll.In I 44 iPolygraphicesl Lib. t- VII. In delineating 6vals,Circles,Arches,Crofles, Spirals and .Oofs-arches, or any other figure, in the roof of any room •, firft draw Ichnographically,and ib with perpendiculars, from the moft Eminent points thereof, carry it up unto the Ceiling, from which feve- ral points carry on the figure. VIII. The center in any Scenographick regular figure is found by drawing crofs- lines from oppofite .angles : for the point where the Diagonals crofs is the Center. IX. Aground plain of fquares is alike, both above and below the Horizontal line ; only the more it is diftant above or beneath the Horizon, the fquares will be fo much the larger or wider. X. In drawing a peripe&ive figure , where many lines come together, you may for the directing of your eye, draw the Diagonals in red *, the vifual lines in black •, the Perpendiculars in green, or other different colour from that which you intend the figure fhall be of. X I. Having confidered the height , diftance and pofition of the figure , and drawn it accordingly , with file or angle againftthe bafe:, raife perpendicu- lars from the feveral angles or deligned points in the figure, to the bafe, and transfer the length of each r\.-im^nXr"ll" <-*. <->.v< •♦-U/-. -~1.-.^~ ,„U— « If- «-/>ii^Vli3pi ♦"Ho b».l|j\,nui^uiai , m/iii lii\/ ijia>_C vvuv.1^ il LJUulkj tilt. bafe , to the bafe on the fide oppofite to the point of diftance •, fo will the Diametrals drawn to the per- pendiculars in the bafe, by interferon with the Dia- gonals drawn to the feveral transferred diftances, give the angles of the figure : and fo lines drawn from point to point will circumfcribe the Scenographick figure. XII. If in Landskip there be any ffanding wa- ters, as Rivers, PoiMs, and the like:, place the Ho- rizontal Chap. 24. The [waftke of (Perfpectiye. 45 rizontal line level with the fartheft fight or appearance of it. X 1 1 J. If there be any houfes or the like in the pi- cture, confider their pofition, that you may find from what point in the Horizontalline to draw the fronts and licks thereof. XIV. In defcribing things at a great diftance, ob- ferve the proportion ("both in magnitude and diftance) in draught , which appears from the object: to the eye. XV. In colouring and fhadowing of every thing, you mull do the fame in your picture which you ob- ierve with your eye, efpeciaily in objects lying near-, but according as the diftance grows greater and grea- ter , fo the coiours mail be fainter and fainter , till at laft they lofe themfelves in a darkilh sky- colour. XVI. The Catottrkhs are beft feen in a common looking-glafs or other polifh'd matter , where if the glafs be exactly flat, the object is exactly like its ori- ginal : but if the glafs be not flat, the reiemb lance al- ters from the original, and that more oriels, accor- ding as the glafs differs from an exact plain. XVII. In drawing Ctfowridjigures, the furfacc of the glafs is to be confiderea, upon which yon mean to have the reflect ion-, for which you muft make a par- ticular Ichnographical draught or projection •, which on the glafs mult appear to be a plain full of fquares , on which projection transfer what fliall be drawn , on a plain divided into the lame number of like fquares : vyhere though the draught may appear very con- fufed, yet the reflection thereof on the glafs will be very regular, proportional and really compofed. XVIII. The D ioptrick.pt broken beam m ay be feen in a tub, throughaCryftal, or Glafs, which hath its D 3 furface 4 6 Polygraphices. Lib. il furface cut into many others, whereby the raies of the object are broken. For to the fat of the Cryfial or water-, the raies run freight ; but then they break* and make an Angle , the which alfo by the ref ratted beams is made and continued on ' the ether fide of the fame fiat. XI X. When thefe faces on a Cryftal are returned to" wards a plain placed directly before it, they feparate themfelvcs at a good diftance on the plain-, becaufe they are all directed to various far diftant places of the lame. XX. But for the aligning to each of them a place on the fame plain , no Geometrick rule is yet in- vented. CHAP. XXV. ' A Rational Demon (Iration ofchiromanticaH, Signatures • Added by way of Appendix t$ Chap. VIII. of this Book, T- THc foundation of Chiromancy depends upon M the true appropriation of the feveral mounts, fingers, or places in the hand, to their proper Stars or Planets. I I. The Ancients have affigned the root of the middle finger to Saturn \ of the fore-finger to Jupiter : the hollow of the hand to Mars : the root of the ring-finger to Sol : of the thumb to Venus : of the little finger to Mercury: and laftly, the brawn of the hand near the wriil to Luna. III. That line which comes round the ball of the thumb Ibbl 7 7.7. J^j CHAP. VII. Of Etchlng,a»d the Materials thereof, I. T? Tching is an artificial Engraving of Brafs or Ct Copper-plates with Aquafortis. i II. The Inftruments of Etching (befides the plate) are thefe nine. i. Hard Farm (I). 2. Soft Varnifi. 3^ Prepared OyU 4. Aquafortis. 5. Needles. 6. OyU ftone. 7. Brufh-Pencil. 8. Bur??ijlier. 9. The Framt and Trough. III. To polifi the plate. Although in Chap. 2. of this Book, we have fufn- ciently taught how to polifh. the plate, yet nevcrthe- lefs we think it convenient to fubjoyn thefe following words. Firft, the plate being well planifhed or forged, choofe the fmootheft fide to polifh - 7 then fix it upon a board a little declining, and rub it firmly and evenly all over with a piece of Grindftone, throwing water often on it, fo long till there be no dints, flaws, or marks of the hammer : wafh it clean, and with a piece of good Pumice-ftone, rub it fo long till there be no rough ftroaks or marks of the Grindftone : wafh it clean again , and rub it with a fine Hoan and water till the marks of the Pumice-ftone are rubbed out : wafh it again, and with a piece of Charcoal without knots ( being heat red hot and quenched in water , theoutfide being pared off J rub the plate with water till all the fmall ftroaks of the Hoan be vanilhed •, laftly,if yet there remain any finall ftroaks or fcratches, rub them out with the end of the burnifhing Iron, io fhallthe plate be fitted for work. E 2 IV* 7* 6q Tolygraphkesl Lib. 2. 1 V. To make the hard Varnifli for Etching. Take Greek or Burgundy-pitch, Colophonium or RovAn, of each five ounces, Nut-Oyl four ounces", melt the Pitch or Rozin in an earthen pot upon a gentle fife •, then put in the Oyl, and let them boil tor thefpace of half an hour: cool it a little upon a fofter fire till it appear like a Glewy fyrrup : cool it a little more, ftrainit, and being almoit. cold, put it into a glafed-pot for ufe. Being thus made it will keep at leaft twenty years. V. To make the foft Vamifn for Etching. Take Virgin-wax three ounces, Maftich in drops two ounces, Afphaltum one ounce : grind the Ma- ftich and Afphaltum feverally very fine : then in an earthen pot melt the wax and ftrew in the Maftich and Afphaltum, ftirringall upon the fire till they be well diflblved and mixed, which will be in about half a quarter of an hour-, then cooling it a little , pour it into a bafon of fair water (all except the dregs) and with your hands wet ( before it is cold) form it into rouls. V I. To make the prepared Oyl. Take Oyl Olive, make it hot in an earthen pot,and pj.it into it a fuificient quantity of tried Sheeps fuet (fo much as being dropped upon a cold thing,the oyl may be a little hardened and firm ) boil them together for an hour , till they be of a reddifh colour, left rhey ihould feparate when you ufe them. This mixture is to make the fat more liquid, and not cool fo faft,for the fat alone would be no fooner on the pencil, but it would grow cold \ and be fure to put in more oyl ia j Winter than in Summer. ■ V 11. To make the Aquafortis. Take diftilled White- wine Vinegar three pints j Sal- Armoniack, Bay-falt of each, fa ounces ? Verdegriefe four Chap. 7, Of Etching. 61 four ounces. Put all together into a large well glazed earthen pot (that they may not boil over) cover the pot ciofe, and put it on a quick. fire,and let it fpeedi- ly boil two or three great walmsand no more :, when it is ready to boil uncover the pot, and ftir it fome- times witna ftick, taking heed that it boil not over: having boiled, take it from the fire, and let it cool be- ing clofe covered, and when it is cold, put it into a Glafs bottle with a Glafs ftopple : If itbetooftrong in Etching weaken it with a glafs or two of the feme Vinegar you made it of. There is another fort at' A~ qHa-fortis^ which is called Common, which is exhibit- ed in SynofRs Medkim, lib. ^.cap.j. fett. 4. prfg". 656. But became that Book may not be in every mans hand, we will here infert it -, it is thus : Take dried Vitriol two pound, Salt-peter, one pound, mix them and di- ftil by a Retort, in open fire by degrees. V 1 1 1. To make the Et chin gNee dies. Choofe Needles of feveral fizes fuch as will break without bending, and of a fine grain •, then take good round flicks of firm wood (not apt to folk) about fix inches long, and as thick as a large Goole-quill, at the ends of which fix your Needles fo that they may ftand out of the fticks about a quarter of an inch or fomething more. I X. To whet the joints of the Needles with the Oyl~ fione. If you would have them whetted round, you mult whet their points fhort upon the Oyl-ftone ( not as Jqwing Needles are) turning them round whilft you whet them, as Turners do. If you whet them (lo- ping, firlt make them blunt upon the Oyl-ftone , then holding them firm and fteady 1 whet them Hoping upon one fide only , till they come to a fhort and roundifhoval. E ■< X. The 6i Volygrafhices. Lib* 2. X. The brufh pencil is to cleanfe the work, wipe ofFduft,and to ftrike the colours even over the ground or varnifh, when laid upon the plate. X I. The burnifher is a well hardened piece of fteel fbmewhat roundifh at the end. Its ufes are what we have fpoken at the fixth Section of the firft Chapter , and the third Se&ion of the fecond Chapter. XII. To make the Frame and Trough. The Frame is an entire board , about whofe top and fides is faftned a ledge two inches broad , to keep the Aquafortis from running off from the fides when you pour it on : the lower end of this board muft be placed in the Trough , leaning Hoping againft a wall or fome other thing , wherein you muft fix ieveral pegs of wood to reft the plate upon. The ,Trough is made of a firm piece of Elm or Oke fet up- on four legs, whole hollow is four inches wide \ and fo long as may belt fit your ufe : the hollow muft be fomething deeper in the middle, that the water run- ning thither way fall through a hole ( there made for thatpurpofe) into an earthen pan well Leaded. The in fide of this board and trough mttfi be covered over with a thicks oyl colour^ to hinder the Aqua-fortis/Vww gating or £ H A K Chap. 8. Of ufeng the bard Varnifh. <5j CHAP. VIII. The way and manner of ufing the harci Varnifh. I- TT Aving well heat the polifhed plate over a JLX Chafing difh of coals, take fome of the firft varnifh with a little ftick, and put a drop of it on the top of your finger , with which lightly touch the plate at equal distances, laying on the varnifh equally, and heating the plate again as it grows cold , keeping it carefully from duft or filth j then with the ball of your thumb tap it upon the plate j ftill wiping your hand over all , to make it more finooth and equal. And here beware that neither the varnijli be too thick, ufon the plate, nor your handfweaty. II. Then take a great lighted candle burning clear,- with a ftiort fnufF, ( placing the corner of the plate againftawallj hold the varnilhed fide downward o- ver the candle, as clofe as you can , fo it touch not the varnifh , guiding the flame all over, till it is all perfectly black, which you mult keep from duft or filth till it is dry. III. Over a fire of Charcoals hang the varnifhed plate to dry with the varnifh upwards , which will fmoak ; when the fmoak abates, take away the plate, and with a pointed ftickferatch near the fide thereof, and if the varnifh eafily comes off, hang it over the fire again a little, fo long till the varnifh will not too eafily come off, then take it from the fire and let it cool. E 4 )} (>4 tPolygraphices. Lib. 2. If the varmfhjhoHldbe toohard, cafi cold water on the backzfide of the plate to cool it y that the heat may not make it too hard and brittle. This done, IV. Place it upon a low desk, or fome fuchlike thing, and cover that part which you do not work . on, with a fheetoffine white paper, and over that a fheet of brown paper, on which may reft your hand, to keep it from the varnifh. V. If you ufe a ruler, lay fome part of it upon the paper, that it may not rub off* the varnilh •, and have an efpecial care, that no dull: or filth get in between the paper and the varnilh, for that will hurt it. CHAP. IX. The V0HJ find, manner of Etching* I. TN making lines or hatches, fome bigger, fome JL lefler, ftraight or crooked, you muft ufe feveral forts of Needles, bigger or lefler as the work requires. II. The great lines are made by leaning hard on the Needle \ its point being fhort and thick, (but around point will not cut the varnifn clear : ) or by making divers lines,or hatches, one very clofe to another, and then by paffing over them again with a thicker Needle j or by making them with an indifferent large needle , snd letting the jiquafortis lie the longer thereon. The heft Needles for this workjtre fmh as are whet flo- wing with an oval y becaufe their fides will cat that which the round ones will not. III. If your lines or hatches ought to be of an equal thicknefs from end to end, lean on the needle with an equal Chap. 9. Of Etching. 6<[ equal force •, leaning lightly where you would have the lines or ftroaks fine or fmall •, and more heavy where you would have the lines appear deep or large \ thereby the needle may have fome Impreffion in the Copper. IV. If your lines or hatches be too fmall,pafs over them again with a fhort round point, of fuch a bignefs as you would have the line of , leaning ftrongly where you would have the line deep. V. The manner of holding the needle with oval points (which are moft proper to make large and deep ftroaks) is much like that of a pen, only the Hat fide whetted is ufually held towards the thumb : but they may be ufed with the face of the oval turned to- ward the middle finger. V I. If you would end with a fine ftroak, you ought to do that with a very fine needle. VII. In ufing the oval points,hold them as upright and ftraight in your hand as you can, ftriking your ftroaks firmly and freely, for that will add much to their beauty and clearness. VI f I. In Landskips , in places fartheft from the fight , as alfo near eft the light, ufe a very ilender point, leaning fo lightly with your hand as to make a final! faint ltroak. I X. In working be careful to brum, off* all the duft which you work ofFwith the needles. CHAP. 66 Pdygraphices. Lib. i, CHAP. X. Of ttfing the Aqua- fords.' I. TF there be any ftroaks which you would not have A the Aquafortis eat into ^ or any places where the varnifh is rubbed off, melt fome prepared Oyl , and with a pencil, cover thofe places pretty thick. I I. Then take a brum, pencil, or rag,and dip it in the prepared oyl, and rub the back-fide of the plate all over , that the Aqua-fort is may not hurt it, if by chance any mould fall thereon. I I I. Before you put the Aquafortis to the plate, gently warm or dry the plate by a fire to dry up the humidity, which it might contract by reafon of the Air ; and to prevent the breaking up the varnifn upon the firit. pouring the Aquafortis thereon. I V. Place the plate by the 12th. Section of the 7th. Chapter of this Book, and with the Aquafortis in an earthen pot pour upon the plate, beginning at the top, fo moving your hand that it may run all over the plate, which do for eight or ten times: then turn it cornerwife, and pour the Aquafortis on it that way ten or twelve times •, and then turn it again corner- wife the other way, pouring on the Aquafortis eight or ten times as before •, doing thus feveral times for the fpace of half a quarter of an hour or more, accor- ding to the ftrength of the water, and nature of the Copper. For there tnufi be lefs time allowed to hard and brittle Coffer for fowimg on the Aqua-fortis , but more to the fift. V.But Chap^ io^ Ofuftng the Aquafortis. 6/ V. But you muft have fpccial regard to cad on the Aqua-f orris as occafion fhall require* and work is ; caiting it on at icveral times, and on feveral places •, where you would have it very deep , often - where lefs deep, fewer times : where light, lefs yet :, where lighter, lefieryet : and where fo light as it can fcarcely be feen , once or twice : wafh it with water, and co- ver it where you would have it lighter. V I. Having thus covered your plates as occafion re- quires •, for the fecond time, place the plate on the Irame as aforefaid, and pour on it your Aquafortis for a full half hour. VII. Then wafh it with water and dry it, covering the places which require lightnefs or faintnefs ( that they may be proportionable to the defign) then pour on the Aqua-f orris for the laft time more or lefs accor- ding to the nature of your work, and the deepnefs that it requires. V I I I. You may rub off the varnifli or ground, as occafion \m your work requires with a Charcoal, to fee whether the water hath eaten deep enough •, by which you may judge of the Ipace of time, that you are after to imploy in pouring on the Aqua-f onis^ in the works you will have to do, which if the (hadows require much depth , or ought to be very black, the water ought to be poured on (at the leaft time ) for an hour or better \ yet know no c mam rule of time cm tye limited for this. CHAP. 68 (Polygraphkes. Lib, u CHAP. XL Of Finishing the work\ I. A LL the former operations being done, wafh XJl the plate with fair water •, and put it wet upon the fire, till the mixture be well melted, and then wipe it very clean on both fides with a linnen cloth, till you have cleanfed it of all the mixture. I I. Take Charcoal of Willow, take offthe rind of it, and putting fair water on the plate, rub it with the Charcoal, as if you were to polilh it, and it will take offthe varnim. Where note, that the Coal muft be free from all knots and roughnefs, and that no fand or filth fall upon the plate. III. Take ordinary Aquafortis, to which add two third parts of water, and with fome linnen rags dip- ped therein rub the plate all over, fo will you take away itsdifcolouring, and recover its former beauty. IV. Then take dry linnen rags and wipe the plate 10 a.3 lv/ cai\>- On nit cii*- cii\>xvxin-^i "■••»] u »— »..»»----« ing it a little to the fire, put upon it a little Oyl Olive, and with a piece of an old Beaver rolled up rub the plate well all over, and laftly, wipe it well with a dry cloath. V. Then if any places need touching with the Graver, as fometimes it happens, efpecially where it is to be very deep or black, perfe&them with care-, which done, the plate is ready for the Rolling-Prefs. CHAP- Chap. 12. Of ufingthefoftVcirmfr. 69 CHAP. XII. The way of ufwg the foftFarm(b. I. ~|~HE plate being prepared by cleanfingitwith 1 a Charcoal and clean water, waili it well and dry it, then with fine white Chalk fcraped and a fine rag, rub it well over, not touching it with your fin- gers. I I. Lay down your plate over a Chafing-difh of fmali-coal, yet fo as the fire may have air-, then take the ground or foftvarniih (it being tied up in a fine rag ) and rub it up and down the Copper, foas it may lufficiently cover it, (not too thin nor too thick:) then take a feather and fmooth it as well as poflibly you can all one way, and then crofs it, till it lie very well. But yon muft take heed that the plate be not too hot, for if it lie till the ground fmoakj, the moifture will de dried up> and that mil fpoil the workj> and make the ground breaks or fly up. I I I. Then grind fome White-lead with Gum- wa- ter, ib that it may be of a convenient thicknefs to fpread on the Copper •, and with a large pencil , or fmall brufh, ftrike the plate crofs over, twice or thrice till it is fmooth-, and then with a larger brufh (made of Squirrels tails) gently fmooth the white, and then let it lie till it is dry. I V. Or you may black the varnifh with a Candle,as we taught at the Second Section of the Eighth Chap- ter, and then warm it over the fire, till the varnifh be- gin to melt. CHAP. -a Tolygraphkes* Lib. ll CHAP. XIII. The way of Etching upon the foft Vdrmflf. L rp^HE way of Etching is the fame with that in L the hard varnifh •, only you muft he careful not'to hurt your varnifh, which you may do by pla- cing on the fides of your plate two little boards, and laying crofs over them another thin one, fo .as that it may not touch the plate, on which you muft reft your hand whillt you work. I I. Then place the plate on a Desk(if you fo pleafe) for by that means the fuperfluous matter will fall a- way of it felf. ' • f I I I. But if you have any defign to transfer upon the plate from any Copy or Print, icrapeon the backfide thereof fome red Chalk all over - 7 then go over that, by fcraping fome foft Charcoal , till it mingle with the Chalk •, and with a large ftiffpencil rub it all over till it be fine and even, and fo lay down the defign up- on the plate : with a blunt Needle draw over the out ftroaks: and as yourvorl^ you need not [cratch hard into thp Conner, anhi Co as Mou maS fee the Needle go through — it 3 SJ ^ J *:" the Varnifh to the Comer. I V. Always be lure when you leave the work , to wrap the plate up in Paper, to keep it from hurt, and corrupting in the air, which may dry the varnifh -.and in Winter time wrap the plate up in a piece of wollen , as well as paper, for if the froft get to it, itwillcaufe the varnifh to rife from the Copper in the eating. An inconveniency alfo will accrew , by letting the V*f* m[li lie too long upn the Plate before the work & fnijhed \ Chap. 14. OfFmiflring the Work. 71 for three or four months will consume the moiftnre andfo Jfpoil all. _ V. The marking of the defign upon the foft var- nifh, is beft done with Black-lead or Chalk , if the ground is white ^ but with red Chalk, if the ground is black. VI. Having Graved what you intend upon the var- nifh, take fome fair water, a little warm , and cafe it upon the Plate-, and then with a foft clean Spunge, rub upon the White-lead to moiften it all over j and then wafh the plate to take away the whiting , and dry it. VII. Or laftly , with Aqua-foris mixed with fair water, wafh it all over, aad by this means you may take away the whiting, which then wafh with com- mon water and dry it •, and thus have you the plate prepared for the Aqm-fortis. CHAP. XIV. Of ufing the AquA-fortis , And finifbing the work, 1. l^Ut foft wax ( red or green ) round the brims 1 of the plate,and let it be raifed above the var- nifh about half a Barley Corns length \ fo that placing the plate level, the water being poured upon the plate may by this means be retained. This done, II. Take common Aqua-form fix ounces, common water two ounces -, mix them, and pour it gently up- on the plate, fo that it may cover it fully all over •, fo will the Itronger hatchings be full of bubbles, while the, yr (Polygraphices. Lib. 2. the fainter will appear clear for a while, not making any fudden opperations to the view. III. When you perceive the water to operate a fmall time , pour it off into a glazed earthen difh, and throw fair water upon the plate, to wafh away the Aqna-fortis, then dry the plate : and where you would have the Cut to be faint, tender or fweet, cover it with the prepared Oyl, and then cover the plate again with Aquafortis as before, leaving it on for eight or ten minutes, or longer : then put off the Aqua- fortis as before warning and drying the plate , and covering with the prepared Oyl other places which you would not have ib deep as the reft : Laftly, put on the Aqua-fortis again, for the fpace of half an hour (more or lels) and then pour it off, warning the plate with fair water as before. As yon would have yowr lines or firoaks to be deeper and deeper-, fo cover the fweeter or fainter farts by degrees with the prepared Oyl, that the Aqua-fortis may lie the longer on the deep firoaks. Then, 1 V. Takeoff the border of wax, and heat the plate, fo that the Oyl and varnifh may throughly melt \ which wipe away well with a linnen cloth : then rub the plate over with Oyl Olive and a piece of an old Beaver roll'd up, which done, touch it with the Gra- ver where need is. V, But if any thing be(atlaft) forgotten*, then rub the plate aforefaid with crums of bread, fo well-that no filth or oyl remain upon the plate. V I. Then heat the plate upon a Charcoal fire, and fpread the foft varnilh with a feather upon it (as be- fore) fo that the hatchings may be filled with varnilh *, black it and then touch it over again , or add what you intend, VII. Let Chap, i j. Of Limning, Sec. 71 V 1 1. Let your hatchings be made by means of the Needles, according as the manner of die work mall require, being careful before you put on the Aqua- fortis, to cover thefirft graving on the plate with the prepared Oyl, ( left the varnifh mould not have cove- red all over : ) then caufe the Aqita-fortis to eat into the work :, and laftly cleanfe the plate as before. C H A P. X V. Of Limning) and the Materials thereof. I. 1 Imningjsan Art whereby in water Colours 4 1— / we ftrive to refemble Nature in every thins to the life. I I. The Inftruments and Materials thereof are chiefly thefe. 1. Gum. 2. Colours. 3. Liquid Gold and Silver. 4. The Grind- ft one and Mdler. 5. Pencils. 6. Tables to Limn in. 7. Little glafs or China- dijhes. III. The Gums are chiefly thefe four, Gum- Ara- bick, Gum-Lake, Gum-Hedera, Gum-Armoniack. I V. The principal Colours are thefe feven, White , Blacky Red, Green, Tellow, Blew, Brown : out of which are made mixt or compound Colours. V. The Liquid Gold and Silver is either natural or artificial. The natural is that which is produced of the Me- tals themfelves : the artificial is that which is formed of other colours. VI. The G rinding- ft one ■> Mutter, Pencils, Tables , and Shells, or little China-diflies are only the necellary inltruments and at tendants, which belong to the pra- ctice of Limning, F CHAP, / i\ Jt'viygrapmces. Lib. 2. CJHAP. XVI. Of the Gums and their life. I. *TpH: chief of all is Gum-Arabick , that which JL is white, clear and brittle •, the Gum-water of it is made thus : Take Gum-Arabich^, bruife it and tie it up in a fine clean" Unnen cloath, and put it into a convenient quantity of pure fpring-water, in a glafs or earthen vcjfel ; letting the Gum remain there till it is diffolved '■, which donejf the water is not flijf enough, put more Gum into the cloath; but if too fiiff, add more water : of which Gum- water have two Ibrts by you, the one ftrong,the other weak', of which you may make a third at pleafure. But if you be where Gum-Arabick is not to begot, you may inltead of that ufe the preparation of Sheeps- leather or parchment following. Take of the jhreds of white Sheep-skws (which are to be had plentifully at Glovers ) or elfe of parchments^ one pound \ Conduit or runing water two quarts, boil it to a thin gelly, then fir am it whilfl hot through afnefirainer^ und jo ufe it. I I. Gum-lake, it- is made of whites of Eggs beaten and {trained a pint , Honey , Gum-Hedera , of each two Drachms,ftrong wort four fpoonfuls , mix them, and ftrain them with a piece of fpunge till they run like a clear oyl, which keep in a clean vcflcl till it grows hard. This Gum will dijfolve in water like Gum- Arabic^ of which Gum-water is made in like manner -, it is a good ordinary varnifh for Pictures. I I I. Gum-Hedera, or Gum of Ivy \ it is gotten out of Chap. 17. Of Colours in General. ?j of Ivy, by cutting with an Axe a great branch thereof, climbing upon an Oak-tree, andbruiilng the ends of it with the head of the Axe ; at a Months end, or thereabouts* you may take from it a very clear, and pure fine Gum , like oyl, It is geod to put into Gold-fize and other Colours, for thefe three re afons : i. It abates theillfent ofthefizje: 2. It will prevent bubbles in Gold-Jiz,e and other Colours : 3. Lofty, it takes away the fat and clamminefs of Colours : be/tdes which it is of ufe in making Pomanders. - IV. Gum-Armoniacum, It is aForrein Gum, and ought to be brought {trained. Grind it very fine with juiceof Garlickand a little Gum- Arabick-water, lb that it may not be too thick, but that you may write with it what you will. When yon ufe it, draw what yon will with it, and let it dry , and when you gild upon tt, cut your Gold or Sil- ver to the fashion which you drew with the fiijc or gum, then breath upon the fz,e, and lay the Gold upon it gently tal^en up, which prefs down hard with apiece of wool ; and then let it well dry *, being dryed, wi'hafne Unnen c loath firike off the loofeGold, fo will what was drawn be fairly gilded if it was as fine at a hair : it is called Gold-Ar*> moniackz CHAP. x k v 1 r. Of the feven Colour sin General* I. *T» H E chief Whites are thefe, Spodium, Cefufs, \ White-lead, Spanijb-white , £gg- 11 lels burnt. Thh Colour is called in Greikfwxh of aww, video, F 2 to yG Tolygraph'iHs'. Lib. 2. to fee, becaufe xivkoths «r/ Grafs or Green Herb, which is of this Colour. V. The chief 7V//t (rjt/«cT4/, from darkning the Light, in Greek ysuof. CHAP. XVIII. Of Colours in V Articular, I. f^SEmfe, Grind it with glair of Eggs, and it will \^J make a molt perfect white. II. White-lead, Grind it with a weak water of Gum- lake, and let it itand three or four days, after which if you mix' with it R.cfct and Vermilion, it makes a fair Carnation. III. Spanijh-white , It is the belt white of all, to garnifh with, ground with weak Gum-water. IV. Lamp-blac^ ground with Gum- water, it makes a good black. V. Vermilion, Grind it with the glair of an Egg , and in the grinding put a little clarified honey, to make its colour bright and perfed. V I. Sinaper-lake, it makes a deep and beautiful red, or rather purple, almoft like unto a Red-rofe. Grind it with Gum-lake and Turnfole-water : if you will have it light, add a little Cerufe, and it will make it a bright Crimfon j if to Diaper, add only Turnfole water. VII. Red-lead , Grind it with fome Saftbrn, and ftiff Gum-lake-, for the Saflbrn makes it orient, and of a Marigold colour. VIII. Tumfoky Lay it in a Sawcer of Vinegar, and let it over a Chafing-diih of coals •, let it boil , then take it off", and wring it into a fhell, adding a little F 3 Gum* 1 78 rolygraphicesi Lib. 2. Gum-Arabick , let it ftand till it is diflblved : It is good to fhadow Carnation, and all Yellows. I X. Xofit, Grind it with Brazil-water, and it will make a deep purple : putCerufeto it, and it will be lighter \ grind it with Litmofe, and it will make a fair Violet. X. Spamfo-brown , Grind it with Brazil-water : mingle it with Cerufe and it makes a horfe-fleih Co- lour. X I. Boh-Armomacl^ It is a faint colour 1 its chief ufe is, in making iize for burnifh'd gold. XII. Green bice. Order it as you do Blew bice*, when it is moift, and not through dry, you may Diaper up- on it with the water of deep green. XIII. Verdegriefe, Grind it with juyce of Rue,and a little weak Gum- water , and you will have a moffc pure green: if you will Diaper with it, grind it with Lye of Rue (or elfe the deco&ion thereof ; and there will be a hoary green : Diaper upon Verdegriefe-green with Sap-green : alfo Verdegriefe ground with white Tartar, and then tempered with giim-water, gives a molt perfect green. XIV. Vtrditure, grind it with a weak Gum-Ara- bick water : it is the fainteft green that is, but is good to lay upon black, in any kind of Drapery. ' X V. Sap ireen •, lay it in iharp Vinegar ail night *, put it into a little Alomto raife its colour , and you will have a good green to Diaper upon other greens. XVI. Orpimenty ArfenicumOx: AuripgmenmmjgwS. it with a itiffwater of Gum-lake, becaufe it is the belt colour of it felf,it will lie upon no green, for all greens, White and Red-lead, and Gerufe ftainit: wherefore you muft deepen your colours fo that the Orpiment may be higheft, and fo it may agree with all Colours. XVII. Map*- Chap. 18. Of Colours in Particular. 79 XVII. Mafticot, grind it with a fmall quantity of Saifronin gum-water, and never make it lighter than it is : it will endure to lie upon all colours and me- tals. XVIII. Saffron-, Steep it in glair : it may be ground with Vermilion. XIX. Pinkyellow, if you woujd have it fad coloured^ grind it with Saffron-, if light, with Cerufe : mix i with weak gum- water , and fo ufeit. X X. Oker de Luce, grind it with pure Brazil water : it makes a paifing hair colour - y and is a natural fha- dow for gold. XXI. Vrnbery It is a more fad colour. Grind it with gum-water, or gum-lake j and lighten it ( if you pleafe) with a little Cerufe and a blade of Saffron. XXII. Vltramarine , If you would have it deep, grind it with Litmofe- water-, but if light, with fine Cerufe, and a weak Gum-Arabick water. XXIII. Indicoy grind it with water of Gum-Ara- bick, as Ultramarine. XXIV. Blew bice, grind it with clean water , as fmall as you can, then put it into a (hell, and wafh it thus : put as much water to it as will fill up the vefiel or fhell, and ftir it well, let it ftand an hour , and the filth and dirty water call: away -, then put in more clean water, do thus four or five times \ and at laft put in Gum-Arabick water fomewhat weak , that the Bice may fall to the bottom -, pour off the gum-water , and put more to it , warn it again , dry it , and mix it with weak gum-water ( if you would have it rife of the fame colour ) but with a ftiff water of Gum-lake, if you would have a moll perfect blew •, if alight blew, grind it with a little Cerufe j but if a molt deep blew, add water of Litmofe. F 4 XXV.5™*i «' 8o (Polygrapbices. Lib. 2. XXV. Smalt i grind it with a little fine Rofet, and it will make a deep Violet : and by putting in a quan- tity of Cerufe, it will make a light Violet. XXVI. Liemofe-blew , grind it with Ceruie : with too much Litmofe it makes a deep blew 7 with too much Cerufe, a light blew: grind it with the weak water of Gum Arabick. Take fine Litmofe, cut it in pieces, lay it in weah^ wa- ter of Gum-lake for twenty four hours, and you jhall have a water of a moft perfect Azjtre ; wit h which water yon may Diaper and Damask^ upon all other blews , to make them (hew more fair and beautiful. XXVII. Orchal, grind it withunflak'd Lime and Urine, it makes a pure Violet: by putting to more prlefs Lime, you may make the Violet light or deep as you pleafe. CHAP. XIX. Of mixt And compound Colours. L TVyf'^ r O'> ft i s a wonderful beautiful colour , IV X compofed of purple and white: it is made thus. Take Sinaper-lahe two ounces ; White-lead one qunce, grind them together. See the 24. Section. II. A glafsgray, mingle Cerufe with a little Azure. III. A bay colour, mingle Vermilion with a little Spanifh brown and black. IV. A deep purple, It is m?.d? of Indico , Spani/h- brown and white. It is called in Z^fzVzPurpureus , in Greeks 'sro^vfiQ- fromtir'ofQv^ akind of Jhell-fijh that yields a liquour of that colour. V. An Chap. 19. Of mixing Qolours. 81 V. An Aft-colour, or Gray , It is made by mixing White and Lamp-black-, or white with Sinaper •, In- dico and black make an Alh-colour- It is called in Latin C^fius, and color Cinereus • in Greeks Thstv/Ji and Ti^a^i. V I. Light Greeny It is made of Pink and Smalt ; with white to make it lighter if need require. VII. Saffron colour •, It is made of Saffron alone by infnfion. VIII. Flame colour, It is made of Vermilion and Orpimcrit, mixed deep or light at pleafure : or thus, Take Red- lead and mix it with Mafticot , which heighten with white. I X. A Violet colour,lndko, White and Sinaper-lake make a good Violet. So alfo Cerufe and Litmofe, of each cqi.al parts. X. Lead colour , It is made of White mixed with Indico. X I. Scarlet colour , It is made of Red-lead, Lake, Vermilion : yet Vermilion in this cafe is not very ufe- ful. XII. To make Vermilion. * Take Brimftone in powder one ounce,mix it with Quickfilver a pound, put it into a Crucible well luted, and upon a Charcoal-fire heat it till it is red-hot •, then take it ofFand let it cool. X I I I. To make a bright Crimfon. Mix tincture of Brazil with a little Cerufe ground with fair water. A I V. To make a fad Crimfon. Mix the aforefaid light Crimfon with a little Indico ground with fair water. X V. To make a pure Lake. Take Urine twenty pound, boil it in a Kettle and fcum it with an Iron fcummer till it comes to fixteen pound j Sz Polygraphices. Lib. 2. pound •, to which add Gum-lake one pound, Alom live ounces-, boil all till it is well coloured, which you may try by dipping therein a piece of linnen cloth •, then add fweet Alom in powder a fuflicient quantity, ftrain it and let it ftand \ ftrain it again through a dry cloth till the liquor be clear : that which remains in the cloth or bag is the pure Lake. XV I. To make a Crimfon Lake. Its ufually made of the flocks ihorn off from Crim- fon cloth by a Lye made of Salt-peter, which extracts the colour ■, which precipitate, edulcorate, and dry in the Sun or a Stove. XVII. A fare Green. Take white Tartar and Verdegriefe, temper them with ftrong White-wine Vinegar , in which a little Gum-Arabick hath been dilTolved. X V 1 1 1. A pun VtoUt. Take a little Indico and tindure of Brazil, grind them with a little Cerufe. X I X. A pare Purple colour. Take fincbrimftone an ounce and an half, Quick- filver, Sal- Armoniack, Jupiter, of each one ounce •, beat the Brimftone and Salt into powder, and make an Amalgamy with the Quickfilver and Tin, mix all to- gether, which put into a great glafs goard •, make un- der it an ordinary fire, and keep it in a confhlAt Itcat for the fpace of fix hours. X X. To make a Yellow colour. Take the Yellow chives in white Lillies, fteepthem in gum-water, and it will make a perfeft Yellow •, the fame from Saffron and Tartar tempred with gum- water. XXI. To make a Red colour. Take the roots of thejleffer Buglofs, and beat them, and ftrain out the juyce, and mix it with Alom- water. x&u,r# Chap. 19. Of Mixing Colours. 8} XXII. To make excellent good Greens. The Liver of a Lamprey makes an excellent and durable grafs green : and yellow laid upon blew will change into green : Co likewife the juyce of a blew Flower-de-luce, mixed with gum-water , will be a perfed and durable green or blew, according as it it ufed. X X 1 1 1. To make a Turtle colour. Take the juyce of Bilberries and mix it with Alom and Galls, and fo paint with It- XXIV. To make a good Afurry. Temper RofTet with a little Rofe- water, in which a little gum hath been difiolved, and it will be good, but not exceeding that at thefirft Se&ionof this Chapter. XXV. To make Az*nre or Blew. Mix the Azure with glew-water, and not with gum-water. XXVI. To make a Tellow Green-, or Pitrple. Buckthorn-berries gathered green and fteeped in Alom-water yield a good yellow : but being through ripe and black ( by the eighteenth Section of the twenty feventh Chapter of the third Book)they yield a good green : and laftly, being gathered when they are ready to drop off", which is about the middle or end of November , their juyce mixt with Alom water yields a good Purple colour. CHAP. 84 (Polygraphkes. Lib, 2. CHAP. XX. Of Colours for Drapery. I. "T^Or Yellow Garments. Take Mafticot deepened Jl with brown-Oker and Red-Lead. II. For Scarlet. Take Virmilion deepened with Si- naper-lake , and heightened with touches of Mafticot. III. For Crimfon. Lay on Lake very thin and deepen with the fame. I V. For Purple. Grind Lake and Smalt together : or take Blew-bice, and mix it with Red and White- Lead. V. For an Orient Violet. Grind Litmoie , Blew- Smalt, and Cerufe •, but in mixture let the blew have the upper hand. V I. For Blew . Take Azure deepned with Indy- Blew or Lake heightened with white. VII. For blacky Velvet. Lay the garment firffc over with Ivory black , then heighten it with Cherryftone black, and a little *vhite. V T TT Frr klanh c -"-'- T«T,o rt,„^mr(l« ni » hl-Hr- V nil. *!// t/LvH/K^OtotlM. X (WV.V (JilvllJlLWiiv. Uxwv-ft. , then white deepened with Cherryftone black-, and then laftly, Ivory black. I X. For a pure Green. Take Verdegriele, bruife it, and fteep it inMufcadine for twelve hours, then {train it into a fhell, to which add a little Sap-green : (but put no gum thereto. ) X. For a Carnation. Grind Cerufe , well wafhcd, with Red-lead •, or Cerufe and Vermilion. X I. For Cloth of Gold. Take brown Oker, and li- quid Chap. 10I Of flours for Drapery. 85 quid Gold water, and heighten upon the fame with Imall ftroaks of Gold. X 1 1. For white Sattin. Take firft fine Cernfe ,' which deepen with Cherryftone-black , then heighten again with Cernfe, and line touches where the light falleth. X I I I. For a Rujfet Sattin. Take Indy-blew and Lake, firft thin and then deepned with Indy again. XIV. For a hair Colour. It is made out of Mafticot, limber, Yellow Oker, Cerufe, Oker-de-luce , and Sea-coal. XV. For a Popenjay Green. Take a perfect green mingled with Mafticot. XVI. For Changeable Silk Take water of Mafticot and Red-lead •, which deepen with Sap-green. X V 1 1. For a light Blew. Take Blew bice,heightened with Cerufe or Spodium. XVIII. For to fiadow Rujfet. Take Cherryftone- black and white •, lay a light Ruffet, then ihadow it with white. X I X. For a Shie Colour. Take Blew-bice and Ve- nice Cerufe: but if you would have it dark, take fome blew and white. XX. For a Straw Colour. Take ' Mafticot , then white heightened with Mafticot, and deepned with Pink. Or thus. Take Red-lead deepned with Lake. XXI. For rcUmiJIi. Thin Pink deepned with Pink and green,: Orpiment burned makes a Marigold co- lour. XXII. For a Peach Colour. Take Brazil water, Log water and Cerufe. XXIII. For a light Purple. Mingle Cerufe with Logwood water : or take Turnfolc mingled with a little Lake, Smalt and Bke. XX IV. For 86 (Polygraphias. Lib. 2. XXIV. For a Walnut colour. Red-lead thinly, laid, and fliadowed with Spanifli brown. XXV. For a Fire colour. Take Mafticot, and deepen it with Mafticot for the flame. XXVI. For a Tre f.Take Umber and white, wrought with Umber, deepned with black. XXVII. For the Leaves. Take Sap-green and green Bice, heighten it with Verditure and white. XXVIII. For Water. Blew and white , deepned with blew, and heightned with white. XXIX. For Banks. Thin Umber, deepned with Umber and black. XXX. For Feathers. Take Lake frizled with Red- lead. CHAP. XXI. Of Liquid Gold and Silver. I. T Iquid Gold and Silver. I j Take five or fix leaves of Gold or Silver , which grind (with a ftiff Gum-lake water , and a good quantity of Salt) as imall as you can - 7 then put it into a vial or glazed veflel ; add fo much fair water as may diflblve the ftiff gum- water-, then let it Hand four hours, that the Gold may fettle : decant the water, and put in more,till the Gold is clean warned : to the Gold put more fair water, a little Sal-Armoniack and common Salt, digeftmg it clofe for four days : then put all into a piece of thin Glovers leather ( whofe grain is peeled off) and hang it up , fo will the Sal- Armoniack fret away , and the Gold remain behind, whichkeep. Qt Chap^ 21. Of Liquid Gold and Silver 8/ Or thus. Grind fine leaf Gold with ftrong or thicks gum-water very fine ; and at yon grind add more thick^ gum- water being very fine, wajh it in a great Jhell , as you do Bice : then temper it with a little quantity of Mer- cury fublim ate, and a little diffolveA gum to bind it in the (l:ell, fhakeit,andfpread the Gold about the fides thereof, that it may be all of one colour and finenefs, which ufe with fair water, as yon do other colours. The fame ob- ferve in liquid Silver, with this obfervation , That if your Silver , by length of time, or humidity of the air be- come rufiy ', then cover the place with juyce of Garlickbe- fore you lay on the Silver, which will prtferve it. When you ufe it , temper it with glair of Eggs, and fo ufe it with pen or pencil. Glair of Eggs is thus made. Take the whites and beat them with a fpoon , till that rife all in a foam ', then let them fland all night , and by morning they will be turned into clear water , which is • good glair. •> II. Argent urn Afaficum. Take one ounce of Tin, melt it, and put thereto of Tartar and Quickfilver of each one ounce , itir them well together untill they be cold , then beat it in a mortar and grind it on a ftone •, mix it with gum water , write therewith, and afterwards po- lift it. 1 1 1. Burnified Gold or Silver. Take Gum lake and diflblve it into a ft iff water, then grind a blade or two of Saffron therewith , and you fhall have a fair Gold: when you have let it, be- ing throughly dry, burnifh it with a dogs tooth. Or this having writ with your pen or pencil what you pleafe, cut the leaf Gold or Silver into pieces,accor- dirg to the draught, which take up with a feather and lay it upon the drawing, which prefs down with a piece of wool*, and being djry, burnt/hit. IV. Gold 88 Volygrafhkes. Lib. 2# I V. Gold ArmoniacV^ This is nothing but that which we have taught at the fourth Section of the fixteenth Chapter of this Book. V. Siz.e for humified Gold. Take Bole-Armoniack three drachms , fine Chalk one drachm -, grind them as fmall as you can toge- ther with fair water , three or four times, letting it dry after every time : then take glair and ltrain it as fhort as water, with which grind the Bole and Chalk, adding a little Gum-Hedera, and a few blades of Sar- fron : grind all as fmall as poflible, and put them into an Ox horn ( I judge a glafs veflel better) and fet it to rot in horfe dung for fix weeks •, then take it up, and let it have air, and keep it for ufe. Its ufe is for gilding parchments, booh^covers , and leather, thus lay this fizj firfi upon the parchment , then with a feather lay the Gold or Stiver upon it, which when dry burnifi it. # V I. To Diaper on Gold or Silver. You mult Diaper on Gold with Lake and Yellow Oker : but upon Silver with Cerufe. VII. Anrum Muficnm. Take fine Cryftal, Orpiment, of each one ounce , beat eachfeverally into a fine powder, then grind them together well with glair. Ton may write with it, with pen or pencil, and your letter or draught will be of a good Gold colour. CHAP. Chap, 22. Of Preparing the Colours. 8p CHAR XXII. Of Preparing the Colours, I- /^Olours, according to their natures have each V^ a particular way of preparation : to wit , by grinding, warning or fteeping. I I. The chief Colours to be ground are thefe } White- lead, Cerufe, Sinapcr-lake, Oker pink,Indico, Um- ber, Colens Earth,Spaniih-brovvn, Ivory-black, Cher- ryitone- black. III. The chief Colours to be wajtid arc Red-lead, Mafticot , Green Bice , Cedar Green, Ultramarine, Blew Bice , Smalt, Verditure. IV. The chief Colours to be ftcefd , are Sap-green, Saffron , Turnfole, Stone-blew, Venice Berries V. To grind Colours. Take the colour you would grind, and fernpe off from it all the filth, then lay it upen the ftone, and with the muller briiife it a little •, then put thereto a little fpring water, and grind nil together very well, till the colour is- very fine •, which done pour it out into certain hollows or furrows cut in Chalkflone , and there let it lie till it is dry, which referve in papers or glafles. V I. To waft colours. _ Put the colour into a glazed veflel, and put thereto fair water plentifully, wafli it well, and dec ant (after a while) the water; do this fix or ieven times :, at laft put the water (being juft troubled) into another glazed veflel , leaving the dregs : t bottom : then into G this po tPolygraphkes. Lib. %• this fecond velfel put more fair water, warning it as before, till the water ( being fettled) be clear, and the colour remain fine at bottom : we have taught ano- ther way at the twenty fourth Se&ion of the eigh- teenth Chapter of this Book. VII. To Jhcp Odours. Take a quantity thereof, and put it into a fhell , and fill the fhell with fair water, to which add fbme fine powder of Alom, to raife the colour •, let it thus fteep a day and night, and you will have a good colour. Where note , Saffron ftceped in Vinegar gives a good co- lour :, and the Venice Berries in fair water and a little Alom^ or a drop or two of oyl of Vitriol makes a fair yellow. VIII. To temper the Colours. Take a little of any colour, and put it into a clean fhell, and add thereto a few drops of gum- water , and with your fingers work it about the fhell, then let it dry •, when dry, touch it with your fingers, if any colour comes off, you muft add ftronger gum-water : but being dry, if the colour glifter or fhine, it is a fign there is too much gum in it, which you may remedy by putting in fair water. I X. To help the defects. Some colours, as Lake, Umber, and ethers which are hard, will crack when they are dry, in this cafe, in tempering them add a little white Sugar-candy in very fine powder, which mix with the colour and fair water in the (hell, till the Sugar-candy is diflbl- ved. X. Thefe colours, Umber, Spanifh-brown , Colen earth, Cherryftone, and Ivory-black, are to be burnt before they be ground or walh'd; XI. To humor calcine Colours.? This Chap. zj. The Manual Jnftrumcntsl 91 This is done in a crucible , covering the mouth thereof with clay, and letting it in a hot fire, till you are fure it is red-hot through : which done , being cold, wafh or grind it as aforeiaid. XII. To prepare Jliadows for Colours. White is fhaded with Black , and ccntrariwife : Yellow with Umber and the Okers : Vermilion with Lake : Blew-bice with Indie : Black-coal with Ro- fet, &c. CHAP. XXIII. Of the Manual Inftruments. I. 'T^HE manual Inftruments are four ( by the fe- X »ond Section of the fifteenth Chapter of this Book) to wit, The Grinding-ftone and Mailer^ Pencils^ Tables to Limn on, and (hells or little glafles orChina- difhes. I I. The Grinding one may be of Porphyry , Ser- pentine or Marble, but rather a Pebble, for that is the belt of all others : Mulkr only of Pebble, which keep very clean. Thefe may be eafily got of Marble rs or Stone-cutters in London. III. Choofe your pencils thus : by their faftnefs in the quills, and their {harp points after you have drawn or wetted them in your mouth two or three times :, fo that although larger, yet their points will come to as fmall as a hair, which then are good •, but if they fpread or have any extravagant hairs they are naught. I V. To rvafh your pencils. G 2 After pi tPolygraphices. Lib. I, After ufing them, rub the ends of them well with Soap, then lay them a while in warm water to deep, then take them out and wafh them well in other fair water. V. To prepare the Tabic. It muft be made of pure fine pafte-board, fuch as Cards are made of (of what thicknefs you pleafe ) very finely flick'd and glazed. Take a piece of this pafte-board ofthebignefs you intend the Pidure,and a piece ofthe fineft and whiteft parchment you can, get (virgin parchment) which cut of equal bignefs with the pafte-board-, with thin, white, new made ftarch, pafte the parchment to the pafte-board, with the outiide ofthe skin outwardmoft : lay on the ftarch very thin and even ; then the grinding ftone being clean, lay the card thereon with the parchment fide downwards, and as hard as you can, rub the other lide of the pafte-board with a Boars-tooth let in a ftick \ then let it be thorow dry, and it will be fit to work or Limn any curious thing upon. V I. The (hells holding or containing your colours, ought tobeHorfe-mafcle (hells, which may be got in July about Rivers iides •, but the next to theie are fmall Mufcle-fhells, or in ftead thereof little China or glafs veflels. CHAP. XXI V. Of Preparations for Limning, I. TTAve two finall glafs or China-difhes, in eithcr JTJL of which muft be pure clean water, the one to wain the pencils in being foul ; the other to tem- per Chap. 24. Preparations for Limning. 9? per the colours with , when there is occafion. I I. Befides the pencils you Limn with ^ a large, clean and dry pencil , to cleanfc the work from any kind ofduft, that may fail upon it, which are called Fitch-pencils. III. Aiharp Pen-knife to take off hairs that may come from yourpeiuil, either among the colours or upon the work •, or to take out fpots that may fall up- on the Card or Table. I V. A paper with a hole cut therein, to lay over the card, to keep it from duit and filth, torch: your hand upon, and to keep the foil and fweat of your hand from fullyingthe parchment, as alio to try your pencils on before you ufethem. Let thcfmallglajjeSf water S-, pencils and pnknife lie all on the right hand. V. Have ready a quantity of light Carnation or ficfli colour temper'd up in a fhcll by it felf with a ' weak gum-water •, if it be a fair complexion , mix White and Red-lead together •, if a brown or fwarthy , add to the former , Mafticot , or Englifh Oker, or both: but be fure the flefli colour be always lighter than the complexion you would Limn - 7 lor by working on it you may bring it to its true colour. VI. In a large Horfe-mufcle fhell place your feve- ral fhadows ( for the ficfli colour) in little places one diltind from another. VII. In all fnadowings have ready fomc white , and lay a good quantity of it by it felf befides what the (hadows are nrft mixed with : for Red for the cheeks and lips , temper -Lake and Red-lead toge- ther : for blew ihadows (as under the eyes and in veins) Indico or Ultramarine and white : for gray feint fhadows , white , Englifh Oker , fometimes G 3 Ma- 94 (Polygraphkes. Lib. t. Mafticot : for deep fhadows , white, Englifh Okcr, "Limber : for dark (hadows, Lake and Pink , which make a good fiefhy fhadow. VIII. To make choice of the light. Let it be fair and large and free fro>n fliadows of Trees or HonfeS) but all clear Sky -light , and let it be direct from above , and not tranjverfe ', let it be Northerly and not Southerly ; and let the room be clofe and clean , and free from the Sun-beams. I X. Of the manner of fitting. Let your desk^, on which you workjbe fo fituate, that (it- ting before it, your left arm may be towards the light , that the light may ftrihe fulling upon your workj. Let the party that is to be Limned', be in what poflure them fc Ives will defign, but not above two yards of] you at rnofv, and level with you ? wherein obferve their motion , if never fo finally for the leaf; motion, if not recalled., may in (hort time bring on you ma?iy errors : Laftly, the jace being fimjhed, let the party (land ( not fit ) at a farther diftance ( four or five yards off) to draw the po^ure of his clothes. CHAP. XXV- Of the Tract at vf Ltmningin Mimiure y or Drawing of a Face in Colours, I. *T -l O begin the Work. X Have all things in' a readinefs ( as before) then on the Card lay the prepared colour ( anfwerable to the complexion prefented) even and thin, free from hairs andfpots, over the place wherethe Picture is to be : the ground thus laid, begin the work, the party being Chap. 2 j. The praftke of Limnb^Scc. 95 being fet, which mult be done at three fittings : at the firft fitting the face is only dead coloured, which takes up about two hours time : at the fecond fitting, go over the work more curioufly , adding its particular graces or deformities, fweetly couching the colours, which will take up about fwe hours time : at the third fitting, finifti the face, in which you muft perfect all that is imperfect and rough, putting the deep fhadows in the face,as in the eyes, eye-brows, and ears, which are the lait of the work, and not to be done till the hair curtain, or backfide of the Picture, and the drape- ry be wholly finifhed. 1 1. The operation or worh^ at firft fitting. The ground for the complexion being laid, draw the out-lines of the face, Which do with Lake and white mingled j draw faintly , that if you mifs in proportion or colour you may alter it : this done,add to the former colour Red-lead, for the cheeks and lips-, let it be but faint ( for you cannot lighten a deep co- lour ) and make the fhadows in their due places, as in the cheek, lips, tip of the chin and ears, the eyes and roots of the hair: fhadownot with aflat pencil, but by fmall touches (as in hatching) and fo go over the face. In this dead covering rather than to be cu- rious, ftrive as near as may be to imitate nature. The red .fhadows being put in their due places-, fhadow with a faint blew, about the corners and balls of the eyes ^ and with a grayilh blew under the eyes and about the temptes,heightening the fhadows as the light falls, as alfo the harder fhadows in the dark fide of the face, under the eye-brows, chin and neck. Bring all the work to an equality, but add perfection to no par- ticular part at this time j but imitate the life in like- nefs, roundnefs, boldnefs, pofture, colour, and the like. Laftly, touch at the hairwithafutable colour in fiich G 4 curis, p 6 Polygraphices. Lib. 2. curls, folds and fotm,as may either agree with the life, or grace the Picture : fill the empty places with colour, and deepen it more itrongly, than in the dee- peftlhadowed before. III. The operation or work^at fecond fitting. As before rudely, lb now you mud fwceten thofe varieties which Nature affords, with the fame colours and in the fame places driving them one into another, yet fo as that no lump orfpot of colour, or rough edge may appear in the whole work ■, and this muft be done with a pencil fharper than that which was ufed before. This done, go to the backilde of the Picture which may be Landskip, or a curtain of blew or red Sattin : if of blew, temper as much Bice as will cover a card, and let it be well mixed with gum • with a pencil draw the out-lines of the curtain-, asaHbofthe whole Pi dure •, then with a large pencil lay thinly or airily over the whole ground, on which you mean to lay the blew ; and then with a large pencil, lay over the fame a fubftantial body of colour \ in doing of which be nimble, keeping the colour raoift, letting no part thereof be dry till the whole be covered. If the curtain be Crimfon, trace it out with Lake \ lay the ground with a thin colour \ and lay the light with a thin and waterifh colour, where they fall :, and while the ground is yet wet, with aftrongdark colour tem- pered fomething thick, lay the ftrong and hard Iha- dows clofe by the other lights. Then lay the linnen with faint white, and the drapery flat of the colour you intend it. In the face, fee what fhadows are too fight or too deep, for the curtain behind,and drapery, and reduce each to their due perfection •, draw the lines of the eye-lids, and fliadow the entrance into the ear, dcepnefs of the eye-brows, and eminent marks in the face, with a very (harp pencil : laftly, go over the hair, Chap. 26. Of Limning Drapery. 97 hair, colouring it as it appears in the life,caiting over the ground fome loofe hairs, which will make the Picture Hand as it were at a diftance from the curtain : faadow the Unncn with white, blac^ and a little yellow and blew ; and deep 'en your blacky with Jvory-blacl^mixed with a little Lake and Indico. I V. The operation or work^ at third fitting. This third work is wholly fpent in giving ftrong touches where you fee caufe*, in rounding, fmooth- ing and colouring the face, which you may better fee to do, now the curtain and drapery is limned, than before. And now obferve whatfoever may conduce to the perfection of your work, as gefture , fears or moles, caits of the eyes, windings of the mouth, and the like. C H A P. XXVI. Of Limning Drapery. I. A Full and fubftantial ground being laid all over XjL where you intend the drapery •, as if blew , with Bice fmoothly laid, deepen it with Lake and Indico-, lightening it withafine faint white, in the extreme light places, the which underftand of other colours. I I. If the body you draw be in Armour, lay liquid Silver all over for a ground, well dried and burnifhed \ fhadow it with Silver , Indico and Umber, according as the life directs you. I I I. For Gold Armour lay liquid Gold as you did the Silver, and fhadow upon it with Lake, Englilh Oker, and a little Gold. IV. For 9 8 &olygrafbkes. Lib, 2* I V. For Pearls, your ground muft be Indico and white •, the fhadows black and pink. V. For Diamonds, lay a ground of liquid Silver , and deepen it with Cherry-ftone-black and Ivory- black. V I. For Rubies, lay a Silver ground , which bur- nifh to the bignefs of a Ruby : then with pure Tur- pentine temper'd with Indian Lake , from a fmall wire heated in a Candle , drop upon the burnifhed place, fafhioning it as you pleafe with your Inftru- ments» which let lie a day or two to dry. V I I. For Emeraiilds, or any green ftone , temper Turpentine with Verdigriefe, and a little Turmerick root, firft fcraped, with Vinegar, drying it, grind it to fine powder and mix it. VIII. For Saphyrcs, mix or temper Ultramarine with pure Turpentine, which lay upon a ground of liquid Silver polifht. To make liquid Gold or Silver : fee the fir ft Section oj the twenty firft Chapter of this Booki CHAP. XXVII. Of Limning Landikip. f A L L the variable exprejfions of Landslip are innu- JTjL merable, they being as many as there are men and fancies ; the general rides follow. I. Alway begin with the Sky,Sun-beams or lighteft parts firft •, next the yellowilh beams ( which make of Mafticot and white) next the blewnef s of the Sky, (which make of Smalt only.) II. At c Chap. 27. Of limning Landskip* 99 I I. At firft colouring, leave no part of the ground uncovered, but lay the colours fmooth all over. III. U/ork the Sky downwards, towards the Ho- rizon fainter and fainter, as it draws nearer and near- er the earth: the tops of mountains far remote, work fo faint that they may appear as loft in the air. I V. Let places low, and near the ground be of the colour of the earth , of a dark yellowifli, or brown green •, the next lighter green \ and fo fuccefiively as they lofe in diftance, let them abate in colour. V. Make nothing which you fee at a diftance per- fect, by exprefling any particular fign which it hath, but exprefsitin colours, as weakly and faintly as the eye judgeth of it. V I. Always place light againft darknefs and dark- ncfs againft light, by which means you may extend the profpect as a very far ofK V 1 1. Let alifliadows lofe their force as they remove from the eye •, always letting the ftrongeft fiiadow be neareft hand. VII I. Laftly, Take Ifinglafs in fmall pieces half an ounce, fair Conduit-water two quarts, boil it till the glafs is diiTolved, which fa ve for ufe : with which mix lpiritoroil of Cloves , Roles, Cinnamon or Amber- griefe, and lay it on and about the Picture where it is not coloured (left it fhould change the colours : but upon the colours ufe it without the perfumes) fo it will varnifh your Pictures, and give them a glofs, retaining the glory of their colours, and take from them any ill fcent which they might otherwife retain. CHAP. I loo Tolygraphices, Lib. 1. G H A P. XXVIII. Of Light and shadow. L T Ights and (hades fet in their proper "places in I j ilich a juft and equal proportion, as Nature doth give, or the life require give a true Idea of the thing we would reprefent , fo that 'tis not any colour whatfoever, nor any iingle Itroak or ftroaks which is thecaufe thereof ,but that excellent Symmetry of Light and Shadow, which gives the true refemblance of the light. 1 1- In fhadowing, be careful you fpoil not your work by too grofs a darkneis, whether it be hard or foft. I I I. This Obfervation of light and dark is that which caufeth all things contained in your work to come forward or fall backward, and makes every thing from the fir ft to the laft to ftand in their jult places , whereby the diftance between thing and thing feems to go from you or come to you as if it were the work of Nature it felf. I V. Sappoie it were a plailtet Figure, ta^e goc^ no- tice what appears forwards and what backwards, or how things fucceed one another •, then confider the caufe which makes them in appearance either to in- cline or recline, and confider the degrees of light and darknefs,and whether they fall forward or backward, accordingly in your draught give firft gentle touches, and after that heighten by degrees according as the example and your own ingenuity fliall dircft. V. Thole parts are to be heightcn'd in your work 1 which Chap. 28. Of Light and Shadow. 101 which appear higheft in your Pattern : Thcgrcatelt life which we can give on white paper is the paper it felf all lefler lights rruft be faintly fhadowed in pro- portion to their refpeftive degrees. But on coloured paper white Crions and Tobacco-pipe-clay are uied for the firft and fecond heightenings, putting each in their proper places, as more or iefs light is required, which is a lingular oblcrvation in this manner of drawing. Then you muft take heed you heighten not too many places, nor heighten any thing more than what is needful, nor too near the dark or fha- dows, or any out-line , ( except where you intend fome refleftion,) left your work fhew hard and rough. In heightening, or fuch figures as require great light, put the greateft light in the middle, and the lefler towards the edges for the better perfpicuity of your work. Laftly, leave fufficient faint places on the ground of your paper between your lights and fhades, that they may appear pleafantly with a lingular plain- nefs and fmoothnefs. VI. In reflection, ufeit in delineating, glittering, or fhining bodies, as Glafs, Pearl, Silver, &c* let the caufe of the reflection, be it more or lefs, be leenin the thing it felf. V I I. In plain drawing, lay all your {hades fmooth , whether it be in hatching or fmutching, keeping e- very thing within its own bounds, and this is done by not making your fhades at firft too hard, or putting one fhadow upon another too dark. VIII. Obferve thatthe greater parts of light and fhadows, and the fmall parts intermixt in the fame, may always fo correfpond as thereby to make more apparent the greater. .«„,., „ , , . IX. In Pidures, let the higheft light of the whole, ( if any darknefs ftand in the middle of it) appear more 102 Polygraphices. Lib. 2. more dark than indeed it is : and in working always compare light with light and dark with dark , by which you will find the power of each, and the gene- ral life thereof in all operations. X. We think it neceffary to (hew another way of making all forts ofCrions or Paltills than what we taught in the beginning of this Book, Thus : Take Tobacco-pipe-clay and with a little water temper the fame what colour you pleafc, making feveral ac- cording to the feveral heights you intend, which mix with the faid Tobacco-pipe-clay fo much as the clay will bear, work all well together, make it intoPaftills , and let them dry for ufe. CHAP. XXIX. Of Colours more Particularly. I. f\Ke r is a good colour, and much in ufe for fha- v/ dows , in Pictures of the life, both for hair and drapery : In Landskips it is ufed for Rocks and high ways. II. Pink* the faireft, with blew, makes the falter! greens for Landskip and Drapery. Sap-green and green-bice are good in their kind ^ but the firft is fo tranfparent and thin, the other offo courfe and grofs body, that in many things they will be ufelefs, efpecially where a beautiful green (made of Pink and Bice mixed withlndico) is required. III. Vmber, is a greafie foul colour •, but being cal- cined and ground, it works (harp and neat. IV. Spamfr-brorvn, is exceeding courfe and full of gravel \ being prepared , it is ufed for a mixture made Chap. 30. Making Original Qlours. 10 j made of Red-lead mixt with a little Umber, which makes the fame colour. V. Colens earth or Terra Lemma, it is ufed to clofe up the laftand deepeft touches in the fhadows ofPi- ctures of the life, and in Landskips ; uft it when new ground. V I. Cherry -ft one-black, , is very good for Drapery and black apparel : mixt with Indico, it is excellent for Sattin , it appears more beautiful or mining if mixed with a little white : if deepnod with Ivory- black, in hard reflections, and ftrong deep touches , it is wonderful fair. VII. Ivory blacky it ferves for a deep black, but is not eafie to work without it be well tempered with Sugar-candy , to prevent peeling. VIII. Red-lead, well wafh'd, is a glorious colour, for thole pieces which require an exquifite rednefs. IX. Indian-lake, is the deareft and moft beautiful of all reds % it is to be ground as white-lead, and mixt with a little white Sugar-candy and fair water ,till the colour and Sugar-candy be throughly dhTolved, which being dry will lie very faft> without danger of crack- ing or peeling. CHAP. XXX. Observations of making Jome Orlgiml Colours. I. fm T*To make white-lead. X Put into an earthen pot feveral plates of fine Lead, cover them with White- wine Vinegar, co- vering 104 Polygraphices. Lib. 2« vering the top of the pot clofe with clay, bury it in a Cellar for feven or eight weeks, and you will have good white lead upon the plates, which wipe off! I I. To make Verdigriefe. This is made by hanging plates of Copper overt'--- fumes qI Aquafortis or (pint of Nitre : or by dipping them in the fame or in Vinegar. III. To make an Emerald Colour. Take Verdigriefe in fine powder , which temper withvarnifh, andlay it upon a ground of liquid Silver burnifht, and you have a fair Emerald. I V. To make a Ruby Colour. Mix the fame with Florence Lake , and you fhail have a very fair Ruby colour. V. To make a Saphyre Colour. The lame, viz.. Verdigriefe mixt with Ultramarine, makes a glorious Saphyre. V I. To make a Crimfon Velvet. Take Turnfoil and mix it with Indico-lake (well ground with gum and Sugar-candy ) lay it full, and when it is wet, wipe away the colour with a dry pen- cil, where you would have the heightening of the Crimfon Velvet appear, and the ftronger reflections will be well expreifed. VII. To make a Silver Black. Take fine Silver filings Oi plates, which diffclve in fpirit of Nitre or Aquafortis, and evaporate to dri- neis, or precipitate with Oleo Sulphuris or Salt-water, and you mail have a fnow-white precipitate , which mixt with water makes the belt black in the world, to dy all manner of Hair , Horns, Bones, Wood,Me- tals, &c. VIII. To make a Mttrry or Amethyft. It is made of Indian Lake ground with Gum-Ara- bick water only. IX. To Chap. 30. Making Original Qlottrs. 10 J IX. To make a Red or Ruby for Limning. It is made of Indian-lake ( which breaks offa Scar- let colour) ground with Gum-water and Sugar-candy. X. To wake Azjrrebhw, or Sdphyrf. It is made of Ultramarine of 'Venice (which is belt) the belt blew Smalt, or blew bice ground withgunv water only : you may make good fhadowing blews of Indico, Flory and Litmofe, all which need no wafh- ing, nor Litmofe no grinding , but only infilled in a Lixivium of Soap-afiies. X I. To make a green or Emerald It is made of Cedar green : in place whereof, take tripal to draw with : Pink is good aifo for Landskips* mixed with Bice-afhes •, as alfo with Mafticot and Cerufe. XII. To wake a Yellow or Topaz. It is made of Mafticot which is the bell, of which there are divers forts , viz, deeper and paler : Yellow- Okcr alfo for want of better may do. Shadow Mafti- cot: with Yellow-Oker ; deepen it with Oker-de-Luce. XIII. To make Vltramarine. Take the deepeft coloured Lapis Lazuli ( having few veins of Gold upon it) heat it red-hot in a Cruci- ble dofe covered, then quench it in Urine, Vinegar or water in a Leaded earthen pot, dry it w r ell, then with a pair of pinfers nip off the hard, gray, and whiteit part from it t and grind the remainder with honied water as fine as may be, then dry it for ufe. The honied water is made of water a quart, boiled with honey two fpoonfnls. H C H A P \o6 tPolygraphkes. Lib. 2. CHAP. XXXI. The fitm of the Observations of Limning to the L'fe in general. I. T ET the Table be prepared very exactly by the JL_y fifth rule ofthe twenty third Chapter of the fecund Book. I I. Let the ground be of flefli colour, tempering it according to the complexion to be painted. III. It it be a fair complexion, mix a good quan- tity of Red and White Lead together fome what thick. IV. If fwarthy or brown, mix with the former a little fine Mallicot or EnglilhOker, or both,always obierving that your ground be fairer than the com- plexion painted. For fairnefs may be fiadowed or darkened at pleafure , but if it be fad or dark.y you can never heighten it , for in Limning the picture is always wrought down to its exalt colour* V. Lay the ground upon the Card or Tablet , with a larger pencil than ordinal y, free from fpot3,'fcratches of the pencil, or duft, and as even as poffible may be ; and let the colour be rather thin and waterifh than too thick, doing it very quick and nimbly with two or three difhes ofthe pencil. V I. This done, prepare your fhadow 7 s in order, by the feventh rule of the four and twentieth Chapter of the fecondBook. VII. Then draw the out lines ofthe face with Lake and 'white mingled together very fine - 7 fo that if you Ihould Chap. ji. Limning to the Life j Sec. \o/ fhould miftake in your firft draught, you may with a ifcrong Itroak draw it true, the other line by reafon of its faifltnefs being no hinderance. Thefe lines nutji be truly drawn, fiiarp and neat , with the gnat eft exaBnefs imaginable. VIII. Obilrve the molt reinarkable and deep fhadovvs , to keep in memory when you go over them with more exaetnefs •, drawing out alio ( if you fo pleafe ) the fhape of that part of the body next adjoining to the face , viz,, a little beneath the (boulders, with a ftrong and dark colour > which in cafe of miftake in proportion may eafily be altered. I X. The firft fitting is to dead 1 colour the face i the lecond fitting is the exact colouring and ob- fervation of the leveral Ihadows , graces , beauties or deformities, as they are in Nature : the third fitting is in making fmooth what was before rough and rude •, clothing what was naked, and giving itrong and deepning touches to every refpective iha- dovv. X. The dead colour is thus made. Take of the aforefaid ground {at the third or fourth Section of this Chapter ) and mix it with fine Red-lead , tempering it exactly to a dead colour of the checkj and lips , having a great care , that you make it not too deep 5 which if light, you may do at pleasure. X I. The face is firft begun to be coloured in the reds of the cheeks and lips , and fcrnewhat ftrongly in the bottom of the chin ( if beardlefs ) alfo over , under,and about the eyes with a faint rednefs. XII. The ear is molt commonly rcddiih , as alfo fometimes the roots of the hair. XIII. The ground being wafo'd over with tlvs H z reddifh io8 tpolygraphkes,. Lib. t. reddifh or dead colour, let the fhadows be as well bold and ilrong as exacl; and curious. A good Pitt/ire, if but dead coloured only? andfeeming near hand very rough , uneven and unpleafant, yet being boldly and ftrongly done and JJnidowed will appear very fmooth, delicate , and neat if but viewed at a difiancc from the eye . Therefore curio fity and neatnefs of Colour , is not fo nwih to be regarded-) as bold, lofty, andftrong exprejjinjr what is feen in the life. XI V. The next thing to be done is the ufe of the faint blews,about the corners and balls of the eyes and temples, which you mult work out exceeding fweetly, and faint by degrees. X V. Always be lure to make the hard fhadows fall in the dark fide of the face, under the nofe,chin, and eye-brows, as the light falls, with fomewhat ftrong touches. X V I. The light fhadows being done and fmooth- cd work the hair into fuch forms, curlings, and dif- pofitions asbeft adorn the piece. Firft draw it with colours, neatly and to the life ; then xvajl) it roughly as the reft \ and the next time per fell: it : filing up the empty places with colour, and the partings thereof with blew. XVII. And ever remember, when you would have your colours or fhadows deep, ftrong, and bold •, that you do them by degrees, beginning faintly, anuriicu encrcafing the fame. XVIII. Firft, ufe the former colours in the fame places again,driving and fwectning them into one ano- ther, that no part may look uneven, or with an edge, or patch of colour, but altogther equally mixt and difperfed , lying foft and fmooth, likefmoak or va- pour*. XIX.Se- Chap. ji. Limning to the Life, Sec. ioo XIX. Secondly, this work being done for an hour or two , lay the ground for behind the Pi- cture of Blew, orCrimfon, like to aSattin or Velvet Curtain. X X. If blew, let it be done with Bife well tem- pered in a (hell : Firfb draw the out- lines with the fame colour, with a fmall pencil : then with a thin and water ilh blew wafti over the whole ground w ith a larger pencil : laftly , with thicker colour co- ver the fame which you before wafh'd, fwiftly,that ip dry not before all be covered, fo will it lie fmooth and even. XXI. If Crimfon, work with I ndian-lake, in thole places where the ftrong lights, and high reflexions tall : let the light be done with thin and waterilh Lake - 7 the deepning and ftrong fliadows , clofe by the light with thicker colour : this done, the Picture will be much changed *, the beauty of thefe grounds will much darken and dead it. XXII. Let the apparel with fuitable colours be done only flat with heightening or deepning; and then go over the face again, reducing the ihadows to fmoothnefs and neatnefs with a fharp and curious pencil: drawing the eyes , the lines of the eye-lids-, rednels of the noftrils -, fhadowoftheears-, dcepnefs of the eye-brows, andthofe other remarkable marks of the face : fo fweetning the out-lines of the face ( by darkning the ground, above from the light fide, and be- low on the dark^fide*) that when the work^is done, the ground may fl and as it were at a diflance from the face be- hind, and the face mayfeem to ft and off forward from the ground. XXI II. Then go over the hair, making it light or deep by the life : and in apparel make the feveralfol Is and fhadows,and whatelfeisto be imitated, as it is ia H 3 tht HO Polygraphices. Lib. i- the life it felf*, lightning the lines with the purcft white, a little yellow and iome blew •, and deepening with Ivory black, and heightning with black mixed with a little Lake or Indico. XXI V. Tiiis done, and the perfon gone, your work being yet rough, by your felf polifh it, andftrive to make it imooth and pleafant , filling up the ■ empty places, andfweetnifig the fliadows, which yet lie un- even and hard. XXV. The apparel, hair, and ground being fini- fhed, now give itrong touches for the rounding of the face ^ and obferve whatlbever may conduce to like- nefs and reiemblancc, as moles, fmilings, or glancings of the eyes, motion of the mouth, e^c. for which pur- pole, you may find anoccafionof difcourfc, or caufe the perfon to be in action, and to look merrily and clicarfully. XXVI. Laitly conclude, that the eye gives the life \ the nofe the favour-, the mouth the likenefs \ and the fhin the grace. X X V II. In fair coloured drapery, if the lightning be done with fine (hellGojd it will add a molt won- derful luitre,and be a lingular ornament to your work •, and if this Gold be mixt with the very ground it felf, the apparel will appear much the fairer. C H A R Ch ap. j i . Limning Lands kip, & c ; m CHAP. XXXII. Of Limning Landslip, more particularly: T. "T"0 make the Tablet for Landskip. J. Ta'^e a piece of Vcllom , and jhare it thin upon a Frame , faflningit withpafl or glew, and pacing it upon a boards and this manner of Tablets are altogether ufed in Italy/or Landskip, and Hiflory. II. If you draw a Landskip from the life take your ftation from the rife of ground , or top of an hill , where you fhall have a large Horizon, marking your Tablet into three divifions downwards from the top to the bottom : then your face being dire ctly oppofed to the inidft of the finitor, keeping your body fixed, depict what is directly before your eyes , upon your Tablet on your middle divifion, then turning your head (not your body) to the right hand, depict what is there to be feen : adjoining it to the former. In like manner doing by that which is to be feen on the left hand> your Landskj) will be complcated. III. Make every thing exact, not only in refpect of diftance, proportion and colour :, but alio in refpect of form, as if there be Hills, Dales , Rock*% Momtainty Ca- tara&s^ Rubies, Aqu&dutts, Towns, Cities, Cafilcs, Forti- fications , or whatfoever elfe may prcfent itfelfto view \ ma- king always a fair Sky, to be feen afar off-, letting your light always defcend from the left hand to the right. IV. In beginning your work, firft begin with a large Sky ; and if there be any fhining or reflexion of the Sun, beware you mix no Red- load in the Purple H 4 of nz tPolygraphkes. Lib. 2. of the Sky, or Clouds, but only with Lake and white : the yellow and whitifh beams of Sol work with Ma- fticot and white. V. Then with a frefh or clean pencil fmifh the blewihh Sky,and Clouds, with Smalt only : at the firft working,deadall the work over, with colours fuitable to the Air, green Meadows, Trees, and ground, lay- ing them fomewhat fmooth,not very curioufly, but flightly andhaftily, make a large S^y, which work down in the Horizon,faintly, bat fair , and drawing nearer to the earth, let the remote Mountains appear fweet andmifty, almoft indiftinguifhablc, joyning with the Clouds, and as it were loft in the Air. VI. The next ground colour downwards mull en- crealc in magnitude of reafon, as nearer the eyes > fomewhat blcwifn or Sea-green : but drawing to- wards the firft ground, let them decline into a rcddilh or popinjay-green : the lad ground colour, mult be nesrelt the colour of the earth , viz,, a dark yellow, brown and green •, with which, oriorhe colour near it, you rauft make your firlt Trees •, making them, as they come near in diftanee,to encreafe proportionally ip colour and magnitude, with great judgement : the leaves flowing and falling one with another, lome ap- parent, others loft ' in fhadovv. VII. Let your Landskip liejow^andasit were un- der the eye ( which is moft graceful and natural) with a large and full Sky not riling high , and lifting it felf into the top of the piece, asfome have done. VIII. Be fure to make your fhadows fall all one way, viz.. to make light againft darknefs, and dark- nefs againft light -, thereby extending the profpeft, and making it to fhew as afar off; by lofing its force and vigour, by the remotenefs from the eye. IX. In touching the Trees, Boughs and Branches, put Chap, 3 j. Degrees of Colouring. m put all the dark (hadows firft, raifing the lighter leaves above the darker , by adding Malticot to the dark greeii, which may be made with Bice, Pink, and Io- dic© : the uppermoft of all, exprefl lait of all , by lightly touching the exteriour edges of fome of the former leaves, with a little green , -Malticot , and white : the darkeft fhadows you may let oifwith Sap- green and Indico. X. Trees and their leaves, Rivers, and Mountains far diftant, you mult ftrive to exprefs with a certain real foftnefsand delicatenefs .-in making Cataracts great falls of Waters, and Rocks, you mult firit lay a full ground near the colour, then with affronter in the dark places, and flight hcightning in the lHit • remarking all diiproportions, cracks ~ ruptures 3 and various reprcfentations of infinitely differing matters- the manner whereof is abundantly exprelt, inalmoft every Landskip. CHAP. XXXIII. Of the various Forms or Degrees of Co- louring. ""T Here are four various Forms or degres ofco- 1 louring, viz.. i. Of Infants, or Children, z. Of Virgi nSy or J a ; r Women. 5. Naked bodies. 4 'q{^ ^ aged bodies. I !• Infants or young Children are to be painted of a 10ft and delicate complexion •, the Skin and ears of a ruddy and pleafant colour, almolt tranfparent - which naay be done with White-lead, Lake, and a little Red- lead ; ihadowing it thin, faint and foft; letting the Cheeks, II a Volygraphices: Lib. 2. checks, lips, chin, fingers, knees, and toes, be more ruddy than other parts-, making all their linnen very fine, thin, and tranfparent , or perfpicuous , with ftrong touches in the thickeft folds. III. VWgim and fair Women are as curioufly to be exprefs'd as the former, but their Mufcles are to be more apparent , their fhape moreperfed-, and their fhadowstobe ofawhitifh yellow, blewifh, and in feme places almoft purple •, but the moft perfed and exquifite diredion is the life , which ought rather to be followed than any thing delivered by IV. Naked bodies are to be painted ftrong, lively, and accurate •, cxadly matching the refpedive pairs of Mufcles and Nerves, fixing each Artery in its due and proper place, giving each limb its proper motion form and lituation, with its true and natural colour •, all which to do well may be the ftudy and pradice cf almoft ones whole life. V Old or a?.rt whiter > fome T>srt browner - and ftrongly made it with foot,as your own ingenuity may inform you. Cha Chap. 40. Of Walls, Chambers, &c. hi CHAR XXXIX. Of the Colouring of Hair, I. *T^HEHair of Women and Children is coloured X with fimple Brown-Oker , and heightened with Maflicot: The fame in the hair of men, only making it fadder or lighter as the life requires. 1 1. Hair which is black may be done with foot , or Lamp-black, but it will abide no heightning. 1 1 L Childrens Hair is ibmetimes laid with brown, oker and white, and heightned with the fame •, and fometimes with Alom. IV. Sometimes alfo they are done with light-oker, and deepned with brown-oker, and heightened with Mailicot fimple. V. Old Womens Hair with brown-oker and black, heightned with brown-oker and white. VI. In Gray Hair take more black than white, and heighten with pure white, CHAR XL. Of walls ^ Chamber s> and the like, 1 T?0 R a brick Wall take Vermilion and white, J? and ihadow with Red-oker. U. If the ground of the wall is laid with black rnd white, (hade it with a thin black , if with Red-oker 1 and Ml (Polygraphkej.* Lib. 2. and white, {hade it with purple : or with Lake and black, orRed-oker fimple. III. If it be laid with black, white, and purple , fhade it with purple and black, I V. If the wall belongs to any Chamber or Hall , having Figures or Statues •, fo order and temper your colours, with fuch diftinftion, that the Figures and Wall be not drowned in each other. V. Sandy fore-grounds do thinly with brown- oker, fad or light as the life prefents •, fhadow the fame with the lame brown-oker , and Rocks with Red-oker, according as they are near to, or far from the fight. CHAP. XLI. Of Marble Pillars, Rocks, and the like. I. A /iArble muft be done with a good and light IVl pencil, after acarelefs manner in imitation of Nature, wherein all fuch ftains , colours , veins, and reprefentations of the faces of living things mult be carefully obferved. T I HTI- _ 1:1.. *. *.- 1 L /*„--— J :«. O ArVc r\f C"i«/^Tr X I. X llC imt IS LUUCWUltlVLU Ui huwvj, uiO . V I, Cabbage white with very thin yellow, and in fome places with very thin green ( or yellowifh green ) fweetning with very thin brown-oker mixt with Sap- green •, heighten with pure white. V 1 1. Cabbage red , lay with purple , fhade with Lakmus , and heighten with purple mixt with white. CHAP. XLV. How to Colour Fruits, I. fOHerries, withVermilionandfomeBrazil, (hade \^J with Lake, heighten with Vermilion mixt with white. I I. Heart Cherries in the middle with Vermilion and Lake mixt with white , the Circumference re- moinintT whlf-ifh liprr» cin^ thnrp fwertninP them with Lake, and heightening with white , or mixt with a little Lake. I I I. A Pear with mafticot , fliaded fweetly with brown-oker •, its blufh with Lake not too high, heigh- ten with white. I V. Apples with a thin Mafticot mixt with Ver- degriefe, fhade them with brown-oker, and give their blulh with a thin or deep Lake ( refembling Nature ) and heighten with white : if you will have them Chap^ 46. Of Qolouring Fruits. 127 them very high, mix your white with fome Mafticot, but this mult be according to the condition of the Fruit whether ripe or unripe , red , yellow or green, &c, V. Mulberries with a very ftrong Brazil, and then lay'd over with black, fo that between the ftalks and berries they make look a little reddifh according to Na- ture. V I. Strawberries with a white ground , which draw over with Vermilion and Lake very thin •, (hade it with fine Lake, and heighten with Mafticot mixt with Minium*, and then with white only fpeck them with Lake, by one fide of which put afmallerfpeck of white. VII. Wall-nuts with their green on. with Verde- griefe mixt with Sap-green , made with Sap-green and a little white- VIII. Wall-nuts without their green, with brown- oker, fhaded with foot. IX. Blew Plums with purple, fhadowed with Bice, and about theftalks with a little green, well fwectned ^ heighten with purple and white. X. White Plums and Peaches with thin Mafticot, fhaded with brown-oker ; give them a blufh with Lake, and heighten them with white. X I. Red and Blew Grapes with purple, fhaded with blew, and heightned with white. XII. White Grapes with thin Verdegriefe (called alfo 5/ww/fc green) mixt with Mafticot, fliadow with thin Verdegriefe •, and heighten with Mafticot mixt with white. C H A P. 12$ Potygrapbices. Lib. 2. CHAP. XLVI. Of the Limning of Fowls. \. *TpHE Eagle with black and brown-oker, fha- X dow it with black, the feathers heighten with jbrown-oker mixt with white : the bill and claws lay with Saffron, and fhade it with foot or Lamp-black : the eyes with Vermilion heightned with Malticot, or with Saffron (haded or deepned with Vermilion \ let the talons be done with black. II. The Swan wifh white mixt with a little black, heighten it with fine and pure white, ■ lb that its plumes or feathers by that heightning may look well: the legs with a black colour : the bill with Vermilion, fha- ded with Lake : the eyes yellow with a black round jn the middle-, from which falls a blackifh vein, de- fending to the bill. III. The Goofe with more white than black, viz,. a light gray , heighten it with a grey white ; the legs with black : the bill like the Swan. I V. The Duck with a light grey, the head with a dark blew, and dark green neck fwcetly enterwoven, the belly with white, the legs with black mixt with a little white, &c. but be fure to imitate the life. V. The Turkey with black mixt with a little white, from the back towards the belly whiter by degrees, but the belly fpeck with black, and in like manner the wings.- lethimbefhaded with black, the wings with Indico , fhaded with ftronger Indico , the bill with black , the eyes blew, heightned with white. He being angry the naked skin of his neck will Chap. 46. Limning of Fowks. \ 29 will be blood red , which lay with Vermilion mixt with Lake, fhaded with Lake: but otherwife lay it of a whitifh blew colour. VI. The Griffon with Saffron, fhadowed with brown-oker or foot. VII. The Pheafant with grey, made of white and black, the feathers of a white grey, the whole mull be fhaded with black, and heightened with pure white ihe eyes like the Falcon, the legs with Pink, and fha- ded with black. VIII. The Falcon with brown-oker, and black mixt with white, and fhadowed with black, the fea. thers mult be pleafantly drawn with black , and fprinkled upon its breafts ; heighten it with white let his talons be black , above the eyes lay with Saffron , and fhade with Vermilion , the bill with grey. IX. The Stork with grey, heightned with white and the corners of his wings ( near one half) with black, his long bill and legs with Vermilion , fhaded with Lake. X. The Owl with Cerufe , black and foot, fha- dowed with foot , and heightned with yellow-Oker and white, fometimes white alone, the eyes yellow circled with white, the legs of a brown yellow. CHAP, ijo tPolygraphicesl Lib. il CHAP. XLVII. Of Limning of Beafis. I. QHeep with a thin white, fhaded with Indico & and foot, and heightened with white. II. Hogs with brown-oker, fhaded with foot, and heightened with Mafticot: you may as you fee occafi- on colour the hair here and there with ftronger brown- oker •, his eyes with Vermilion , which heighten with Mafticot, his mouth with Indico, or white and black, fhaded with black. III. A Bear with brown-oker, red-oker, and black mixt •, fhadow with foot alone , or mixt with black, and heighten with brown-oker and white. IV. A Wolf with brown-oker and foot, (hadow with more foot. V. A gray Wolf with black , white, and brown- oker, fhaded with black and foot, or black only •, the mouth with black and red-oker, fhaded with black and foot heightned with red-oker and white. V I. The Elephant ( which is of a Moufe gray ) with black and white mixt with foot , and fhaded with black and foot, and heightened with the fame, with a little more white - 7 the nofeattheend of his trunk , inwardly muft be laid with Vermilion and Ce- rufe, fhadowed with black , or black mixt with Lake : in the fame manner the innerpartoftheears, the eyes with white tending to a grey. V I I. Mice are coloured as the Elephant : Rats a little browner. VIII. The Unicorn with a pure white , fhaded with Chap. 47. Of Limning of Beafls. iji with black : the chaps red, the eye and hoofs with a thin black. IX. The Heart with brown-okcr , (haded on the back with foot , which fweetly drive towards the belly, and fhade over again with a ftronger foot •, the neck and belly with white, the mouth and ears a little reddilh, the hoof black, the horns with foot, and (ha- ded with foot mixt with black. X. The Hind with the fame colours as the Hart, but thinner, and higher, not fo brown. XI. The Coney with black and white, his belly all white, fweetned with black \ and heightned with a ftronger white. XII. The Hare with brown-oker, his belly below a little whitifh •, fhade it on the back with foot, and heighten on the belly with white. XIII. Apes, Monkeys and the like, with Pink and black, heightned with Mafticot and white •, the face lay with a thin black mixt with foot , (haded with black and Pink mixt with a little red-oker. X I V. Cats if gray and brownilh, or tabby, with Indico, blew and white, heightened with pure white, and {haded with Indian blew and black mixt : in other colours ufe your difcretion. X V. The Afs with black mixt with white like grey ; if the Afs be of a mingled brown , black and white mixt with brown-oker, (haded with black in the mouth-, heighten with white. XVI. The Leopard with brown-oker and red- oker mixt with black , fhadow it with foot, the fpots with red-oker and black, the mouth with black and white : heighten him with light Oker. XVII. Horfes, Dogs, Oxen and fuch like, if white, with white mixt with a little foot, or Oker, (haded with a black and white, and heightened with perfect White. XVIII. It" Iji Tolygraphices. Lib. 2.' XVII. If of a Chdftnut-brown, with red-oker and black, fhaded with black and foot , and heightned with red-oker and white. XIX. IfanAfh grey, with black mixt with white, fhaded with black, and heightned with white. X X. If black, with a thin black, fhaded with a ftronger black, and heightned with black and white. XXI. A bay Horfe with Vermilion and brown- oker-, or only with red-chalk, fhaded with red-oker, and heightned with red-chalk mixt with white. XXII. If fpotted,by mixture of the aforefaid colours, and difcreetly putting every one in its proper apart- ment or place. CHAP. XLVIII. O} the Limning of serpents* I. '"TpHE Serpents on the back with Bice , and X downwards towards the belly with a pale black, the back fpeckled with black •, the belly fha- ded with red, fprinkled alfo with black fpecks. II TKo k.r\<\pv wifh rprlJpQrl V/prmilinn onrl (pf- fron, with blew in the back, and on the belly below Mafticot and white, fpeckled all over with black Jpots. III. The Crocodile with a dark thin green, from the back down-wards to the belly •, below the belly with Mafticot, fo that the yellow and green may melt, or vanifh away into one another *, fhadow him with Indico and fmalt, and heighten the belly with Ma- fticot and white : the mouth before and within redifh, the Chap. 49. Limning Waters and Bfi?. i jj the fcales black, the claws of blackifh green, the nails wholly black. I V. The Frog with a fair green, fpeckled with black, and towards the belly with green mixt with Mafticot, fweetned with green fpeckled : the eyes with Saffron, and black round them, the back height- ned with Saffron. CHAR X LIX. Of Limning waters apdFifb. I. T"T TAter at a diftance with white and Indico, W ihaded with Indico mixt with Bice , and heightned with white : if near the Horizon much like theSky. I I. Waters near lay with ftronger Indico, heighten and ihadow with the fame mixt with Bice : laftly -heighten with pure white. III. Waters nearer with ftronger Indico,Ihaded and heightned as before. I V. Waters in fields overgrown, with Pink and the like-, always imitating Nature. V. Fifh in green Waters, with Indico mixt with ^Vrewcfc-berry-yellow, Ihaded with a thin Indian blew, and heightned with pure white. Bat Fijhes ought alfoto be done according to their Na- ture arid-Colour , for fome are yellow , fome brown, fome fpeckjfd, fome grifled, fome blacky &C. in all which to con- serve in Figure the true Idea, pn ought to tak? direclions eply by the life* Horn. 1 3 4 P olygraphices. Lib. 2I Hor at. Epod. 16. Vos, quibus eft virtus, muliebrem tollite lu&um, Etrufca prater & volate littora. Nos manet Oceanus circumvagus , arva , beata Petamus arva, divites & infulas : Reddit ubi Cererem tell us inarata quotannis, Et imputata floret ufque vinea. Germinet & nunquam fallentis termes olivse a Suamque pulla ficus ornat arborem. Illis injufe ■veniunt ad mulftra capelte - 7 Refertque tenta grex amicus ubera. Nee Vefpertinus circumgemit urfus ovile^ Nee intumefcit alta viperis humus : Pluraque fclices mirabimur : ut neque largis Aquofus lurusarva radat imbribus, Plnguia nee ficcis urantur femina glebis : Utrumque rege temperante Coditum. Non hue Argoo contendit remige pinus, Neque impudica Colchis intulit pedem Non hue Sidonii torferunt cornua nauta?, Labor io(a nee cohors Ulyilei. Nulla nocent pecori contagia, nullius aftri Gregem xftuofa torret impotentia. jupiter ilia pisefecrevit iittoia genu , Ut inquinavit asre tempus aureum. Ton nobler fpirits, hence with wotnens tears, . Sail from Etrufcan confines free from fears: The Earth- encircling Ocean as invites? Rich //lands, Fields , Fields ble ft with all delights. Where Lands untiftd are yearly fruitful feen> And the anpmned fine perpetual rreen. Suit, OfLandskip. Still, Olives by the faithful branch are born, And mellow Figgs their native Trees adorn. There milchy Goats come freely to the pail. Nor do glad flocks, with dugs difl ended fail. The nightly Bear roars not about the fold, Nor hollow earth doth poifonom Vipers hold. Add to this happinefs, the humid Eafi Doth not with frequent jhowers the Fields infefl. Nor the fat feeds are parcht in barren land, The powers above both temf ring with command. No Barkcame hither with Argoan oar, Nor landed wanton Colchis on thisjhoar : Cadmus with filled fails turnd not this way, Nor painful troops that with XXlyUcsfiray. Here among fi cattel no Contagions are, Nor feelfiocks droughty power of any fiar. When brafs did on the Golden Age intrude ', Jove for the pious did this place fee lude. 7 'be End of the SeeondJBoo^ 1}/ POLYGR APHICES Liber Tertius. Of Painting, Wafhing, Colouring, Dy^ ingj Varnilliing, and Gilding. Containing the Defcription and life of all the chief Jnjlruments and Materials, and the way and manner of working. The Dying of Cloath , Silks , Horns \ Bones 5 Woods , Glafs , Stones , and Metals : To- gether with the Gilding and Varnifhing thereof, according to any purpofe or in- tent. CHAP. I. Of Painting in General. h f I VHEArt of Tainting ( which is the imitation of Nature ) confifts in three things , to JL wit , Defi^n-, Proportion ^ and Colour : al! tvhich are expreft in three forts Of Painting , «b Landslip, ffifory, and Lift* . , ij8 Polygraphias. .. Lib. J. I I. Landskip or Perfpective , wonderfully refpects freedom and liberty, to draw even what you pleafe. fiijlory refpects proportion and figure : Life, refpeds colour : In each of which there is a neceflary depen- dency of all the other. III. The work of the Painter is to exprefs the exact imitation of natural things •, wherein you are to ob- ferve the excellencies and beauties of the piece, but to refufe its vices. For a piece of Tainting may in fome part want Dili- gence , Boldnefs , SubtiUy , Grace , Magnificence, &C. while it is Efficiently in other parts excellent *, and there- fore yon are not fo much to imitate Ornaments, at to ex- fnfsthe inward power and ftrength. IV. In Imitation, always befure to follow the ex- amples and patterns of the belt matters ; left evil pre- cedents beget in you an evil habit. V. The force of Imitation refides in the fancy or imagination, where we conceive (what we have feen) the form or Idea of that, or thofe things which we would reprefent in lines and colours. VI. This Fancy or Imagination is ftrengthened, by lodging therein all variety of vifible rarities', as i. Forms made by light and darknefs-, fuch as are to t>e leen in Summer in the clouds, near Sun-fetting'(which by proximity or diitance of place, fuch as are Trees, Woods, Buildings, appearing perfect being near, or confufed in their parts being far off: 3. Forms of dreams, of which (whether fkeping or waking) the fancy mult be fully pofTeft. VI I. Where Defign is required*, you mult fancy every circumltance or the matter in hand, that in an infrant, with a nimble had, you may depict the fame vrithliveUnefs and grace. Slew Chap. t. Of habiting in General, ijc) Slow performance caufes a perturbation in the fancy , cooling of the mind, and deflrntUon of that paffion which JJjohU carry the work^one : but cjuicknefs and diligence brings forth things even excellent indeed : Care, Ind.uftrf And Exercife are the props, fupporters and upholders of Art. VIII. Be fure you dwell not too long upon defign- ing : alter not what is well , left for want of exquifite judgment you make it wbrfe : and if in defigning, you want that ability to follow the quicknefs of fancy, iiibmit to a willing negligence •, a carelefs operation adds fometifnesfuch a lingular grace, as by too much curiofity would have been totally loft ; then by re- viewing what is done, make a regnlar connexion of all the Idea's conceived in your mind. I X. With Apelks amend thofe things wnich others juftly find fault witft^ the reprehenfions of an Artift are as demonftf ative rules of experience •, and weigh every ones opinion for the advancement of Art. X. Laftly, be fure your piece be of a good Defgn^ Hifory or Life ; that the parts be well difpofed , the Characters of" Perfons, proper, the Form magnificent * the colour lively, and the ipirit bold : that it may ap* pear to be the work of a nimble fancy, ready memory* clear judgment, and large experience, ^ a chap; 140 Tolygrapbkes. Lib. 3. CHAP. II. t Of Painting in Oyl , and the Materials thereof. I. "T) Ainting in Oyl is nothing but the work or Art JL of Limning performed with colours made up or mixed with Oyl. II. The Materials of Painting are chiefly Seven, 1. The Eafel. 2. The Pallet. 3. The Straining Frame. 4. The Primed cloath. 5. Pencils. 6. The Stay. 7. Colours. III. The Eafel is a Frame made of wood fmuch like a Ladder) with fides flat , and full of holes, to put in two pins to fet your work upon higher or low- er at pleafnre •, fomething broader at bottom than at the top: on the backfide whereof is aftay, by which you may fet the Eafel more upright or (loping. I V. Toe Pallet is a thin piece of wood, (Pear-tree or Walnut) a foot long, and about ten inches broad, al- molt like an Egg, at the narroweft end of which is made an hole to put in the thumb of the left hand , near to which is cut a notch, that fo you may hold the Pallet in your hand. Its hj'c is to hold and temper the Colours upon. V. The Strewing Frame is made of wood, to which with nails is faftned the Primed cloath, which is to bo Painted upon. Thefe ought to be of feveralfiz.es according to the big' fjefs of the cloath. VI. The Primed cloath is that which is to be Pain- ted upon : and is thus prepared. Tah Chap. 2. Of Vdntingln Oyl, &c. 141 Take good Canvas andfmooth it over with a ftickftone , fae it over with face, and a little honey, and let it dry \ then white it over once with whiting and face mixed with a little hony, fo is the cloath prepared) on which yon may draw the Picture with a coal ; and laftly lay on the Co- lo>hrs. Where note , honey keep it from cracking, peeling or breaking out. VII. Pencils are of all bigneffes, from apintorhe bignefs of a finger, called by feveral names,as Ducks- tjMill fetched and pointed ', Goofequill fetched and pointed ; Swans-quill fetched and pointed; Jewelling pencils , and briftle pencils : fome in quills, fome in Tin cafes, and fome infticks. VIII. The Stay or Molftick^ is a Brazil flirlc (or the like) of a yard long-, having at the one end thereof, a little ball of Cotten, fixed hard in a piece of Leather, o f the bignefs of a Cheftnut-, which when you are at work you muft hold in your left hand •, and laying the end which hath the Leather ball upon the cloath or Frame, you may reft your right arm upon it, whilft you are at work. I X. The Colours are in number feven ( ut fapra) to wit, White, Black, Red, Green, Yellow, Blew, and Brown. Of which fome may be tempered on the Pallet at fe>ft y fame muft he ground, and then tempered ; and other fome rmtftbe burnt, ground , and laftly tempered. X. To make the Size for the Primed cloath at the forth Section of this Chapter. Take Glew, and boil it well in fair water, till it be dijfolved, and it is done. XL To make the Whiting for the fixth Section of this Chapter. Tabf of the aforefaid Sice , mix' it with w'oiting K 3 ground j 141 Polygraphices. Lib. J. ground, and fo white your boards or cioath (being made fmooth ) dry them-, and white them a fecond or third time , laftly, fir ape them fmooth, and draw it over with White- lead tempered with Qyl. X I h To keep the Colours from skinning, Oyl Colours ( if not prefently ufed) will have a skin grow over them-, to prevent which put them into a glafs, and put the glafs three or four inches under water, fo Wfll they neither skin nor dry. X 1 II. To cleanfe the Grinding ftoneapd Pencils. If the Grinding ft one be foul, grind Curriers (havings fipon it , and then crumbs of bread, fo will the filth come eff : if the pencils be foul, dip the ends of them in oyl of Turpentine, and fyueezc them between your fingers , and {fay will be very clean. CHAP. Ill, Qf the Colours in General, And their (ignifi- cations. 1? *"I"*IJE chief Whites for Painting in Oyl are, X White-lead, Cerufe and Spodium. II. The chief Rlacfa arc Lamp-Hark. Searoal-jjlack* Ivory-black, Charcoal, and earth of Colen. III. The chief Reds are, Vermilion, SinaperLakc, Replead, Indian Red, Ornotto. IV. The chief GYcw are,Verdegricfe, Terra-vert, Verditer. V. The chief Yellows are, Pinl^, Itfafticot, Engjtfh Oker, Spruce Oker, Orpiment. VI y The chief B lews sip, Blew Bice, Indico, Ultra- rnaijpe, §nnlt. VII. The Chap. j. (olours in General y Sec. 143 VII. The chief Browns are Spanifh-brown , burnt Spruce, Umber. VIII. Thefe Colours, Lamp-black, Verd iter, Ver- milion, Bice, Smalt, Mafticot, Orpiment , Ultrama- rine, are not to be ground at all, but only tempered with oyl upon the Pallet. I X. Thefe Colours, Ivory, Cerufe, Oker and Um- ber are to be burnt, and then ground with oyl. X. All the reft are to be ground upon the Grinding ftone with Linleed oyl ( except White-lead, when it is to be ufed for Linnen, which then is to be ground with oyl of Walnuts, for Linfeed oyl will make it turn yellow. And now Jince we are engaged to treat of colours , it may neither be unnecejfary , nor unufeful for the young Artift to know their natural figmfcations ; which take us followeth. X I. Blew fignifieth truth, faith, and continued af- fections*, Axjtre, Conftancy *, Violet,z religious mind. XII. I Orange-tawny fignifies Pride, alfo integrity ; Tawny forfaken, Limmon, jealoufie. X I I I. Green lignifies hopes : Grafs-gretn , youth , youthfulnefs , and rejoycing : Seagreen , Inconftancy . XIV. fo^'fignifies Juftice , Vertue and Defence : Flame-Colour-, Beauty and defire : Aiaidens-blujl) , Envy. XV. Tellow lignifies Jealoufie : perfect yellow, Joy, Honour, and greatnefs of Spirit -.Gold-colour, Avarice, XVI. Flefli-colour fignifieth Lafcivioufnefs : Carnation^ Craft, Subtilty and Dcceipt.- Purple, Fortitude and Strength. XVII. Willow-colour fignifieth forfaken: Popingjay green, Wantonnefs : Peach-colour, Love. XVIII. White fignifieth Death : Milkzwhite, Inno- cency, Purity, Truth, Integrity : Black.-, Wifdom, So* briety, and Mourning, K 4 XlX.Srrrftr 144 Tolygraphkes. Lib. j. XIX. Straw-colour fignifieth Plenty : Jluft of Iron , Witherednefs : Ermine , Religion and Holinefs. X X. The White-, Blackly Med, and green, are colours held [acre din the Church of Rome: White is worn in the Feftivals of Virgins, Saints , Confeftbrs and An- gels, to (how their Innocency: Red in the Solemni- ties of the Apoftles and Martyrs of Jcflis : Blackm Lent and other Falling dayes : Green is worn between the Epiphany and Septuagefima : and between Pentecofi £nd Advent. CHAP. IV. Of the fitting of Colours for Painting. I. T T PON the Pallet difpofe the feveral colours , LJ at a convenient diltance, that they may not intermix : firft lay on the Vermilion, then the Lake, then the burnt Oker, then the Indian Red, Pink, Um- ber, Black and Smalt, each in their order, and lay the White next to your thumb, becaufe it is of tenelt ufed , for with it all fliadows are to be lightned , and next the White a ftifF fort of Lake ^ thus is the Pallet fur- piihed with iingle colours for a face. Now to temper them for jh 'adowing various complexions do thus. 1 1. For a fair complexion. Take White one drachm, Vermillion, Lake of each two dreachms, temper them, and lay them afidefor-ihe deepcfi Carnation of the face : to part of the aforefaid mixture yut a little more white, for a light Carnation \ and to part fif that put more white ( which temper an the Pallet} for the light eft colour of the face, III. The Chap. 4I Fitting Colours for Paintmg. 14 j III. The faint fhadows for the fair complexion. Take Smalt, and a little white, for the eyes ', to part of that add a little Pinkj,, and temper by it f elf for faint greeni[h fjadows in the face. IV. The deep ihadows for the fame. The Sinaper Lake, Pink^, and blacky of each, which temper together ; if the jhadows ought to be redder than what is tempered, add more Lake', if yellower, add more Pink', if blewer or grayer, add more blackj thus jhallthe Pallet be ftted with colours. V. For a brown or fwarthy complexion. The fmgle colour being laid on the Pallet as before^ and tempered ', to the white, Lalje and Vermilion, put a little burnt Okn for a Tawny \ and for heightening addfome Tellow Oher, fo much as may ju ft- change the colours. The faint and deep jhadows are the fame at the third and fourth Sedion of this Chapter. V I. For a Tawny complexion. The colours are the fame with the former^ but the fra- iows are different', which muft be made of burnt Operand Vmber , {which will fit well : ) if the fmdow be not yellow enough, add a little Pinkjo it. V 1 1. For a black complexion. The darl^fjadows are the fame with the former : but for heightening take White, Blackj Lake, and burnt Qker , in tempering of which put in the white by degrees, till you come to 'the lighteft of all. Where note that the fmgle colours at fir ft laid upon the Pallet and tempered, ferve for fiiadows for all complexions ; and that all deepnings ought to be with blacks Lak$ and Pwktempered together. CHAP. 146 (Polygraphices. Lib. j, CHAP. V. Of Colours for Velvet, I. T7°R black. Felvet. Take Lamp-black and Ver- JT degriefe for the firft ground •, that being dry , take Ivory-black, and Verdegriefe , fhadow it with White-lead mixt with Lamp-black. II. For Green. Take Lamp-black and White-lead, and work it like a Ruflet Velvet, and let it dry ; then draw it over with Verdegriefe tempered with a little Pink. III. For Sea-green. Take only Verdegriefe and lay it over Ruflet : If a Grafs-green, put a little Ma- fticot to it-, fhadowthefe greens with Ruflet, which lay according to the deepnefs of the green, I V. For Red. Take Vermilion , and fhadow it with Spanilh-brown ; and where you would have it darkeft, lhadow with Seacoal-black and Spaniih-brown with the aforefaid colours, dry it, and then glofs it over with Lake. V. For Crimfon or Carnation. Take Vermilion, to which add White-lead at pleafure. V I. For Blew. Take Smalt tempered alone. VII. For Tellom Take MafHcot and yellow Ok«r, and where you would have it darkeft, fhadow it with Umber. VIII. For Tawny. Take Spanifh-brown , White- lead, and Lamp, black, with a little Verdegriefe, to fhadow where need is : when dry, glofs it over with Lake and a little Red-lead. I X For hair colonr. Take Umber ground alone j and Chap. 6. Qolours for Sattins. 147 and where it fhould be brighteft, mix fome White- lead about the folds, lighten or darken with White- lead and Umber. X. For Aft-colour. Take Charcoal,black and White- lead*, lighten with white-lead: a colour like to a dark, Ruffet will be an Aft colour. XI. For Turtle. Take Smalt and Lake, of each alike, temper them (light or deep as you pleafe) with white- lead. XII. Laflly me, that in Painting Velvet you muft at firft work it fomewhat fad, and then give it a fudden brightnefs. CHAP. VI. Of Colours for Sattins, I. pOR Blacks, Take Lamp-black ground withOyl r and tempered with white-lead*, and where you would have it mine molt, mix Lake with the white- lead. I I. For Green. Take Verdegriefe ground alone and mixed with white-lead ; adding Pink where you would have it brighpeft ; to the deepeft fhadows add more Verdegriefe. I I I. For Tellow. Take Mafticot, yellow Oker and "Umber (ground each by themfelves) where it mould be brighteft ufe Mafticot alone *, where a light fhadow, ufe Oker, where darkeft ufe Umber. IV. For Purple. Take Smalt alone, and where it ftould be brighteft nfe white-lead. VV For Red. Take Spanifh-brown ( ground alone) r n. X k with Vermiuon > and where it Ihould be bright- ( Jt mjx white-lead with the Vermilion. i. VI. For 148 Tolygraphkes. Lib, $• V I. For White. Take White-lead ( ground alone) and Ivory-black, which temper light or dark. V I J. For blew, Temper ,'Smalt and White-lead ; where it mould be faddeft, ufe Smalt ♦, where lighteft , White-lead. VIII. For Orange colour. Take Red-lead and Lakes *, where brighten:, Red lead, where faddeft, Lake. I X. For Hair colour. Temper Umber and wkite- lead *, where it fhouldbebrighteft, put more White- lead, and where the greateft fhadow, ufe Seacoal-black mixed with Umber. CHAP. VII. Of Colours for Tajfaty , Cloth and Leather. \. nnjfatits are Painted much as Sattins, thus: Take JL fuch colours as are fit for the purpofe, and lay them one by another upon the work, and fhadow them with others. I I. Cloth is the fame work with Sattin, fave, you muft not give to Cloth fo fudden a mining glofs. I I I. Cloth of Gold is made of brown Oker and li- quid Gold j water and heighten upon tlie fame with finall gold ftroaks. I V. For Buff, mix yellow Oker and White-lead ; and where it mould be dark by degrees, mix it with a ftetle Umber •, when you have done, fize it over with Umber and Seacoal-black. V. For yellow Leather , take MafHcot and yellow Oker, fhadow it with Umber. VI. For black. Leather^ take Lamp-black , and fha- dow it with White-lead. VII. For. Chap. 8. Colours for Garments, &c. 149 VII. For White Leather? take White-lead, andlha- dow it with Ivory-black. CHAP. VIII. Of Colours for Garments in general. I. ' 1 T?OR Blacky Let the dead colour be Lamp-blacfc JT and Verdigriefe: being dry, go over with Ivory-black and Verdigriefe:, but before the fecond going over, heighten it with white. I I. For Hair colour. Take Umber and White for the ground *, Umber and black for the deeper fhadowsj Umber and Englifh Oker for the meaner fhadows 7 white and Englifli Oker for heightening. I I I. For Blew. Take Indico and White : firft lay the White, then the Indico and White mixed *, then deep- en it with Indico, and when dry, glaze it with Ultramarine which will never fade. Smalt mil turn blacky and Bice will turn green. I V. For Purple: Take Smalt tempered with Lake and White-lead j then heighten with White-lead. V. For a fad Med. Take Indian Red heightened with White. V I. For a light Red. Take Vermilion, glaze it over with Lake, and heighten it with White. V 1 1. For a Scarlet. Take Vermilion and deepen it with Lake , or Indian Red. VIII. For Green. Take Bice and Pink, heighten it with Mafticot, and deepen with Indico and Pink. IX. For yellow. Take Mafticot, yellow Oker, Um- ber-, lay Mafticot and white in the lightelt phces - 7 Oker aud White in the mean places, and Umber in thedarkeft, glaze it with Pink. X. For 150 tpolygttyhces. Lib. 3. X. For Orange cblour. Lay the lighteft parts with . Red-lead and white, the mean parts with Red-lead alone ; the deeper parts with Lake, and if need is, heighten it with white. XI. For a fad Green. Mix Indieo with Pink: for a light Green mix Pink and Mafticot : for a Grafs-green mix Verdegriefe and Piilk. XII. Remember always to lay yellows, blews, reds and greens, upon a white ground, for that only giveth them life. CHAP. IX. Colours for Metals and precious Stones, I. V?OR Iron. Take Lamp-black and V/hite-lcad * 7 J7 if you would have it nifty, take Seacoal-black, and mix it with a little white. I I. For Silver. Take Charcoal-black and White- lead •, where you would have it darkeft , ufe more Charcoal : work Silver fomewhat ruftifh, and give it a fudden glofs with White-lead only. III. For Gold. Take Lake, Umber, Red-lead, Ma- (Vimf - 1*av thp arroiprt Wl*"h Ji f*r\^]noA ortA ili+fle^rtT Pink : where you would have it darkeft, fhadow it moft with Umber, where lighteft with Mafticot* Note? in grinding Red-lead for the Gold fae, put in a little Verdegrkfe to make it dry fooner. I V. For Pearls. Temper Charcoal-black with white- lead , till it be a perfed rufTct \ then make the Pearl with it, and give it a ipeck of , White-lead only to make it mine. Where note , that Cerufe tempered tfith Oyl of Whiti Toppy is excellent to heighten up Uarls* V. For Chap. 10. Qhurs for Landskips. iji V. For precious Stones* For Rubies, &c. lay their counterfeit grounds with tranfparent colours \ and Lake, Verdegriefe and Verditer give them a ihining colour. CHAP. X. Of Colours for Lands kip. I. *p OR a light Green , ufe Pink and Mafticot JT heightned with white : for a fad Green, Indico and Pink heightned with Mafticot. I I. Forfome Trees, take Lake, Umber and White, for others Charcoal and white, for others Umber, black and white, with fome green •, adding fometimes Lake or Vermilion, with other colours. I I I. For Wood, take Lake, Umber and white, mix- ing fometimes a little green withal. 1 V. For Fire, lay Red-lead and Vermilion tempered together where it is reddeft : where it is blew, % oyl, Smalt, and white-lead : where it is yellow, take Mafti- cot, and work it over in certain places-, where you would have it mine molt, with Vermilion. V. For an Autre Sk*e , which feems a far off, take Oyl, Smalt, or Bice, and temper them with Linfeed- oyl. But grind them not : for Smalt or Btce Htterly lofe their colour in grinding. VI. For a Red Skte, take Lake and white*, and for Sun-beams , or yellow clouds at Sun-rifing or fetting, take Mafticot and white. V I I. For a Night Skje, or clouds in a ftorm,take In- dico deepned with black, and heightned with white. VIII. For Wood colours^ they arc compounded either of 1 5 1 chin, and over the upper lip :) proceeding gradually till you come to the reddeft parts of all. VIII. Lay faint greenifh fhadows in convenient places , and where it is neceflary to foften harfher fhadows, but take heed of putting green where red mould be. IX. The. faint or light parts thus done, take one of the Goofe quill pointed, or Ducks quill fitched,and begin at the eyes to fhadow with Lake, going over the nofe, mouth, compafsoftheear, &c. before you lay on any colour, wiping it lightly over with a lin- nenrag, to prevent the overcoming of the other co- lours. X. The colours both light and dark being put in* take a great fitch pencil-,and fweeten the colours there- with, by going over the fhadows with a clean foft pen- cil, which being well handled will drive and intermix the colours one into another, that they will look as if they were all laid on at once, and not at divers times. L Where 154 Polygraphicesl Lib. j. Where note, that the bigger pencils you ufe, the fleeter and better your workjvill lie. X I. At the fecond fitting, begin again with clean pencils, of fuchbignefs as the work requires, and ob- serve well theperfon, and fee what defects you find in your work at firft fitting , and amend them ^then heighten or deepen the fhadows as occafion requires. XII. Lajtly , take a Goofe quill brittle, and put in the hair about the face ( if there mull be any) and rub in the greater hair, with the greater briftle,heightning it up with the Goofe quill pencil. CHAP. XII. Of the clemfmg of any old Painting^ I *T»Ake good wood afhes, and learce them, or elfe J fome Smalt or powder-ble w,and with a Spunge and fair water gently wafh the Pi&ure you would cleanfe (taking great care of the fhadows) which done, dry it very well with a clean cloth. > 1 1. Then varnifh it over again with fome good var- nifh, but fuch as may be warned offagain with water if need be. We fhall 9 hereafter [hew the way of making varnifh of fever al forts, mean feafon this following mayferve. 1 1 1. Take either common varnifh ( made with Gumfandrack diffolved in Linfeed-oylby boiling) or glair of Eggs, and with your pencil go over the Pi- cture once, twice , or. more therewith as need requires. CHAP* Chap. 13. A Pifture in general ?1ff> , hvit t* ■ w * ..M*.-*..^ »-».>.». «, W »»»«. .. , ->.~ D either to fet out Maps or Printed Pictures in proper Colours, or elfe to varniih them. I I. The Inftruments and materials of warning are chiefly fix: to wit, 1. Alom-yvater. 2. Siz.e. 3. Liquid Cold. 4. Pencils. 5. Colours. 6. Varmft. III. To make Alom-water. Take Alom eight ounces, fair water a quart, boil them till the Alom is difibl- ved. I V. To make Si&. Take glew, which fteep all night in Chap. 20. Colours fimple for Wafbing. \6$ in water, then melt it over the fire, to fee that it be neither too ftrong nor too weak : then let a little of it cool *, if it be too ftifFwhen it is cold, put more wa- ter to it, if too weak more glew, ufing it luke-warm. V. Liquid Gold, It is exactly made by the firlt Se- ction of the 2 1 Chapter of the fecond Book, V I. Pencils are to be of all forts both fitch'd and pointed, as alio a large pencil brulh to palte Maps upon Cloth ; another to wet the paper with Alom water ^ a third to ftarch the face of the picture withal before it, be coloured : and a fourth to vamifh withal. VII. The colours are the fame with thofe which we mentioned in Chap. 17. lib. 2. to which add, 1. Of Black, Printers black, Frankfordbhck. 2. Of Red, Vermilion, Roflet. 3. Of Blew, Verditure , Litmos Flory. 4. . Of Tellow y Cambogia, Yellow-berries , Or- piment. 5. Brazil, Logwood (ground) and Turnfole, Cochenele, Madder. CHAP. XX. Of Colours fmpU for Wafljing. I. T^Rinters blacky Vermilion, Roflet, Verditure and 1 Orpiment are to be ground, as we have taught at the fifth Section of the 22 Chapter of the fecond Book. I I. BrazSl. To fome ground Brazil put fmall Beer and Vinegar, of each a fufficient quantity, let it boil gently a good while, then put therein Alom in pow- der to heighten the colour , and fome Gum-Arabick to bind it , boil it till it tafte ftrong on the tongue , and make a good red. III. Logwood. Ground Logwood toiled as Brazil, makes %66 (Polygraphkes. Lib.J« makes a very fair tranfparent Purple Colour. I V. Cochcnele. Steeped as Brazil was boiled, makes a fair tranfparent purple : as thus, take Cochenele and put it into the ftrongeft Sope-lees to ftcep, and it will be a fair purple, which you may lighten or deepen at pleaiure. V. Madder. Take Madder four drachms , ground Brazil one ounce, Rain-water a quart -/boil away a third part •, then add Alom half an ounce, boil it to a pint v then Gum-Arabick one ounce, which boil till it is diffolved, cool it ftirring it Often, and {train it for life. It is a good Scarlet die for Leather. VI. Verdegriefe. Take Verdegriefe ground finely one ounce,putto it a good quantity 'of common varnifh, and fb much oylof Turpentine, as will make it thin enough to work withal ; it is a good green. And Ver- degriefe, Alom, of each one drachm, Logwood three drachms, boiled in Vinegar, make a good Murry. VII. Gambogia. Diflblve it in fair fpring water, and it will make a beautiful and tranfparent yellow : if you would have it ftronger, diflblve fome Alom therein: it is good for Silk, Linnen, white Leather, Parchment, Vellom, Paper, Quills, &c. VIII. To make Verdegriefe and' Certtfe, according to Glauber. Thefe colours are made with Vinegar in earthen pets fct into hot hoifeJuug : bul if youdiiToive your Venus or Saturn with fpirit of Nitre, and precipitate your Venus with a lye made of Salt of Tartar, and your Saturn with Salt water, edulcorating and drying them *, the Venus will yield an excellent Verdegriefe , which will not corrode other colours as the common Verdegriefe doth •, and the Saturn yields a Cerule whiter and purer than the ordinary much better for Painting or Chirurgery. IX, TV/- Chap. 11. Qolours for Wafbing. \6y IX. Yellow Fufikkjberry. Boil it in water or fteep them in Alom water, it makes a good yellow for the fame purpole. X. Tnrnfole. Put it intofharp Vinegar over a gentle fire till the Vinegar boil, and is coloured j then take out the Turnfole and fqueeze it into the Vinegar, in which diflblve a little Gum-Arabkk ^ it fhadows very well on a Carnation or yellow. X I. Litmos. Cut it mtofmall pieces, and deep it a day or two in weak Gum-Lake water , and you will have a pure blew water to warn with. XII. Flory Blew. Grind it with glair of Eggs, if then you add a little RofTefc it makes a light Violet blew, mixed with White and Red-lead, it makes a Crane-feather colour. XIII. Saffron. Steeped in Vinegar and mixed with gum- water is a good yellow. CHAP. XXL ■ Of Compounded Colours for jvajbing. I. f\Ran£e Colour. Red-lead and Yellow berries make KJ a good Orange colour: or thus, takeArnotto half an ounce , Pot-afhes one Drachm , water one pound, boil it half away, thenftrain it, and ufe it hot. It is good for White Leather, Paper, Vellom, Quills, Parchment, &c. II. Green. Take diftilled vinegar, filings of Cop- per, digeft till the vinegar is blew, which let ftand in the Sun or a flow fire till it is thic^ enough, and it will be a good green, Or \6% tpolygraphkes. Lib. £ Or thus, Take Cedar-green ( w£;V6 is beft of all ) or inflead thereof green Bice, fteep it in Vinegar, andftrain it, then grind it well with fair water , and put to it a little honey, and dry it well', when you ufe it, mix it with gum-water. III. To make fine Indico. Take the bloitoms of Wode three ounces, Amylum one ounce, grind them with Urine' and ftrong Vine- gar, of which make a Cake,, then dry it in the Sun and fo keep it for ufe. I V. A Blew to wajl) upon paper 1 . Take of the belt Azure an ounce, Kermes two ounces, mix them, which temper with clear gum- wa- ter, and it will be a glorious colour. V. To make a Venice Blew. Take quick Lime, make it into paft with ftrong Vi- negar, half an hour after put thereto more Vinegar to foitenitj then add Indico in fine powder one ounce, mix them and digeft it in horfe-dung for thirty or forty days. V I. Another excellent Blew. Mix fine white Chalk with juyce of Elder-berrie? full ripe, to which put a little Alom-water. VII. To make blew Smalt, Take fluxible fand , Sal-Nitre and Cobalt ,. mix them together. V\\£ A lively Yellow. Diflblve Orpiment in gum-waten," to which put a little ground Vermilion •, grind them together and you (hail have a very lively colour. IX. A light Green. Take juyce ofRew, Verde- griefe, and Saffron , grind them well together and ufe them with gum-water. Or thus, Take Sap-green, Flower-deluce , or Tawny grzen , which fteep in water ; VerditHre and Cerufe mixt * * with Cliajp. li. QHburs for ShadouHng. \6q with a little Copper green , make a good light colour. X. Blew Ultramarine, blew Bice,Smalt, and Verdi- ture , ground fingly with gum-water , or together , make a good blew. i X I. Brown. Cerufe, Red-lead, Englifh Oker, and Pink,makea good brown. X I I. Spanijh-brown. To colour any horfe, dog, or the like, you mull not calcine it , (yet not calcined it is a dirty colour : ) but to ihadow Vermilion, or lay upon any dark ground , behind a picture, to fhade berries in the darkelt places , or to colour wooden pofts, wainfcot, bodies of Trees and the like, it is very good ( being burnt.) XIII. Fiefh Colour. Mix white, Indian Lake, and Red-lead (according as you would have it light or deep, ) and to diftinguifh a mans fleih from a wo- mans, mingle with it a little Oker. XIV. Colours of Stones. Verdegriefe with Varnifli makes an Emerald : withHwrweLakea Ruby: with Ultramarine a Saphire. X V. A never fading Green. Take juice of flowers of Flower-de-luce, put it in- to Gum-water and dry it in the Sun. CHAP. XXII. Of mixing Colours and Shtdovringl 1. TN mixing be careful not to make the colour too JL fad, nor take the pencils out of one colour and put them into another. 1 1. In mixing colours, ftir them well about the wa. ter feverally till they are well mixed ^ then put them together, making the colour fadder or lighter at plea- fure. M III. Green 170 Polygraphices. Lib. y IVL Green is fhadowed with Indico and yellow- berries. IV. Blew is fhadowed with Indico , Litmofe and Flory ; or any of them being fteeped in Lees of Sope- afhes,. and ufed with gum-water. V. Garments are fhadowed with their own proper colours : or you may mingle the colour with white ( for the light) and fhadow it with the lame colour unmingled : or you may take the thinneft of the co- lour for the light , aud fhadow with the thickeft or bottom of the fame. V I. Sap-green is only ufed to fhadow other greens With, ancl not to be laid for a ground in any Garment. V 1 1. Lake ought not to be fhaded with any colour, for it is a dark red :, but for variety you may fhadow it with Bice, or blew Verditure, which will make it like Changeable Taffata. VI I L The fhadow for Tel low -berries is limber •, but for beauties fake with Red-lead,and the darkeft touches with Spanifh-brown •, and for variety with Copper green, blew Bice or Verditure. I X. White fets off flews and black* very w r ell : Red fets offwellwith^Z/tfiv: Tellows with reds, fad blews , browns, greens , and purples. X. Blews fet off well with yellows , reds, whites , browns, rnd blacks: and Green fets off well with/wr- pies, and reds. G H A R & Chap* ly (jolours for Laiidskips. \y\ — ! CHAP. X X 1 1 1. Of Colours for Landskips, I» /^Reen mixed with white, Pink, Bice, Mafticot, VJ Smalt, Indico, or Ccrufe •, or blew Verditure mixt with a few yellow-berries makes a good green. for Landskips. II. For the faddeft hills ufe Umber burnt } for the Ughteft places, put yellow to the burnt limber : for other hills lay Copper green thickened on the fire* or in the Sun : for the next hills farther off 'mix yellow- berries with Copper green: let the fourth part be done with green Verditure ; and the furtheft and fain- tefi places with blew Bice, or blew Verditure mingled with white, and fhadowed with blew Verditure, ill the fhadows indifferent thick. III. Let the high-ways be done with red and white Lead, and for variety Yellow-oker •, fhadow it with burnt Umber, which you may ufe for ftndy Rocks and Hills. I V. Mocks may be done with feveral colours ,■ iri fome places black and white, in other places red and white, and in others blew and white, and the like, as you fee convenient. V. The water mull be black Verditure and white , fhadowed with green and blew Verditure, when the banks cafb a green (hadow upon the water j and the water is dark fhadowed, then fhade it with Indico, green thickned, and blew Verditure. VI. Colour buildings with as much variety of plea- fant colours j as may be imaginable, yet let reafon be your rule in mixing your colours : you may fometimes M 2 ufe \jl Volygraphices. : Lib. J. ufe white and black for the wall, conduits or other things : for Brickhoufcs and the like , Red-lead and v« hite : if many houfes Hand together,fet them off with variety of colours, as Umber and white j Lake and white-, Red-lead and white, and the like. V 1 1. Laftly, for the Skie, ufe Mafticot or yellow- berries, and white for the loweft and Ughtefi places •, red Roflet and white for the next degree \ blew Bice and white for the other \ blew Bice, or blew Verditure for the higheft. 7hefe degrees and colours mttft be fo wrought together , that the edge of each colour may not receive any jhar-pnefs y that is, fo as that you cannot perceive where you began tt lay thtm*, being fo drowned one in another* CHAP. XXIjV. Of the Practice ofwafhing. I. "Vr 7 \th the Alom water wet over the pictures to VV be coloured, for that keeps the colours from finking into the paper,and will add a luftre unto them , make them fhew fairer,and keep them from fading. I I. Then let the paper dry of it felf (being wafhed with Alom-water) before you lay on the colours *, or U„f„..~ ,r..,, „,„*. :*- „„„:.. c~.r ~~ — - — :ii n „,J *„*"»*•. tingfour or five times. III. The warning of the paper with the Alom-wa- ter muft be done with a large pencil brum, fuchas we have advifed to at the fixthSe&ion of the nineteenth Chapter of this Book. I V. But if you intend to varnifh your pictures after you have coloured them •, inftead of warning them with Alom-water , firil fize them with new fize made of good white ftareii, with a very'fBC bruih ; and this you Chap. iy. Making ofVarnifies. \y-> you mull be fure to do all over, for elfe the varniih will link through. V. Having thus prepared your work go to layingon your colours according to the former directions, fuiting them, as near as may be, to the life of every thing. V I. The Picture being painted, you may with (Ize (as at the fourth Sedtion of the nineteenth Chapter of this Book) pafte your Maps or pictures upon cloth , thus : wet the meet of cloth therein, wring it out, and ftrain it upon a Frame, or nail it upon a wall or board, and fo pafte your Maps or pictures thereon. VM. Laftly, if the Picture be to be varnimed, ha- ying thus fixed it into its proper Frame, then varnifh it with a proper varnifh (by the following rules ) and the work will be fully finimed. CHAP. XXV. Of the miking of yarnifbes'. *■ "XTArnifi for fainting in Oyl. V Take Maltich two ounces, oyl of Turpentine one ounce 5 put the Maltich in powder into the oy4 , and melt it over the fire,letting it boil little or nothing (left it be clammy,) when it isenough,you may know by putting in a hens feather, for then it will burn it. II. Farnifl} for fainted Pittnres. Take white Rozine one pound, Plum-tree gum ('or Gum-Arabick) Venice Turpentine, Linfeed-oyl, of each two ounces-,firft melt the Rozin and ftrain it very hot ; fteepthe Gum in oyl Olive (oyl ben is better) till it is dhTolved, and ftrain it, to which put the Trupen- tine and Rozin, and o/er a flow fire mingle them till M 5 they 174 Tolygraphices. Xib. }. they are well diflblved. When you ufe it, ufe it hot. III. Another for the fame. Take Olibanum and gum-Sandrack in powder , which mingle with Venice TurpentiQe , melting and incorporating them ftill over a gentle fire, then ftrain it hot. When you ufe it let it fa hot , and your Varnifi will fhine well ; it dries immediately. I V. Another for the fame. Take oyl of Linfeed, which diflill in a glafs Re- port , one ounce, fair Amber diflblved three ounces, mix them oyer a flow Fire, and it is done. V. A very good Vamifo for Gold, Silver, Brafs, Iron, Stone-, Wood-, Vellom, or Paper. Take Benjamin (made into fine powder between two papers) put it into a vial, and cover it with Spirit pf Wine four fingers above it, and let it ftand three or four days-, then ftrain it, and it will be bright anc\ Aiming, drying immediately, and retaining its bright- ness many years. If you Farnifi Gold , or any thing gilded, before the ftraining you fhoitld put in a few blades of Saffron for co- lour fake : but if Silver or any thing white, you, ought to ufe the white part of the Benjamin only. V I. A Varnifh particularly for Gold, Silver, Tin, or Copper. Take Linfeed oyl fix ounces, Maftick, Aloes Epa- tlck of each one ounce \ put the gums in powder into the oyl, into a glazed earthen pot, which cover with another, luring them together, in the bottom of which let be a hole , whereinto put a linall flick with a broad y \ cover them all over with clay, t'ex- • \) let it over the fire, andftir it as often tl (I \m i] Pet ■ u ftrike it ovcl -with V 1 1. A Chap, 25. Making of VarniJJw. 17 j V 1 1. A Varnifh for Wood and Leather. Take Tin&ure ofSaffronorTurmerickin Spirit of Wine a pint, prepared Gum-lake a fufficient quantity, diilblve the gum in the Tin&ure, and it is done. This is a Var nifty of great ufe to layover Gold, andSH\ ver or any thing which is expofedtothe Air. VIII. To make the common Varnify. Take fpirit of Wine a quart, Rozin one ounce, Gum-lake a fufficient quantity, diffolve the gums in a gentle heat (being clofe covered ) and let them fettle : then gently decant offthe clear, which keep in a clofc Glafs-bottle for ufe. The thicks which remains > you may {train through 4 cloth , and keep for other purpofes. I X. To make a red Varniih. Take fpirit of Wine a quart, Gum-lake four ounces, Sanguis Draconis in fine powder eight ounces , Cov chenele one ounce, digeft a week over a gentle heat, then ftrain it for ufe. X. To makg a yellow Farmfli. Take fpirit of Wine a pint, in which infufe (three or four days) Saffron half an ounce , then ftrain it , and add Aloes Succotrina one ounce, Sanguis Draconis two ounces, which digeft a week over a gentle heat clofe covered, then ftrain it for ufe. X I. An Vniverfal Varmfi, the befi of all others. Take good Gum-Sandrack (but Gum^Anime is bet- ter) diflolve it in the higheft rectified fpirit of Wine (an ounce and half more or lefsto a pint) and it is done. Where note, 1. ThatunUfs the Spirits be highly rectified the Varnifh cannot be good. 2. That fome put into it Un* fecdoyl (which is naught *, oyl of ben is better) and mix them together. 3. Some mix boiled Turpentine? xfith it, others Cbymical oyls of deep colours ( as of Cloves, Mace, Nut- M 4 megs, \f6 Polygraphias. Lib. J. megs y Caraways ; Cinnamon) according to the intent. 4. 'That it onght to be kept in a glafs bottle clofe flopped, left it curdle, and the Gums feparate. XII. The Indian Varnifh for Cabinets, Coaches , and fitch like. Take thehigheft rectified fpirit of Wine a quart , feed Lake or lhell Lake five ounces, put them into a glafs body \ and diflblve the Lake in Balneo ( but ber ware left the water in the Balneum boil, for that will turn the Varnifh white ) this done ftrain the matter through a Flannel bag, and' keep it in a glafs bottle clofe ftoptfor ufe. Where note, 1. That if the fpirit is good, it will (if y oh put Gun-powder into it ) burn all away and fire the Gun-powder. 2. That this Varnifh done over leaf Silver , turns the Silver of a Gold colour'. 3. That this is that V arm ft which Ctach-makers and others ufe for thatpurpofe. 4. That it preferves the Silver which it is laid upon from the injuries of the Air. 5. That being laid upon any colour it makes it lookjnfinitely the more beautiful. 6. That if it lief rough you may polifh it with the impalpable powder of Emery and water. CHAP. XXVI Of the manner ofrarwjbing. ■ I. *T*H E intent of Varnifhing is either to preferve X the glofsof paintings or pictures, or elfe to reprefent and imitate the forms of mining and per- lucid bodies. IL To Varnifh paintings and pidures, 'tis no more tot with a pencil dipt in the varnim to go over the feme, Chap. 26. The manner of Varnlflnng. \?f fame, then letting it dry, and fo going over it fo of- ten as. in reafonyoufhallfee convenient. III. If you are to imitate anything, as Marble, Tortoife-fhell, Amber, Lapis Lazuli or the like \ you muft firft make the imitation of them, upon that which you would varnifh, with their proper colours, as in Limning or Painting with oyl •, which muft be through- ly dry : then by the fecond Stction go lover all with the varnifh , fo often till you fee it thick enough ^ letting it dry every time leifurely. For example fake. I V. To imitate Marble. Take of the Univerfal varnifh at the eleventh Se&ion of the five and twentieth Chapter , with which mingle Lamp-black ( or other black ) and "White-lead finely beaten, and with a brufh pencil, Marble the thing you would varnifh according to your fancy •, laftly, being dry ftrike it again two or three times over with clear varnifh alone, and it will be perfect. V. To imitate Tortoife-foell. Firft lay a white ground, then with convenient colours (as Vermilion with Auripigment) duly m bet with common varnifh, ftreak and fhadow the white ground with any wild fancy fas nearly imitating Tor- toife-flaell as you can) which being dry, ftrike it here and there with the red varnifh (mixed with a little Sinaper or Indian Lake) then up and down the work as nature requires touch it with varnifh mixed with any good black •, then ftroke it over with Univerfal var* pijh four orfivetimes,letting it dry every times •, lally, let it dry well a week, and with Pumice ftone ( in fine powder ) and a wet cloth polifh it by rubbing ; then go over it again three or four times with theUmverial varpijh, and ( if need require) polifh it again witlj fine putty as before-, after which you may once again ftrike v/8 iPolygraphtces. Lib.j ? ftrikeitover with the faid Varnifh, and it will be done. V I. To imitate Tortoife-Jhell tyon Silver or Gold. A white ground being laid , and fmeared over with Vermilion or the like \ lay over the lame leaves of Silver or Gold (as we have taught in other places) either with Gum-Ammoniacum , Lake , common Varnifh or glair*, this done, and being dry- ed, lhadow it according to reafon-, ftriking it over here and there with yellow Varnijh, and with the yellow Varnifh mixed with a little red Varnifi ', ( all things being done in imitation of the (hell ) ftrike it feveral times over with the Univerfal Varnijh, and polifh it ( in all refpe&s ) as before. VII. To imitateLdpis Lazuli. Upon aground of White-lead, Spodium or the like in common Varnifh (being firft dry) lay Ultramarine or fome other pure blew well mixed with the Uni- verfal Varnifh, fo as that the ground may not appear : then with wild, irregular ftreaks ( in refemblance of Nature ) with liquid or fhell Gold, run ftraglingly all over the blew, adding very finall fpecks upon the blew part, of fuch various colours, as are ufually to be feen upon the ftone. C H A P. Chap. 27. OfVegetableQ)tours,&:c. \?$ C II A P. XXV II. Experimental Obfervntions of Vegetable Co- lours in General, I, A Strong infufion of Galls filtred , mixed with Jljl a ftrong and clear folution of Vitriol, makes a mixture as black as Ink, : which with a little ftrong Oyi of Vitriol is made transparent again ,« after which the black colour is regained again, by the affii- lion of a little quantity of a ftrong lblution of Salt of Tartar. The firfi blacky (although pale in writing, yet ) being dry, appears to be good Ink^, I I. Decoftion of dried red Rofes, in fair water, mixed with a little filtrated folution of blew Vitriol made a black colour : this mixed with a little Aqua- fortis turn'd it from a black , to a deep 1 ed \ which by affufion of a little fpirit of Urine, may be reduced ftraight to a thick and black colour. III. Yellow wax is whitened by diflblving it over the fire in fpirit of Wine, letting it boil a little, and then exhaling the fpirit of Wine •, or elfe whilft it is hot* fcparating it by filtration. I V. Fair water mixed with a blood red Tin&urc of Benjamin drawn with fpirit of Wine, immediately makes it of a milk white colour. V. Blacknefs may be taken away w ith oy 1 of Vitriol -, fo black pieces of Silk or Hair I have turn'd to a kind of yellow. V I. A handful of LigMm Nephriticum rafped, infil- led in four pound of fpnng water, yields between the light 1 8© Polygraphker. Lib. jJ light and the eye and almoft golden colour ( unlefs the infufion be too ftrongj but with the eye between the light and it ( in a clear vial) a lovely blew as indeed it is : this with fpirit of Vinegar may be made to varnifh ( (till keeping its golden colour) and after with oyle of Tartar per deliquium may be reftored again. VII. Cloth died with blew and Woad, is by the yellow decoction of Lute ola died into a green. VIII. Syrup of Violets mixed with a high folution. of Gold in Aqmregia, produces areddifh mixture ; and with a high folution of filings of Copper in fpirit of Urine, a lovely fair green. I X. Syrup of Violets mixt with a little juyce of Lemons, fpirit of Salt, Vinegar, or the like acid Salt, will be immediately red-, but mixt with oyl of Tar- tar, or a folution of pot-a(hes, it will in a moment be perfect green : the like in juice of blew-bottles. X. A good quantity of oyl of Tartar, put into a ftrong folution of Verdegriefe, gives a dightful blew, which may be varioufly changed by adding fpirit of llrine, or Hartlhorn. X I. Although red Rofes hung over the fume of Sulphur, lofe all their rednefs, and become white: yet oyl of Sulphur ( which is nothing but the fumes con- denfed ) doth wonderfully heighten the tincture of *he fame. XII. Cochenele will have its colour far more height- nedby fpirit ofllrihe, than by rectified fpirit of Wine : and one grain of Cochenele in a good quantity of fpi- rit of Urine, being put into one hundred twenty fix ounces of water, tinged it ( although but faintly : ) which amounts to above one hundred twenty five thoufand times its own weight. XIII. Twenty grains of Cochenele being mixed with an ounce of Saccharum Samrni, makes a moft glori- Chap. 27. Of Vegetable Qolours. 181 glorious purple colour : and fo accordingly as tha quantity is either diminifhed or encreafed, fo the pur- ple colour fhall be either lighter or deeper. XI V. A few grains of CocheneU being mixed with the Lixivium of Quick-lime in a due proportion , makes a fading purple colour , of the greateft glory imaginable in the world. XV. The juice of privet berries with fpirit of Salt, is turned into a lovely red : but with a ftrong folutioa of pot-afhes into a delightful green. XVI. Upon things red by nature, as Syrup of Clove-gilliflowers, juice of Buckthorn berries, infufion ofRedRofes, Brazil, &c. Spirit of Salt makes no con- siderable change, but rather a lighter red : but other falts turn them into a greenifh •, efpecially juice of buckthorn berries. XVII. Juice of Jafmm and fnow drops, by a ftrong akalizMte folution, was ( although of no coLourj turn- ed into a deep greenifh yellow. XVIII. Buckthorn berries being gathered green and dried are called Saf -berries , which being infufed in Alom- water gives a lair yellow (which isufed by Book- binders for the edges of their Books, and to colour Leather alfo : ) being gathered when they are black, they are called Sap-green, and make a green colour being put into a Brafs or Copper veflel for three or four days •, or a little heated upon the fire, and mixed with Alom in powder, and prefled forth •, fo put into bladders hang- ing it up till it is dry : and being gathered about the end of November, ( when they are ready to drop) they yield a purplifh colour. X IX. Tincture oiCochenele, diluted never fo much with fair water, will never yield a yellow colour : a Ungle drop of a deep folution in fpirit of Urine, dilu- ted in an ounce off "fair water, makes a fair Pink, or Carnation. XX. Oyl 181 (Polygraphhes. Lib y XX. Oyl or fpirit of Turpentine, digeflcd with pure white Sugar of lead, yields inafhort time a high red tincture, which Chym ifts call Balfamum Saturni. XXI. Spirit of Salt dropt into a ftrong infufion of Cochcnek or juice of black cherries, makes immediately a fair red : but dropt into the infufion of Brazil, a kind of yellow : fo the 1 filtrated tincture of Balaufiins mixed with good fpirit of Urine, or the like , turns of a darkifli green-, but with fpirit of Salt, ahighrednefs like rich Claret wine •, which glorious colour may in a -moment be deflroyed, and turned into a dirty <*reen by fpirit of Urine. b X X II. A high infufion of Lignum Nephritichm^mix- cd with fpirit of Urine gives fo deep a blew, as to make the liquor opacenf : which after a day or two vanifhes and leaves the liquor of a bright amber colour. Where note that inftead of Spirit of Vrine yon may ufe cyl of Tartar^ or a ftrong folution of pot ajhes. XX II I. Infufion of Logwood in fair water (mixt . with fpirit of Sal Armoniack.) ftraight turns into a deep, rich, lovely purple •, two or three drops to a fpoonful is enough , left the colour be fo deep, as to be opacous. XXIV. Spirit of Sal ArmoniackjviW turn fyrup of Violets to a lovely green. ^ XX V. Infufion of Litmofe in fair water gives in a dear giafs a purple colour : bui by addition of ipirit of Salt, it will be wholly changed into a gbriom yellow. XXVI. The Infufions and juices oTfeveral plants, will be much altered by a folution of Lead in fpirit of Vinegar : it will turn infufion of red roie leaves into a fed green. XXVII. So Tincture of red rofes in fair water ,would be turned into a thick green, with the folution of Mi- nium in fpirit of Vinegar •, and then witfe the addition of Chap. 27. Of Vegetable Qhurs, &c. t8j of oyl of Vitriol the refolved Lead would percipitate white, leaving the liquor of a clear, high red colour again. XXVIII. We have not yet found, that to exfiibit Itrong variety of colours, there need be imployed a- ny more than thefe five, White, Black, Red, Blew, Yellow : fer thefe being varioufly compounded and decom- founded exhibit a variety and number of colours •, fitch as thofe who are grangers to painting can hardly imagine. XXIX. So Black and White varioufly mixed, make a valt company of light and deep Grays : Blew and Tellow, many Gre ens : Red and Tellow, Orange-tawnies : Red and White, Carnations : Red and Blew-, Purples, &c. producing many colours for which we want names. XXX. Acidfalts deftroy a blew colour.- Sulphu- reous, Urinous or fixed reftore it. XXXI. Acid and Alcalizjtte fairs with many bodies that abound with Sulphureous or oy ly parts will produce a red, as is manifeft in the Tincture of Sulphur , made with Lixivium* of Calcined Tartar or pot-afhes. XXX II. Laflly it may be worth tryal (fince it hath Succeeded in fome experiments ) fo tat alee away the colour (f a Liquor, at that it maybe colour lefs ; which in what we have tryed, was thus : firft by putting into the Tin- cture, Liquor, or Juice, a quantity of the lolution of pot-alhesor oyl of Tartar per deliqulum j and thenaf- fufingagoodor ftrong folutionof Alom, which in our obfervations precipitated the tinging matter, or gathered it into one body ( like as it were curds) and io left the Liquor tranfparent and clear as Cryfial. CHAP. 184 ' t x Qoljgrdphices. Lik/j. CHAR XXVIII. General Experimental obfertations of Mine- ral Colours. t. Q^Ublimate diflblved in fair Water , a'rtd mixed 13 with a little fpirit of Urine, makes a milk white mixture in a moment : which by addition of Aqua- fortis, immediately again becomes xranfparent. II. If Sublimate two ounces, and Tin-glafs one ounce be fublimed together, yotf will have a fublimate not inferiour to the bell Orient Pearls in the world. I I I. Silver diflblved in Aqua-fortis and evaporated to drynefs, and fair water poured two or three times thereon, and evaporated, till the c&lx is dry, leaves it of a Snow whitenefs : which rubbed upon the jkin, (wetted with fpittle, water or the likej produces a deep blacknefs, not to be obliterated in fome days. With this, Ivory, Hair, and Horns maybe dye din fair water of a laJHn^ black. I V. Coral diflblved by oyl of Vitriol, Sulphur, or fpirit of vinegar, and precipitated by oyl of Tartar, yields a Snow whitenefs. The fame of Crude Lead and Quickfilver diflblved in Aqua-forti*-. So butter of Antimony rectified by bare affuiion in much fair water, will ('though Unctuous)be precipitated into that Snow white powder which (being wafhed from its corrofive falts ) is called Mercurim Viu : the like of which may be made without the addition of any Mercury at all. V. Mercury Sublimate and precipitate yields ( with the fpirit of Urine, Hartfhorn, or the like,) a white pre- cipitatt: but with the folultionofPot-afhes, or other frxtvUtc Cliap. 5t8. Of Mineral Colours, 18* Lixiviate Salts ;an Orange Tawny. And if on a filtrated folution of Vitriol, you put the folution of a fixed fait, there will fubiide a copious fubitance far from white- . nefs, which Chymifts call the Sulphur of Vitriol. V I. If Copper two ounces be mixed with Tin one ounce, the reddifhnefs will vanifh : and if Arfenick ( calcined with Nitre) in a jufl: proportion be mixed with melted Copper, it will be blanched both within and without. VII Fine powders of blew Bice, and yellow Orpi- ment flightly mixed, give a good green : and a high yellow folution of good Gold in Aqua regia, mixed with a due quantity of a deep blew folution of crude Copper in ftrong Spirit of Urine, produces a tranfpa* rent green : And To blew and yellow Amel fuied toge- ther in the flame of a Lamp, being flrongly btowed on without ceafing, produces at length a green colour. VIII. An urinous fait, largely put into the diflblu- tion of blew Vitriol in fair water, turn'd the liquor and corpufcles (which refidedj into a yellowiih colour like yellow Oker. IX. Verdegriefe ground with Salt Armoniack^ and the like ( digefted for a while in a dunghilj makes a glorious blew. X. The true glafs of Antimony extracted with acid fpirits ( with or without Wine ) yields red tin- cture. X I. Balfom of Sulphur ( of a deep red in the glafs ) fhaked about, or dropt on paper gives a yellow ftain. XII. If Brimftone and Sal-Armoniachj.n powder, of each five ounces, be mixed with quick-lime in pow- der fix ounces, and diftilled in a Retort in fand by de- grees ^ you will have a volatil Ipirit of Sulphur of ex- cellent rednefs, though none of the ingredients be fo. Sq dfo oyl of Atffflfeeds mixed with oyl of Vitriol? gives N in i86 tpolygraphices. Lib. J. in a trice a blood red Colour , which foon decays. X I II. Fine Silver diflblved in Aquafortis and preci- pitated with fpirit of Salt •, upon the firft decanting the liquor, the remaining matter will be prely white-, but lying uncovered, what is fubject to the ambient Air will lofe its whitenefs. XIV. Sublimate dilfolved in a quantity of water and filtred, till it is as clear as Cryftal, mixed (in a Ve- nice glafs) with good oyl of Tartar per deliquium fil- tred , ( three of four drops to a fpoonful) yields an opacous liquor or a deep Orange colour \ after which if four or five drops of oyl of Vitriol be drbpt in, and the glafs ftraightway be ftrongly fhaked, the whole li- quor will ( to admiration) be colourlefs without fidi- •ment. And if the filtred folution cAfublimcd Sal-Armo- niac 1 ^ and Sublimate of each alike be mixt with the folution of an Alcali, it will be white. X V. Spirit of Sal-Armcmack^makes the folution of Verdigriefe an excellent Autre •, but it makes thefO- lution of Sublimate yield a white precipitate. XVI. So the folution of filings of Copper in fpirit of Urine (made by fermentation) gives a lovely Autre colour : which with oyl of Vitriol ( a few drops to a fpoonful; is deprived in a trice of the fame, and makes it like fair water. And fo a folution of Verdigriefe in fair water, mixed with ftrong fpirit of Salt , or de- phlegmed Aquafortis, makes the greenels almoit totally to disappear. XVII. Quick-filver mixed with three or four times its weight of good oyl of Vitriol, and the oyl drawn off infand, through a glafs Retort , leaves a Snow white precipitate \ which by afTufion of fair water, becomes one of the lovelieft light yellows in the .world, and a durable colour. XVIIL Tin calcined^/* by firc,affbrds a very white Ghap. 28. Of Mineral Colours! 18^ calx called Putty. Lead, a red powder called Minium: Copper a dark or greyifh powder : Iron a dirty yel- low ifh colour, called Crocus Martii : and Mercury a red powder. XIX. Gold diflblved in Aqua Regia EnnoblesJ the Menflruum with its own colour : Silver Coyn diflblved in Aquafortis yields a tincture like that of Copper \ but fine Silver a kind of faint blewifh- nefs : Copper diflblved in fpirit of Sugar ( drawn; pff* in a glafs Retort) or in oyl or fpirit of Tur- pentine, affords a green tincture •, but in Aquafortis} a blew. XX. Vermilion is made of Mercury and Brimftone fublimed together in a due proportion. XXI. Glafs may have given to it a lovely goldeii colour with Quick-Silver :, but it is now coloured yel- low generally with calx of Silver : yet fheltSilver , (fuch as is ufed with pen or pencil J mixed with a con-, venient proportion of powdered glafs, in three or four hours fufion, .gave a lovely Sapphirine blew. XXII. Glafs is tinged green (. by the Glafs-men ) with the Calx of Venus', which Calx mixed with an hundred times its weight of fair glafs, gave in fufion a blew coloured mafs. , . X X 1 1 1. Putty (which is Tin calcined) as it is white of it felf, fo it turns the purer fort of glafs metal into a white mafs, which when opacous enough, ferves for white AmeL XXIV. This white Ami is as" it were the Balls of all thofe fine Concretes , that Gold-fmiths , and ieveral Artificers ufe, in the curious Art of Enameling? for this white and fufible fubftance , will receive in- to it lelf, without fpoiling them, the colours of di- vers other Mineral fubftances * which like it Will en- dure the fire. Nz XXV.Glar? t88 folygraphices. Lib. 3. XXV. Glafs is alfo tinged blew with the dark mi- neral called Zaffora \ and with Manganefs or Magneffia in a certain proportion, which will tinge glafs of a red colour •, and alfo of a Pnrplilh or Murry •, and with a greater quantity, into that deep colour which pafles for black. XXVI. Yellow Orpiment fublimed with Sea-Salt, yields a white and CryftallineArfenick-, Arfenick co- loured with pure Nitre being duly added to Copper in the fufion, gives it a whitenefs both within and without. X X V 1 1. So Laps Calaminaris turns Copper into Brafs. XXVIII. And Zinkdaly mixed with Copper when *tis in fufion , gives it the noblelt golden colour that was ever feen in the bed gold. XXIX. Copper diftblved in Aquafortis will imbue feveral bodies of the colour of the folution. XXX. Laftly, Gold diilblved in Aqua regia will ( though not commonly known ) dye Horns , Ivories and other Bones of a durable purple colour : And the Cryftals of Silver made with Aquafortis , ( though they appear white ) will prefently dye the Skin-, Natls, Hair* Horn, and Bones, with a Black, not t% be wafbed of CHAP. Chap. 29. Of Metals. j8$f CHAP. XXIX, Of Metals. I. *T*0 harden Quicksilver. J Call your Lead feparated from its drols in- to a veffel, and when it begins to cool, thruftin the point of a ftick, which takeout again and call in the Argent Vive, and it will congeal : then beat it in a mortar,and do fo often-, when it is hard, melt it often and put it into fair water, doing it fo long till it is hard enough, and may be hammered, I I. To tinge Quick: filler of the colour of Gold. Break it into fmall pieces ( being hardnedjwhich put into a Crucible, with the powder ofCadmia, (Iratmifu- perfiratum, mixed with Pomegranate peels, Turmerick fbeaten fine,) and Raifons, cover the Crucible and lute it well,dry it well-,and thenfet it on a fire for fix or fevea hours, that it maybe red-hot •, then blow it with bel- lows till it run, which then let cool whilft covered with coals, and it will have the colour of gold. III. To fix Quicksilver being bar dm d. This is done with fine powder of Cryflal glafs, laid with the Metal ftratum fuper firatum in a Crucible co- vered and luted •, heating it all over red-hot, and then melting of it. I V. To make Quickz,filver malleable. Firft harden it by the firft Section, then break the Metal into fmall pieces, and boil it a quarter of an hour In (harp vinegar : then add a little Sal-Armomack^, and digeft all together for ten or twelve days •, then boil all together in a luted Crucible, till it is red-hot, and by N 3 degrees Ipp Potygraphices. Lib. j. degrees crack : laftly, hang the Mercury in a pot with Brimftone at bottom to cover it •, lute it and fet it in- to the fire , that it may grow hot by degrees, and re- ceive the fume of the Sulphur •, do thus for a month once a day , and the Mercury will run and be hammered. V. Another way of tinging Mercury. Take purified Mercury one ounce, Sulphur two ounces, AcjHa'-fortis three ounces, let them all ftand till the water grow clear •, diftil this with its fediment , and at bottom of the Limbeck you fhall find the Mercury Hard, and of an exact colour. V I. To colour and [often Gold, Diflbhre Verdegriefe in vinegar , and ftrain it through a felt , then congeal, and when it begins to wax thick, put toitfome Sal-Armoniack , and let it harden a good while, then melt gold with it, and it will heighten the colour and make itfoft. VII. To make Gold and Silver f oft er. ' Take Mercury Sublimate, Sal-Armoniack , of each alike, powder them, melt the gold, and put to it a little x>f this powder, and it will be foft. " VIII. Another way to do the fame. Take Vitriol, Verdet, Sal-Armoniack, burnt Brafs, of each half an ounce, mix them with Acjua-fortis , let it io repoie in the heat two days, then let it harden, do thus three times with ' Aqua-fortis, and let it dry \ make it into powder, to one dram put one ounce of gold three times and it will be fofter. I X. Another way to do the fame in Silver. Take Salt-peter, Tartar, Salt, Verdet, boil all to- gether, till the water is comfumed, then put to it U- rine, and let itfo confume, and you Mil have an oyl, which put into melted Silver will do the fame. Or thus, Take As many wedges as yon have melted) fut them Chap. 29. Of Metals. ipi them one night into a crucible in a furnace, but fo as they melt not, and they will be [oft and fair. Or thus, Take honey , oyl , of each alike , in which quench the Gold or Silver three or four times, and it will be fofter. Or thus, Take Maflich, Franl^ncenfe, Myrrh, Borax y Vernix, of each alike all in powder. Or thus, Quench the Gold or Silver in water of Sal- Armoniack, and it will be foft. X. To tinge Silver of a Gold colour. Take fine Gold, fine Silver, good Brafs, and Brafs or Copper calcin'd with Sulphur-vive, of each alike , melt them down together , and it fhall appear to be gold of eighteen carets fine. X I. Another way to tinge Silver. Take Quick-filver purged three ounces , leaf-gold one ounce, mix them and put them into a glafs Retort well luted, put it on the fire till it grow hot , then take it ofiyandadd to it Quick-filver purged two ounces, Sal-Armoniack,o\iQ ounce, Sal Ellebrct half an ounce, Borax two drachms •, then feai up the glafs hermeti- cally, and put it into a continual fire for three dayes*, then take it out, let it cool, open the Retort, take out the matter, and powder it very fine : of which pow- der mix one ounce with filver fine ounces, and it will tinge it into a good gold colour. Note, Sal Ellebrot is thus made. Take pure common Salt, Sal Gem, Sal Alcali in powder, of each one ounce, juice of mints four ounces , fpring water four pound , mingle them , and evaporate. And Quick:fdver is pur- ged by wafting it in (harp Vinegar three or four times and flraining it', or by fubliming it which is betttcr. XII. To bring Silver into a Calx. This is done by amalgamating of it with Quick-fil- ver, and then fubliming of if, or by diflblving it in N 4 , Aqua- Ipl Volygraphices. Lib. j. \Aqua-fortif, and precipitating it with the folution of Salt in fair water, and then wafhing it with warm wa- ter often to free it from the falts : or elfe by mingling the filings with fublimed Mercury, and in a Retort caufing the Mercury to afcend, which will leave at bottom the Calx of Silver, fit for Jewels, &c. XIII. To blanch Silver. Take Sal-Armoniackj Roch-Alom , Alom Plumofum , Sal gem, Argol, Roman-Vitriol, of each alike *, powder and mix them, and difiblve them in fair water , in which boil the Silver folong, till you fee it wonder- ful white. XIV. To colour Silver of a Gold-colour Take Salt-peter two pound , Roch-Alom five pound, mingle, and diftil them, keeping the water for iifc. When you ufe it, melt the Silver, and quench it in the faid water. X V. To tinge Brafs of a Gold colour. Diilblve burnt Brafs in Aquafortis ( made of Vitriol, Salt-peter,Alom, Verdegriefe,and Vermilion)and then reduce it again, and it will be much of a gold colour. XVI. To make Brafs through white. Heat Brafs red-hot, and quench it in water diftilled from Sal-Armoniack, and Egg-fhells ground together, and it well be very white. V UTT «T* J T> r . I • -1 'f Avll. xO~r/>M<£ xnuji wtme oiwrwije* Take Egg-fhells and calcine them in a Crucible, and temper them with the whites of Eggs, let it ftand fo three weeks •, heat the Brafs red-hot , and put this upon it. XVIII. Tomake Brafs. Take Copper three pounds, Lapis Calaminaris one pound in powder, melt them together the fpace of an fiour, then put it out. XIX. The way to colour Brafs white. piflblve Chap. 19. OfMetaU. 19} Diflblve a peny weight of Silver in Aquafortis, put- ting it to the fire in a veffel, till the Silver turn to wa. ter - , to which add as much powder of white Tartar as may drink up all the water, make it into balls, with which rub any Brafs, and it will be white as Silver. X X. To tinge Coffer of a Gold colour. Take Copper, Lapis Calaminaris , of each four drachms , Tutty two drachms •, heat the Copper red-hot twice, quenching it in pils: doing the like by the Lapis and Tutty : take of the diholved Cop- per half an ounce, adding to it Honey one ounce, boil them till the Honey look black and is, dry that it may be powdered, which then beat with the Lapis and Tutty .• boil them again, till the Copper is melted, and it is done. XXI. Another way to make Copper of a Gold colour. Take the Gall of a Goat, Arihick , of each a fuffici- ent quantity, and diftil them -, then the Copper being bright being warned in this water, will turn into the colour oi Gold. XXII. Another way to do the fame. Melt Copper ,to which put a little Zink^ in filings, and the Copper will have a glorious golden colour. XXIII. To make Copper of a white colour. Take Sublimate , Sal-Armoniack , of each alike % boil them in Vinegar, in which quench the Copper being made red-hot •, and it will be like Silver. XXIV. Another way to whiten Copper. Heat it red-hot divers times, and quench it in oy! of Tartar per deliquium, and it will be white. XXV. Another way to whiten Copper. Take Arfnick three ounces, Mercury Snlimate two ounces, Azure one ounce , mix them with good and pure greafe like an ointment, with which anoint any Copper vefTel, then put thatvefTel into another, and fet i?4 folygraphices. Lib. j. fetit into a digeftive heat for two months,after which cleanfe it with a brufh and water, and it is done. XXVI. Another way to whiten Copper. Take Arfnick calcined with Salt-peter, and Mer- cury Sublimate, which call upon melted Copper, and it will be white like Silver. XXVII. To [often Copper. Melt burnt Brafs with Borax in a Crucible, quench it in Linfeed-oyl, and then beat it gently on an Anvil •, boil it again and quench it in oyl as before, doing thus five or fix times, till it is fort enough •, and this will neatly unite with Gold, of which you may put in more by half than you can of other Brafs. XXVIII. To tinge Iron with a Gold colour. Lay in a Crucible plates of Iron and Brimftone , i firatumfitper ftramm, cover and lute it well, and cal- cine in a furnace, then take them out and they will be brittle : put them into a pot with a large mouth, and Jnit in fharp diftilled vinegar, digcfting till they wax r«d over a gentle heat : then decant the vinegar, and add new, thus doing till all the Iron be diflblved i, eva- porate trie moifture in a glafs Retort or Vefica, and caffc the remaining powder on Silver, or other white Me- tal, and it will look like Gold. XXIX. To mahe Iron or Silver of a Brafs colour. Take Flowers of Brafs , Vitriol , Sai-Armomackj of each alike in fine powder •, boil it half an hour in ftrong vinegar, take it from the fire, and put in Iron or Silver, covering the vefTel till it be cold, and the Metal will be like to Brafs, and fit to be gilded: or rub poliftied Iron with Aqua-form in which filings of Brafs is diflblved. XXX. To tinge Iron into a Brafs colour. Melt the Iron in a Crucible cafting upon it Sulphur vhe , then call it into fmall rods, and beat it into pieces ('for Ghap. 29. Of Metals. 195 (for it is very brittle) then in Aqua-fortis dilTolve it, and evaporate the menfirmm, reducing the powder by a ftrong fire into a body again, and it will be good Brafs. XXXI. To whiten Iron. Fir It purge it, by heating it red hot and quenching it in a water made of Ley and Vinegar, boil'd with Salt and Alum, doing this fo often till it is fomewhat whitened. The fragments of the Iron beat in a mor- tar till the Salt is quite changed, and no blacknels is left in the Liquor of it, and till the Iron is cleanled from its drofs: then Amalgamate Lead and Quick* filver together, and reduce them into a powder : lay the prepared plates of Iron and this yowdcrfiratum fugerftratHm in a Ci ucible, cover it, and lute it all over very ftrongly, that the leaft fume may not come forth, and put it into the fire for a day, at length encreafe the fire, lb as it may melt the Iron ( which will quickly be) and repeat this work till it is white enough : It is whitened alfoby melting with Lead, the Marchafit or fire-ftone and Arfnick. If you mix a little Silver ( with which it willingly unites) with it, it gives a wonder- ful whitenefs, fcarcely ever to be changed any more , fcy any art wliatfoever. XXXII. To keep Iron from Rufting. Rub it over with vinegar mixt with Cerufejor with the marrow of a Hart : if it be nifty, oyl of Tartar per deliquium will prefently take it away and cleanfe it. A X X 1 1 1. To cleanfe Brafs. Take Aqua-fortis and water of each alike,fhake them together, and with a woollen rag dipt therein rub it over : then prefently rub it with an oyly cloth ; laftly, with a dry woollen cloth dipt in powder of Lapis Co,- laminaris, it will be clear and bright as when new. XXXIV. To foften Iron. Taice i p 6 Tolygraphices. Lib. j.' Take Alom, Sal- Armoniack, Tartar, of each alike, put them into good Vinegar, and fet them on the fire, heat the Iron, and quench it therein : or quench it four or five times in oyl, in which melted Lead hath been put fix or feven times. XXX V.To make Iron of a Gold colour. Take Alom of Melancy in powder, Sea-water •, mix them: then heat the Iron red-hot, and quench it in the fame. XXXVI. To make Iron of a Silver colour. Take powder of Sal- Armoniack, unflak'd-lime, mix and put them into cold water, then heat the Iron red-hot, quench it therein , and it will be as white as Silver. XXXVII. Tofoftenfieel to grave upon. This is done with a Lixivium of Oak-afhes and un- flak'd-Lime, by cafting the Steel into it, and letting it remain there fourteen days. Or thus, take the Gall of an Ox, man's Urine, Verjuice, and juice of Nettles of each alike, mix them \ then quench Steel red-hot therein four or five times together, and it will become very foft. XXXVIII. To harden Iron or Steel. Quench it fix or feven times in Hogs blood mixed with Goofe-greafe, at each time drying it at the fire before you dip it again, and it will become very hard and not brittle. XXXIX. To folder on Iron. Set the joyntsoflronasclofeas you can, lay them in a glowing fire, and take of Venice-glafs in powder, and the Iron being red-hot, caft the powder thereon, and it will folder of it felf. X L. To counterfeit Silver. Take Cryftal Arfnick eight ounces, Tartar fix oun- ces, Salt-peter two ounces,Glafs one ounce and an half, Sub- Chap. 29. OfUetaU. 197 Sublimate half an ounce : make them feverally into fine powder and mix them : then take three pound of Copper in thin plates which put into a Crucible (with the former powder firammfnper (Iramm) to cal- cine, covering it and luting it ftrongly, letitftand in the Furnace for about eight or ten hours : then take it out, and (being cold) break the pot, and take out all the matter, and melt it with a violent fire,cafting it into fbme mold. Then take purged Brafs two pound, of the former metal one pound •, melt them together, calling in, now and then, fome of the afore- faid powder, after which add half as much of fine Sil- ver melting them together, and you have that which is defired : laftly, to make it as white as Silver, boil it in Tartar. X L I. Another way to counterfeit Silver. Take purified Tin eight ounces, Quick-filver half an ounce, and when it begins to rife in the firft heat , take powder of Cantharides , and caft into it, with a lock, of hair, that it may burn in it \ being melted put into it the powder aforefaid^ then take it fuddenly from the fire, and let it cool. X L 1 1. To purge the Brafs. It is cleanfed or purged, by calling into it when it is melted, broken Glafs , Tartar, Sal-Armoniack and Salt-peter, each of them by turns, by little and little. X L 1 1 1. To tinge Lead of a Gold colonr. Take purged Lead one pound, Sal-Armoniack, in powder, one ounce, Salt-peter half an ounce, Sal-Ele- brottwo drachms ; put all into a Crucible for two days, and it will be throughly tinged. X L I V. To phrge Lead. Melt it at the fire, then quench it in the fharpeft Vi- negar-, melt it again and quench it in the juice of Ce- landine; melt it again and quench it in Salt-water: then I pg utofthe filtrated iblution of Vitriol in fair water 6ne ounce •, then let it cool, and it will be of a gold co- lour. DiiTolve the Vitriol in its equal weight of water. X L V I. To take away the ringing andfoftnefs of Tin. Melt the Tin, and caff in fbme Quick-lilver , re- move if from the fire, and put it into a glafs Retort, with a large round belly, and a very long neck , heat it red-hot in the fire , till the Mercury fublimes and the Tin remains at bottom •, do thus three or four times. The fame may be done by calcining of it three or four times, by which means it willfooner be red-hot than melt. XL VII. To take away the foftnefs and creaking noife of Tin. This is done by granulating of it often, and then reducing it again, and quenching it often in vinegar and a Lixivium of Salt of Tartar. The creaking noife is taken away by melting it ieven or eight leveral times and quenching it in Boys Urine, or elfe oylof Wal- nuts. XL VII I. To take away the deaf found of Tin. This is done by difiblving it in Aqua-fortis over a gentle fire, till the water fry away : doing thus fo long till it is all turned to a calx *, which mixed with calx of Silver, and reduced, performs the work, X L I X. To maki that Tin crackjm. Take Chap. 29. Of Metals. 199 Take Salt, Hony, of each alike, and mix them : melt your Tin and put it twelve or more times into it, then (train out the Tin, and it will purge and leave cracking*, putitintoa Crucible, which lute, and cal- cine it four and twenty hours, and it will be like calx of Gold. L. To take away the brittlenefs of any Metal. Firft calcine it and put it under dung, then do thus; when it is red-hot at the fire, or melted, quench it of- ten in Ae\ua vita often diftilled •, or ufe abont them Rofin or Turpentine, or the oyl of it, or wax, fuet, Euphorbium, Myrrh, artificial Borax 5 for if a metal be not malleable , unctuous bodies will oftentimes make them fofter, if all thefe, or fome of thefe be made up with fome moifture into little cakes : and when the metai yields to the fire, by blowing with the bellows, we caft in fome of them and make them thick like mud , or clear, then fet the Metai to the fire, that it may be red-hot in burning coals, take it forth and quench it in them, and fo let it remain half an hour to drink in. Or anoint the Metal with Dogs greafe, and melt it with it, for that will take away much of the brittlenefs of it, and make it fo that it maybe hamme- red and wrought. L I. To colour Atetal like Gold. Take Sal-Armoniack , White Vitriol, Stone- fait , Verdegriefe,of each alike, in fine powder •, lay it upon the Metal, then put it into the fire for an hour, take it out and quench it in Urine, and the Metal will have the colour of Gold. LI I. To make a kyid of Counterfeited Siver of Tin. This is done by mingling Silver with Tin melted with Quick-filver, continuing it long in the fire, then being brittle, it is made tough, by keeping it in a gen- tle 2oo (Polygraphias. Lib j« tie fire or under hot embers ( in a Crucible) for about twenty four hours. L I 1 1. To [older upon Silver, Brafs or Iron. Take Silver five peny weight, Brafs four peny weighty melt them together for foft Solder, which runsfoonefi. Take Silver five feny weight, Copper three peny weighty welt them together for hard Solder. Beat the Solder thin and lay it over the place to be Soldred, which mull be firft fitted, and bound toge. ther with Wire as occafion requires : then take Borax in powder, and temper it like pap, and lay it upon the Solder getting it dry, then cover it with quick coals and blow, and it will run immediately •, then take it prefently out of the fire, and it is done. Not e , i. If a thing is to be Soldred in two places , ( which cannot be well done at one time ) yon mtifi frfi Solder with the hard Solder , and then with the foft *, for if it be firfi done with the foft, it will unf older again before the other be Soldred. 2. That if yon would not have your Solder run about the piece to be Soldred, rub thofe places over wkh Chalky L I V. To make the Silver Tree of the Philofophers. Take Aqua-fortis four ounces, fine Silver one ounce, which diilblve in it : then take Aqua-foris two ounces , in which diffolve Quick-Silver : mix thefe two Liquors together in a clear glafs, with a pint of pure water j ftop the glafs clofe, and after a day, you fnaii fee a *Tree togrow by little and little,which is wonderful and pleafant to behold. L V. To make the Golden Tree of the Philofophers. Takeoyl of Sand or Flints, oylof Tartar pe r deli- quiumy of each alike, mix them well together , then diilblve Sol in Aqua Regit, and evaporate the men- ftruum , dry the Calx by the fire , but make it not too hot ( for then it will lofe ks growing qva- lity) Chap. 29. Of Metals. aoi lity ) break it into little bits ( not into pdwder ) which bits put into the aforefaid liquor, a fingers breadth one from another in a very clear glafs, keep the liquor from the Air* and let the Calx ftand ftill, and the bits of Calx will prefentiy begin to grow : firft fwell j then put forth one or two Items *, then diver9 branches and twigs, fo exactly, as you cannot but won- der to fee. Where note , that this growing it not imaginary but real. LVL To make the Steel Tree of the Philofophers. Diflblve Steel in rc&ified fpirit or oyl of Salt, fO fhall you have a green and fweet folution, imelling like Brimftonc •, filter it, and abftrael; all the moiiture with a gentle heat* and there will diftil over a liquor, as fweet as rain water (for Steel by reafonofits dry- nefs detains the Corrolivenefs of the fpirit of Salt, which remaineth in the bottom, like a blood-red mafs, and it U as hot on the tongue as fire : ) diifolve this blood-red mafs in oyl of Flints or Sand, and you fhall fee it grow up in two or three hours like a Tree with Item and branches. Jf yon prove this Tree at the tejk, it will yield good Geld, which it drawethfrom the oyl of Sand or Flints j the faid oyl being f nil of apnre golden Sulphur. LVII. To make oyl of Flints or Sand, Take of molt pure Salt of Tartar in fine powder twenty ounces, fmall Sand, Flints, Pebbles, or Cry- Itals in fine powder five ounces, mix them •, put as much of this as will fill an Egg-fhell into a Crucible, fet it in a Furnace, and make it red-hot, andprtfent- ly there will come over a thick and white fpirit, take out the Crucible whileft it is hot, and that which is in it, like tranfparent glafs, keep from the Air •, after beat it to powder, and lay it in a moift place, and it will O duTolre 102 tyolygrafbkes. Lib. j. diflblve into a thick, fat oyl, which is the oyl of Flints, Sand, Pebbles or Cryftals. This oyl precipitateth Me- tals , and makes the Calx there more heavy than oyl of Tartar doth ; it is of a golden nature, and extracts colours from all Minerals; it infixed in all fires, maketh fine Cryfials, and Borax, and maturateth imperfect: Metals in- to Gold. LV1II. To melt Metals quickly. Take a Crucible, and make in it a lay or courfe of the powder of any M«tal, then lay upon it a lay of Sul- phur, Salt-peter and Saw-duft, of each alike mixed together, put a coal of fire to it, and the Metal will immediately be in a mafs. L1X. Laftly, He that mail obferve the work and reafon of the Silver, Golden and Steel Trees, may in like manner produce the like out of the Calx of other Metals. CHAP. XXX. Of the Inftrments and Materials of Cafting* I. TTE that would learn to call mull be provided X X of aii the chief 1 ools thereto belonging, which are i. ATrough. 2. Sand. 3. A Flasks 4. Skrevc. 5. Tri- poli. 6. The Medal or Form. 7. A Furnace. 8. Crucibles. 9. A Pipe. 10. Tongs. 1 i.Two Oal^Platcs. 1 2. Pledgets of wool. 13. Oyl andTurpentine. 14. A Hares Foot. 15. Bruges. U.TheTroHgh is a four-fquare thing about half afoot deep, or fomething more •, and its ufe is to hold the Sand. III. Of Chap. JO. Materials for Cajting. 26 j III. Of Sand there is various forts, the chief are High-gate Sand, and Tripoli; the which to make fit for the work you muft order thus : If it is High-gate Sand, you muft finely fift it } if Tri- poli^ you muft firft beat it fine, then fift it through a find Sieve : to either of thefe fine Sands you muft put of pure fine Bole ( an ounce to nine ounces ) well beaten j diffolved in water, and laftly reduced into fine pow- der ', which powders you muft moderately moiften with this Magiftcrial water * viz. filtrated Brine made of decrepitated common Salt : or the fame, mixed with glair of Eggs > IV. TheFWjsapair of Oval Irons, containing oip *y fides to hold the Sand* which muft be prefled hard thereinto : and a paifage or mouth for the Metal to run in at. V. The Skrew is an Iron Prefs, between which the Flask is put and preft , after that it is filled with Sand, and hath received the form or impreflion to b« caft. VI. Tripoli is that of which the fecond fort of Sand is made, which here ought to be calcined and beaten into impalpable powder, to ftrew over the fandy moulds ; firft that the fides of the Flask may not cleave together when they are full } fecondly that the thing caft may have the perfect form and impreffion, with- out the leaft fcratch or blemifh imaginable. VII. The Medal or Form, is that which is to be iro- prefledupon the Sand, whofe likenefswe would imi- tate. VIII. The Furnace is that which contains the. fire* where the Crucible is put, for the Metal to melt in p which is generally melted with Charcoal. IX. The Crucibles are calcining or melting pots, ( commonly three-fquare ) made fo as they may en- O 2 durtf 2 o 4 tpolygraphkes. Lib. j. dure the fire all over, in which the Metal is to be mel- ted. X. The Pipe is a hollow Reed, or piece of Tin, to blow coals and filth out of the Crucible. XI. The Tongs arc a crooked Inftrument to take coals out of the Crucible with, as alfo to ftir and repair the fire •, and to take the pot out of the Furnace when you go to Caft. XII. The two Oahjplates are to be fmooth, and to be put between the Flask and the fides of the Skrew, on each fide. XIII. Pledgets of wool ate to be put between the Oak plates and the Sand, to fill up empty Ipaces if there be any. XIV. The Oyl and Turpentine is to wet fome paper or cotton threads, which mutt be feton fire, to fmoak the Impreflion or Mould ( being dry ) that the Metal may run the better. XV. The Hares-foot is to wipe the hollow places in the Mould, if they mould be too much filled with fmoak. XVI. The Bmjhes ought to be two, to wit, one with thick bar Wire fixings, another with Hogs-briftles, wherewith the work (both before and after catting ) ought to be rubbed and cleanfed. CHAP. Ch. 3t. The manner ofCafling. 20 j CHAP. XXXI. The way and manner ofCafting. I. TT7 Afh the Medal in Vinegar, in which put fbme VV Salt and Straw-afhes •, and rub it well with the aforefaid hair-brufti , thenwalh it with water, and dry it well. II. Place the female part of the Flask upon one of the Oak plates ^ fo that the middle part, viz.. that which is joyned to the other, may lie downwards. III. Then put the cleanfed Medal in the Flask upon the Oak plate, in a right line to the mouth of the Flask : and if there be two, let them be placed fo, that there may be a place left in the middle for the melted Metal to run in at. IV. Then take of the aforefaid earth or fand prepa- red, ( that is, fo much moiftened with the Mngifterial water, that being crufhed between the hands or fin- gers, it will not ftick but like dry flour , and will ftand with the print of the hand clofed together) and prefs it on well in the Flask upon the Medal with the ilemy part of your fingers or hand •, then with a rule ftrike off all the fuperfluous fand that fticks about the Flask. V. This done, the pledgets of wool, or a woollen cloth, muft be laid upon it, and then the other Oak plate, and then turned up with both hands, the plates being both held dole. VI. Then taking off the upper plate •, put upon it the male part of the Flask, which fill with fand in like manner (the Medal being now between ) prefling it O 3 down %o6 Polygraphices. Lib. y down as beforehand then vvitb a ruler linking away the fuperfmousfand. VII. Upon which lay a woollen cloth, and gently lift off the top, or upper part of the Flask, fo that the medal may be taken forth. VIII. All things being thus done with a knife (or fome fuch like ) cut the palfage for the Metal, which let be a little dry'd : then, IX. Either ftrew over the fide of the impreffion ( now taken off) with a calcined Tripoli ground im- palpable •, applying it upon the female Flask again •, £urn the female Flask uppermoft, which take off, and ftrew it in like manner, with the calcined Tripoli, and putting them together again, prefs them fo hard, as (hat the fine Tripoli may receive the moll perfect im- preffion of the Medal, which then take out, by fepara- ping the fides of the Flask, and gently {baking that part which holds it, till it falls out. X; Or with Cotton wet in Oyl and Turpentine and fet on fire let the impreffion be fmoaked *, and if any fupcrfluous fume be taken, wipe it offwith a Hares- foot. XI. Then joyn the fides of the Flask together, put- ting them with the woollen cloaths between the Oaken plates, which put into the Prefs, and skrew them a little. XII. Then the Metal being melted, put it into the mould being hot, which if it be Silver, or blanched Brafs, or Copper, it will run well enough. XIII. But if it runs not well, you may caft in about the hundredth part of Mercury fublimate,and an eighth part of Antimony •, for fo it will not only run well, but alfo be a harder Metal. XIV 7 . Laftly, the Medal being cooled, take it neatly mt and keep jr. Where Ch. 3 1. Glafs and Precious Stones. 1 07 Where note, I . That fo long as the Impreffion or Mould is not f polled, yonmayftill cafl more Medals therein ; but when tt decays, you mufi perfectly renew the whole work, as at firft. 2. That you may blanch them with a pure whitenefs by the ninth SeClion of the nine and twentieth Chapter of this Bookj- or thus, if 'they be of whitened Brafs, Take Sal-Armoniack^one ounce and an half, Salt-peter two ounces and an half, Leaf-ftlver twenty four grains \ mix them and evaporate them in a luted Crucible, having a hole in the cover, till all the moifiure is gone'-, being cold beat all into fine powder ; of which take one ounce, Salty Mom, Tartar, of each one handful, fair water a fufficient quantity ; mix and boil all in a glared vefftl, in which put the Medals boiling them till they are purely white : then rub them with the Tartar in the bottom very well, waft) them in fair water and dry them. 3. That if the Medals be of Gold, er of a golden colour, you may heighten it with Verdt* griefe andVrine. CHAP. XXXII. OfGUfs and Preciom Stones, I. npO me/t Cryfial. X Beat Cryftal to bits, and put them into an Iron fpoon, cover it and lute it wefl, and heat it in the fire till it is red-hot, which quench in oyl of Tartar : this do To often, till they will ealily beat to powder in a mortar, which will then eafily melt. This is ofufe to counterfeit Jewels with. II. To make a Cement for broken Glaffes. Glair of Eggs mixed with Quick-lime will joyn broken pieces of glafs together, and all earthen-pots, lb O 4 as *o8 Polygraphias. Lib. j. as that they (hall never be broken in the lame place a- gain. Or thus, Take old liquid Varnifh, and joyn the pieces therewith •, bind them together, and dry them well in the Sun or in an Oven, and they will never unglew again : but put no hot liquor into them then. Or thus, Take White-lead, Red-lead, Quick-lime, Gum-fandrack, of each one ounce, mix all with glair pf eight Eggs. Or thus, Take White-lead, bole, liquid varnilh as much as fufficeth. Or this, Take White-lead, Lime, glair of Eggs as much as fufficeth. Or thus, Take fine powder of glafs, Quick-lime, liquid varnifh, of each a fufficient quantity. Or thus, Take Quick-lime powdered, liquid var- nifh, glair of Eggs, of each alike: grind them upon a flone : this is a ftrong glew even for ftones. Or thus, Take calcined flints and Egg-fhellsofeach alike, and with whites of Eggs and Gum-tragacanth, or diifolution of Gum-fandrack make glew, this in few days will be as hard as ftone. Or thus, T?ke calcined flints two pound, Quick- lime four pound, Linfeed-oyl fo much as may temper the mixture, this is wonderful ftrong •, but with liquid yarniih it would be ftronger. Or thus, Take Fifh glew, and beat it thin, then foak it in water till it is like pafte, make rouls there- of which draw out thin : when you me it, diflblve it in fair water over the fire, letting it feetha while and fcumming of it, and whileft it is hot ufe it. This not only cements glafs, but Tortoife-lhell and all other things. III. To make Glafs green. Green glafs is made of Fern allies, becaufeit hath much Ch. jz. Glafs and Precious Stones. 209 much of an Alkaly Salt. Cryftal or Venice-Glafs is tinged green with Ore of Copper-, or with the Calx of Copper five or fix grains to an ounce. IV. To counterfeit a Diamond. Take a faphvre of a faint colour,put it into the mid* die of a Crucible in Quick- lime, and ptit it into a gen- tle fire, and heat it by degrees till it is red-hot, keep it fo for fix or feven hours ^ let it ftand in the Crucible till it is cold, (left taking it out not it Ihould break) fo will it lofe all its colour, and be perfectly like a Dia- mond, fo that no file will touch it : if the colour is not all vanifiied at the firft heating, you muft heat it again till it is perfect. V. To prepare the Salts for counterfeit Gems. The Salts ufed in making counterfeit Gems , arc chiefly two, the firft is made of the Herb Kali \ the fe- cond of Tartar-, their preparations are according to the ufual way (but in Glafs veflels.) VI. To prepare the matter of which Gems are made. The matter is either Cryftal or Flint that is clear and white : put them into a Crucible in a reverbera- tory heat (the Crucible being covered) then take them out and call them into cold water, fo will they crack andeafily reduce to powder : of which powder take an equal quantity with Salt of Tartar (or Sal Alkali) to which mixture add what colour you pleafe, which muft be either Metalline or Mineral: putthem into a very iTrong Crucible (filling it about half full) cover it clofe, and melt all in a ftrong fire till it becomes like glafs, Where note, in melting you muft put an Iron rod int» it^and take up fome of it, and if it is jree from bubble s y gratns f orfpecks, it is j 'ufed enough: if not, youmuftfufeit till it U free. VII. To make a counterfeit Diamond of Cnftal. Put HO Volygraphkes. Lib. J. Put Cryftal in a Crucible andfet it in a Glafs Fur- nace all night, and then bring it to fine powder, mix it with equal parts of Sal Tartaric digeft all night in a vehement heat, but yet not to melt, then take them out, and put them into another veltel which will ftoutly endure the fire-,let them Hand melted two days and taKe out the mafs. VI II. To make a Chalcedon. Mingle with the powder of Cryftal, a little calcined Silver, and let it ftand in fufion twenty four hours. IX. To make counterfeit V earls. Mix Calx of Luna and Egg-ftiells with Leaf filver ground with our bell varnifh, of which make pafte,and having bored them with a Hogs brittle, dry them in the Sun, or an Oven. X. To counterfeit a Ruby. Take Sal-Alkaly four ounces, Cryftal three ounces, Scales of Brafs half an ounce, Leaf-gold fix grains, mix all, and melt them in a Reverberatory. XI. To counterfeit a Carbuncle. Mix Cryftal with a little Red-lead, putting it into a Furnace for twenty four hours, then take it out, powder and fearce it, to which add a little calcined Brafs - 7 melt all again, and add a fmall quantity of Leaf-gold, ftirring it well three or four hours, and in a day and night it will be dose. XII. An Artificial Amethyft. Take Cryftal one pound, Manganefs one drachm, mix and melt them. Or thus, Take Sal Alkaly three ounces, powder of Cryftal four ounces, filings of Brafs half an ounce, melt all w a ftrong fire. XIII. An Artificial Jacynth. Put Lead into a ftrong Crucible, and fet it into a Furnace, let it ftand there about fix weeks till it is like glafs, Ch. p. Glafs and freclous Stones. 2 1 1 glafs, and it will have the natural colour of a Jacynth not eanly to be difcerned. XIV. An Artificial 'Chryfolite. Mix with melted Cryftal a fixth part of fcales of Iron, letting it ftand in a vehement fire for three days. Or thus-, to the mixture of the Topa&e add a little Cop- per. XV. An Artificial Topaz.e. To Cryftal one pound, add Crocus Martis two drachms, Red-lead three ounces, firft putting in the Lead, then the Crocus. XVI. Artificial Corals. Take the fcrapings of Goats horns, beat them to- gether, and infufe them in a ftrong Lixivium made of Salfraxini for five days : then take it out and mingle it with Cinnaberdidblved in water •, fet it to a gentle fire that it may grow thick-, make it into what form you pleale, dry, andpoliihit. Or thus, TdkzMinii one ounce , Vermilion ground fine half an ounce , Quick-lime, and powder of calcined Flints, ofeachfix ounces, a Lixivium of Quick-lime and Wine, enough to make it thick : add a little Salt, then make it into what form you pleafe, and boil it in Linfeed-oyl. XVII. An Artificial Emerald. Take Brafs (three days) calcined in powder, which put again into the Furnace with oyl and a weaker fire •, let it ftay there four days, adding a double quan- tity of fine fand or powder of Cryftal : after it is fome- thing hard, keep it at a more gentle fire for twelve hours, and it will be a lovely, pleafant and glorious green. Or thus. Take fine Cryftal two ounces and an half, Sal Alkaly two ounces, flosaris iniufed in Vine- gar and ftrain'd one ounce, Sal Tartari one ounce and a half , mix and lute them into a crucible, and put all in- to a Glafs-makers furnace for twenty four hours, and it will 212 VolygraphicM. Lib. J. will be glorious indeed. Or thus, Take Cryftal ten ounces, Crocus Mart is, and Brafs twice calcined, of each one pound , mix and melt them, ftirring them well with an Iron rod. XVIII. An Artificial Saphire. To melt Cryftal put a little Zaphora (two drachms to a pound of Cryftal ) then ftir it continually from top to bottom with an Iron hook, till it is well mixed, keep it in the Furnace three days and it is done : yet when it is well coloured, unlefs it be prefently remo- ved from the fire, it willlofe its tincture again. XIX. Artificial Amber. Boil Turpentine in an earthen pot,with a little cotton (fome add a little oyljftirring it till it is asthick as pafte, then put it into what you will, and fet it in the Sun eight days,and it will be clear and hard, ofwhichyoumay make beads, hafts for knives, and the like. XX. Another way to counterfeit Anther. Take fixteen yolks of Eggs, beat them well with a fpoon -j Gum- Arabick two ounces, Cherry-tree Gum an ounce, make the Gums into Powder, and mix them well with the yolks of Eggs \ let the Gums melt well, and put them into a pot well leaded, then fet them fix days in the Sun, and they will be hard, and fhine like glafs •, and when you rub them, they will take up a .. .ivnt-iua", CO «->tnci ninDci UULU. XXI. To make yellow Amber [oft. Put yellow Amber into hot melted wax well fcum'd and it will be foft, fo that you may make things thereof in what form and fafhion you pleafe. XXII. Another Artificial Amber. Take whites of Eggs well beaten, put them into a veflel with ftrong white-wine Vinegar,ftop itclofe, let itftand fourteen daysmen dry it in the (hade,anl it will be like to Amber. XXIII. Ami Chap. J i. Glafs and frecious Stones. i \ j XXXIII. Another Artificial Amber. Break whites of Eggs with a ipunge, take off the froth, to the reft put Saffron, put all into a glafs dole flopped, or into a Copper or brazen veflel, let it boil in a "kettle of water, till it be hard •, then take it out andfhape it to your liking,lay it in the Sun and anoint it often with Linfecd-oyl mixed with a little Saffron \ or elfe being taken out of the Kettle,boil it in Lwfeed- oyl. XXIV. To make white 'Enamel. Take Calx of Lead two ounces, Calx of Tin four ounces, make it into a body with Cryftal twelve oun- ces, roll it into round balls, andfet it on a gentiefire for a night, ftirring it about with an Iron rod, till it is melted, and it is done. XXV. The general preparations and proportions of Mine- ral colours. Plates of Copper muftbe made red-hot, and then quenched in cold water *, of which five or fix grains mixed with Cryftal and Sal Tartari of each half an ounce, and melted, will colour a Sea-green. Iron muft- be made into a Crocus in a reverberatory fire •, of which eight or ten grains will tinge the faid ounce of mix- ture in a Yellow or Hyacinth colour. Silver is to be diflblved m Aqna-fortis, and precipitated withoyl of Flints, then dulcifyed with water and dry'd ; of this five or fix grains to an ounce, gives a mixed colour. Cold mull be diflblved in Aqua Regis, and precipitated with liquor of Flints, then fweetned and dry'd -, of which five or fix grains to one ounce gives a glorious Saphirine colour. Cold melted with Regains Manis vitrofta five or fix grains to one ounce, gives an in- comparable Rubine colour. Magnefia in powder on- ly ten or twelve grains to one ounce, makes an Ame- thyft colour. Grama in powder only ten or fifteen grains 114. (Polygraphices. Lib. J. grains to one ounce, will tinge the raafs into a glorious Smaragdine colour, not unlike to the natural. XXVI. Laftly, Common Copper makes a Sea-green : Copper of Iron a Grafs-green : Granats, a Smaragdine : Iron, Tellovc or Hyacinth : Silver, White, Tellow, Green, and Granat : Gol^ a fair Skje colour : Wtfhlut, a com- won Blue: Magnefia, an Amethy ft colour : Copper and Silver, an Amethyft colour : Copper and Iron, a pale yreen : Wifmut and Magnefia, a purple colour : Silver and Magnefia, an Opal, and the Ukc. XXVII. To make Aaure . Take Sal-Armoniack three ounces, Verdegriefe fix ounces, make them into powder, and put them in- to a glafs with water of Tartar, Co that it may be fomewhat thick, ftop the glafs and digeft in land in Horfe-dung for eight or ten days, and it will be good Azure. XXVIII. Another vpay to make good beyond Sea A- mtre. Beat common Azure with Vinegar , and anoint therewith thin plates of Silver, and put the fame over a veilel full of Urine, which fet over hot aihes and coals, moving and ftirring it till it looks like good Azure. CHAP. Chap. 33 • The manner of Gilding. 1 1 j CHAP. XXXIII. The ways and manner of Gilding. I. m TT m O lay Gold on any thing. 1 Take Red-lead ground fine, temper it with Linfeed-oyl : write with it and lay Leaf-gold on it, let it dry, andpolifhit. II. TolajGoldonGlafs. Take Chalk and Red-lead, of each alike, grind them together, and temper them with Linfeed-oyl : lay it on, and whenitisalraoit dry, lay Leaf-gold on if; kt it dry, thenpolilh it. III. To gild Iron with a water. Take fpring water three pound, Roch-Alom three ounces, Roman Vitriol, Orpiment, one ounce, Verde- griefe twenty four grains, Sal-gem three ounces, boil all together, and when it begins to boil, put in Tartar andBay-falt, of each half an ounce; continue the boil- ing a good while, then take it from the fire, ftrike the Iron over therewith, dry itagainftthe fire, and burnilhit. IV. To lay Gold on Iron, or other Metals. Take liquid Varnifh one pound, oylof Linleed and Turpentine, of each one ounce •, mix them well toge- ther.- ftrike this over any Metal, and afterwards lay on the Gold or Silver, and when it is dry polifh it. IV. To Gild Silver, or Brafs with Gold water. Take Quick-filver two ounces, put it on the fire in a Crucible, and when it begins to fmoak, put into it an Angel of fine Gold ; then take it off immediately, for the Gold will be prefently diffolved : then if it be too ii 6 tpolygraftim, Lib. J. too thin, ftrain a part of the Qufck-fdver from it, through a piece of Fuftian : this done, rub the Gold and Quick-filver upon Brafs or Silver , and it will cleave unto it, then put the faid Brafs or Silver upon quick coals till it begin to fmoak, then take it from the lire, and fcratch it with a hair brufh •, this do fo long till all the Mercury is rubbed as clean ofFas may be, and the Gold appear of a faint yellow : which colour heigh- ten with Sal-Armoniack, Bole and Verdegriefe ground together and tempered with water. Where note, that before yon gild your Metal, you muft boil it with Tartar in Beer or water, then fcratch it with a wire brufh. VI. Another water to gild Iron, Steel, Knhes, Swords and Armour with. Take Fire-ftone in powder, put it into ftrong fed Wine-vinegar for twenty four hours, boil it in a gla- zed pot,adding more Vinegar as it evaporates, or boils away : into this water dip your Iron, Steel, &c. and it will be black •, dry it, then polifh it, and you will have a gold colour underneath. VII . Another water to gild Iron with. Take Salt-peter, Roch-alom burnt, of each half an ounce, Sal- Armoniack an ounce, all being ifl fine pow- der, boil with ftrong Vinegar in a Copper vellel •, with which wet the Iron, &c. then lay on Leaf-gold. VIII. Another water to gild Iron with. Take Roch-Alom, and grind it with boys Urine, till it is well duTolved,with which anoint theIron,heat it red-hot in a fire of wood coals,and it will be like Gold. IX. To gild Bookj '■ Take Bole-Armoniack four peny weight, Sugar- candy one peny weight, mix and grind them with glair of Eggs , then on a bound Book, ( while in the prefs, after it hath been fmeared with glair of Eggs, and Chap. }j. Of Gilding. it£ andisdryed) fmear the faid comppfition, let it dry, then rtb it well and polifh it : then with fair water wet the edges of the Book, and fuddenly lay on the gold, prefling it down with Cotton gently, this done, let it dry, and then polifh it exactly with a tooth. X. Another way of gilding Iron. Take water three pound, Alom two ounces, Sal-gem three ounces, Roman Vitriol, Orpiment of each one ounce, flos t^Sris twenty four grains •, boil all with Tartar and Salt as at the third Section. XI. To make Iron of the colour of G old. Take Linfeed-oy 1 three ounces, Tartar two ounces, yolks of Eggs boiled hard and beaten two ounces, Aloes half an ounce,Saffron five grains, Turmerick two grains : boil all in an Earthen veffel, and with the oyl anoint Iron, and it will look like Gold. If there be not Linfeed-oy i enongh r yon may put in more. XII. A Golden liquor to colour Iron, Wood, Glafs^ or Bones with. Take a new laid Egg,throughaholeat one end take out the white, and fill up the Egg with Quick-filver two parts, Sal-armoniack finely powdered one part •, mix them all together with a Wire or little flick : flop the hole with melted wax, over which put an half £gg- fhell : digelt in horfe-dung for a month, and it will b© a fine golden coloured Liquor. XIII. To gild Silkjtnd Linnen. Take GleW made of Parchment, lay it on the Lin- nen, or Silk, &c. gently, that it may not fink : then take Cerufe, Bole and Verdegriefe, of each alike, mix and grind them upon a ftone : then in a glazed veilel mix it with varnifh , which let fimper over a fmall fire, then keep it for ufe. XIV. Another of a pure Gold colour. Take juyce of frefh Saffron, or (for want of it) P Saffron 218 (polygrapbices. Lib. 5. Saffron ground, the belt clear Orpiment of each alike : grind them with Goats gall or gall of a Pike ( which is better ) digeft twenty eight days in horfe-dung, and it is done. XV. To gild on wood or ft one. Take Bolc-Armoniack,OylBen, ofeachafufficient quantity •, beat and grind them together : with this i mear the wood or ftone, and when it is almoft dry,lay on the Leaf gold, let it dry, then polilh it. XVI. To gild mth Leaf gold. Take leaves of gold , and grind them with a few drops of honey, to which add a little gum- water, and it will be excellent to write or paint with. XVII. To gild Iron or Steel. Take Tartar one ounce , Vermilion three ounces, Bole-Armoniack , Aqua-vita of each two ounces , grind them together with Linfeed-oyl, and put there- to Lapis Calaminaris the quantity of a hade-nut j and grind therewith in the end a few drops of varniih j take it off the ftone, ftrain it 'through a linnen cloth ( for it mutt be as thick as honey ) then ftrike it over Iron or Steel, and let it dry *, then lay on your Silver or Gold, and burnifh it. XVIII. To colour Tin or Copper of a gold colour. Take Linfeed-oyl, let it on the lire, fcum it, then put in Amber. Aloes I Iepatick, of each alike, ftirthem well together till it wax thick •, then take it oft] cover it clofc, and fet it in the earth three days: when you nfe it, ftrike the Metal all over with it, with a pencil, let it dry, and it will be of a golden colour. XIX. To gild any Metal. Take fconz. Aquafortis, in which diflblve fine Sil- ver, to which put fo much Tartar in fine powder, as will make it into pafte, with which rub any Metal, and it will look like fine Silver. XX. To Chap. 34. Of Taper ytParcbment, &tc. 119 XX. To gild fo as it jhall not out with any water. Take Oker calcined , Pumice-ftone of each alike, Tartar a little, beat them with Linfeed oyl, and five or fix drops of varnifh , ftrain all through a linnen cloth, with which you may gild. CHAP. XXXIV. Of Paper p Parchment^ and Leather; h T^O make Paper waved like Marble. A Take divers oyled colours, put them feve- rally in drops upon water, and ftir the water lightly i then wet the Paper ( being of fome thicknefs) with it) and it will be waved like Marble-, dry it in the Sun. II. To write golden Letters on Paper or Parchment. This may be done by the ninth, tenth and twelfth Sections of the three and thirtieth Chapter of this Book : or write with Vermilion ground with Gum- Armoniack, ground with glair of Eggs, and it will be like gold. III. To take ont blots, or make blacky Letters vanijl} in Paper or Parchment. This may be done with Alom- water •, or with jiqna-fottis mixed with common-water. IV. To make Silver Letters in Paper or Parchment. Take Tin one ounce, Quick-filver two ounces, mix and melt them, and grind them with Gum water. V. To write with green Inkt, Take Verdegriefe, Litharge, Quick-filver , of each a fufflcient quantity , grind and mingle them with Urine, and it will be a glorious green like an Emerald to write or paint with; Pa Or no tPolygraphkes. Lib. 3. Or thus. Grind juyce of Rue and Verdegricfe with a little Saffron together •, and when you would write with it mix it with Gum- water : Or thus, Diflblve Verdegriefe in Vinegar, ftrain it, then grind it with common water, and a little honey, dry it •, then grind it again with gum-water, and it is done. VI. To write on Paper or Parchment with blew Ink. Grind blew with honey, then temper it with glair of Eggs or Gum- water made of Ifinglafs. VII. To dye Shins Blew. Take berries of Elder or Dwarf-elder, firft boil them, then fmear and wafli the Skins therewith, and wring them forth : then boil the berries as before, in the diflblution of Alom-water, and wet the Skins in the fame water once or twice, dry them and they will be very Blew. VI II. To dye Skins into a reddijli Colour. Firfc wafh the Skin in water and w 7 ring it well : then wet it with the folution of Tartar and Bay-falt in fair water, and wring it again : to the former diflb- lution, add afhes of Crab-fhells, and rub the Skin very well therewith , then wafh with common w r ater and wring them out : then wafli them with tincture of Madder , in the folution of Tartar , Alom and the aforefaid afhes \ and after f if not red enough) with the tindure of Brazil. IX. jinether way to dye them Red. Wafli the Skins,and lay them in galls for two hours •, wring them out, and dip them into a colour made with Ligptftrum, Alom and Verdegriefe in water: LafL Jy, twice dye them with Brazil boiled with Lye. X. Anpther way to dye them Blew. Take the bell: Indico and deep it in Urine a day, then boil it with Alom, and it will be good. 0,temper the !ndico with red Wine , and waih the Skins there* , ith XL To Chap. 34. Of Paper, Qarchmeht, Sec. m XL To dye Skins Purple. Take Roch-alom, diflblve it in warm water, wet the Skins therewith drying them again 9 then take rafped Brazil, boil it in water wel), then let it cool •, da thus thrice : this done, rub the dye over the Skins with your hand, which being dry polifh. X II. To dye Skws of a fad Green. Take the filings of Iron and Sal-armoniack of each, fteepthemin Urine till they befoft, with which be- fmear the Skin, being ftretched out, drying it in the ihade : the colour will penetrate and be green on both fides. XIII. To dye Skins of a pure Sk[e Colour. For each Skin take Indico an ounce, put it into boil- ing water, let it Rand one night, then warm it a little, and with a brufh-pencil befinear the Skin twice over. XIV. To dye Skins of a pure Yellow. Take fine Aloes one ounce, Linfeed-oyltwo pound, difiblve or melt them, then ftrain it •, befmearing the Skins therewith, being dry, varnifh them over. XV. To dye Sl>ins Green. Take Sap-green, Alom-water, of each a fufiicient quantity, mix and boil them a little : if you would have the colour darker, add a little Indico. XVI. To dye Skins Yellow. Infule Wold in Vinegar , in which boil a little Alom : Or thus, having dyed them green by the fif- teenth Section, dip them in decoction of Privet-berries and Saffron and Alom-water. XVII. To dye them of an Orange Colour. Boil Fuftick-berries in Alom-water : but for a deep Orange, ufe Turmerick-root. XVIII. A Liquor to gild Skins, Metals, orGlafs. Take Linfecd-oyl three pound, boil it in a glazed vefiel till it burns a feather being put into it, then put P 3 to Ill folygrtyhicesl Lib. 5. to it Pitch, Rozin, dry varnifh, or Gum-Sandrach, of each eight ounces, Aloes Hepatica four ounces ; put all in powder into the oyl, and ftir them with a ftick, the fire being a little encreafed : if the liquor is too clear or bright, you may add an ounce or two more of Aloes Socratine, and diminifh the varnifh, fo the liquor will be darker and more like Gold. Being boiled, take it, and ftrain it, and keep it in a Glafs for ufe: which ufe with a pencil. CHAP. XXXV. Of wood, Horns and Bones. TO dye Elder, Box , Mulberry-tree , Pear-tree, Nut- tree of the colour of Ebony. of the colour of Ebony Steep the wood in Alom-water three or four dayes, then boil it in common oyl , with a little Roman- Vitriol and Sulphur. Where note, the longer you boll the wood-, the blacker it will be, but too long makes them brittle- II. To dye Bones green. D~:t».u. o~--~ :U a I-— *.-.. *.t 4-^-r. 4-t,^*v« ~i.«- uun uiv uvJiiva m rvioui-wrtLO., cuv-ii uaivv, mvni Outj dry them and fcrape them, then boil them in Lime- water with a little Verdegriefe. III. To dye Wood like Ebony , according to Glauber. Diftil Tin. Aquafortis of Salt-peter and Vitriol. IV. To make Horns blacky Vitriol diffolved in Vinegar and Spirit of Wine will make Horns black : fo the Snow-white Calx of Silver jn fair water. V. To m$es Bones white. They Chap, i y. Woods, Horns, and Bones, i i • They are ftrangely made white by boiling with wa- ter and Lime *, continually fcumming of it. VI. To dye Bones green. Take white Wine- vinegar a quart,filings of Copper, Verdegriefe, of each three ounces , Rue bruifed one handful , mix them, and put the Bones therein for fifteen days. VII. To dye Woody Horns, or Bones red. Firft boil them in Alom- water, then put them into tincture of Brazil in Alom- water for two or three weeks : or into tincture of Brazil in Milk. VIII. To dye them Blew. Having firft boiled them hi A lorn- water, then put them into the diilblution oflndico in Urine. IX. To dye them green like Emeralds. Take Aquafortis, and put as much filings of Copper into it, as it will diflblvc ; then put the Wood, Horns, or Bones therein for a night. X. To dye Briflles and Feathers. Boil them in Alom-water, and after, while they are warm, put them into tincture of Saffron, if you would have them yellow: or juyce of Elder-berries, if blew : or in tincture of Verdegriefe, if green. XI. To dye an Autre colour. Take Roch-alom,filings of Brafs,of each two ounces, Fi(h-glew half an ounce, Vinegar, or fair water a pint, boil it to the confumption of the half. XII. To [often Ivory and Bones. Lay them t wel ve hours in Aquafortis, then three days in the juyce of Beets, and they will be tender, and you may make of them what you will: To harden them again, lay them in ftrong white Wine-vinegar. XIII. To make Horns [oft. Take Urine a month old, Quick-lime one pound, calcined Tartar half a pound, Tartar crude, Salt, of P 4 each U4 Qolygraphkes] Lib. £ each four ounces, mix and boil all together,then ftrain it twice or thrice, in which put the Horns for eight dayes, and they will be foft. XIV. Another way to make them foft. Take afhes of which glafs is made v Quick-lime of each a pound, water a lufficient quantity , boil them fill one third part isconfumed, then put a feather into it, if the feather peel it is fodden enough, if not, boil it longer, then clarifie it, and put it out, into which put filings of Horn for two dayes ^ anoint your hand withoyl, and work the Horns as it werepaftc, then make it into what fafhionyoupleafe.' XV. Another way to f of ten Horns. Takejuyce ofMarubium, Alexanders, Yarrow, Ce- landine and Radifh roots, with ftrong Vinegar , mix them, into which put Horns, and digeft feven dayes in horfe-dung, then work them as before. XVI. To caft Horns in a mould like as Lead. ^ Make a Lixivium of calcined Tartar and Quick- lime, into which put filings or fcrapings of Horn, boil them well together, and they will be as it were pap, tinge it of the colour you would have it, and then you may caft it in a mould, and make thereof what falhi- oned things you pleafe. -XVII. "To make Ivory white. ** *yvrljj uv juiurij 1JJV/IXV.U. Ul V.V/1WUI VVJ, iciV 11 ill Quick-lime, pour a little water over it, letting it lye twenty four hours, and it will be fair and white. CHAP. Chap!! j6. Of Xtymg, &c. 125 CHAP. XXXVI. Of Dying Tarn, Linnen Clotb^ and the like. I. HT*0 dye a fad Br oven. X Firft infufe the matter to be dyed in a ftrong tincture of Hermodadts : then in a bag put Saffron and afhes, firatnm fnper finfflm , upon which put water two parts mixed with Vinegar one part •, ftrain the water and Vinegar through hot , fifteen or fixteen times, in this Lixiviate tincture of Saffron put what you would dye, letting it lye a night, then take it out, and hang it up to dry without wringing, which do ia like manner the fecond and third times. H. To dye a blew Colour. Take Ebttltts berries ripe and welldryed, fteepthem in Vinegar twelve hours, then with your hands rub thern, and ftrain them through a linnen cloth, putting thereto fome bruifed Verditer and Alom. Note , if the blew i; to be clear , pnt more Verditer to it. III. Another excellent blew Dye. Take Copper fcalesone once, Vinegar three oun- ces, Salt one drachm \ put all into a Copper veffel , and when you would dye, put the faid matter into the tincture of Brazil. IV. Another excellent blew Dye. fake calcined Tanar three pugils, unflak'd Lime one pugil, make a Lixivium, and filtrate it \ to twelve or fifteen quarts of the fame water put Flanders blew one pound, andrrfix them well : fctit to the fire, till J r ou can fcarcely endure your hand in it : the n firft boil what a.i6 Tolygraphices. Lib. J. what you would dye in Alom-water, then dry it : af- terwards dip it in hot Lye twice or thrice •, then put it into the Dye. V. A good red Dye. Take Brazil in powder, fine Vermilion, of each half an ounce, boil them in Rain-water, with Alom one drachm, boil it till it is half confiimed. VI. Another excellent good red Dye. Take of the Lixivium of unflak'd Lime one pint, Brazil in powder one ounce, boil to the half-, then put to it Alom half an ounce, keep it warm, but not to boil : then dip what you would dye, firftin a Lixi- vium of Red-wine Tartar, let it dry •, then put it into the Dye. VII. Another very good Red. Take Roflet with Gum-Arabick, boil them a quarter of an hour, ftrain it: then firffc boil what you would dye, in Alom-water two hours ; after put it into the Dye. VIII. To make fair Ruffet Dye. Take two quarts of water, Brazil one ounce, boil it to a quart-, put to it a fufficient quantity of Grany and two drachms of Gum-Arabick. IX. A good Purple Colour. Take Myrtle-berries two pound , Alom, calcined Brafs , of each one ounce , water two quarts, mix them in a Brafs Kettle, and boil half an hour, then ftrain it. X. A Yellow Colour. Take berries of purging Thorn , gathered about Lammas-day^ bruife them, adding a little Alom in powder •, then keep all in a Brafs veflel. XL Another good Yellow. Put Alom in powder to the Tin&ure of Saffron in Vinegar. in.' J Chap^ 37. Vying of Stuffs y 8cc. 227 XII. A wry good green Colour. Take Sap-green, bruife it, put water to it, then add a little Alom, mix and infufe for two or three days. XIII. To take out Spots. Wafh the fpots with oyl of Tartar per Ddiquiumjiwo or three times and they will vanifh , then wafh with water. Spirit of Wine to wafh with is excellent in this cafe. If they be Ink fpots, juyce of Limmons or Spirit of Salt is incomparable, warning often and dry- ing it : lb alfo Caftle-fope and Vinegar. CHAP. XXXVII. Of the Dying of Stuffs, doaths and Silks, I. *TpO make a fubftantial blew Dye. X Take Woad one pound, and mix it with four pound of boiling water : infufe it twenty four hours ; then dye with it all white colours. II. To make a firm blacky Dye. Firft Wad it with the former Blew : then take of Galls one pound, water fixty pound -, Vitriol three pounds: firlt boil the Galls and water with the Stuff or Cloath, two hours *, then put in the Coperas at a cooler heat for one hour : then take out the Cloath or Stuff and cool it, and put it in for another hour, boiling it : Laftly, take it out again, cool it, and put it in once more. III. To make an excellent Yellow Dye. Take liquor or deco&ion of wheat-bran ( being Very clear ) fixty pound : in which diflblve three pound of Alom: then boil the Stuff or Cloath in it for i 1 8 folygraphkes. Lib. j. for two hours : after which take Wold two pounds, and boil it till you fee the colour good. IV. To make a very good green Dye. Firft dye the Cloth or Stuffy ellow by the third Secti- on, then put it into the blew Dye, in the firft Sc&ion of this Chapter. V. To make a pure clear red Dye. Take liquor or infufion of Wheat bran ( being {trained and made very clear) fixty pounds, Alom two pounds , Tartar one pound •, mix and diflblve them , with which boil the Stuff or Cloth for two hours : take it then out, and boil it in frefh Wheat- bran liquor, fixty pounds: to which put Madder three pounds *, perfect the colour at a moderate heat, with- out boiling. VI. To make a very pie afant purple Dye. Firfldyeitblew, by the firft rule of this Chapter *, then boil it in the former red at the fifth rule hereof: laftly, finifh it with a deco&ion of Brazil. VII. To dye Crimfon in Grain. Firft boil it in the red at the fifth rule of this Chap- ter •> then finifh it in a ftrong tinfture of Cochenele made in the Wheat-bran liquor aforefaid: Where note, that the veffels in which the Stuff and Liquors are boiled muft be lined with Tin, eife the colour will be defe&ive. The fame obferve in Dying of Silks ( in each colour ) with this Caution, that you give them a much milder heat, and a longer time. VIII. The Bow-dyers know, thatdiffolved Tin (that is the folution of 'Jupiter) being put into a Kettle to the Alom and Tartar makes the Cloth attract the colour into it, fb that none of the Cochenele is left -, but is all drawn out of the water into the Cloth. The Spirit of Nitre being ufed with Alom and Tartar, in the firfi boiling makes a firm ground, fo that they flail ?wt Chap. 37. Of tying, 8ccl 119 not Jpot nor lofe their colour by the Sun-, Fire, Air, Vine- gar, Wine, Vrine or Saltwater. To enumerate all the great variety of Dyes, or Co- lours -, or offer at an eflay to reduce them to a certain method, as it is a labour needlefs, fo it is as altogether impoffible,there being infinite colours to be produced, for which ( as yet ) we have no certain, known or real name : And out of what we have already enume- rated in this Chapter, the ingenious ( if they pleafe ) fhall find ( by little Practice and Experience ) fuch great variety to be apparent , that fhould we ex- prefs the number though but in a very low or mean degree, we could not but be expofed in cenfure to an Hyperbole even of the higheft : Every or the aforegoing colours, will alone or fingly, produce a great number of other*, the iirft more deep or high y the latter, all of them paler than each other : And according to the variety of colours the matter is of, before it is put into the Dye, fuch new variety alio fhall you have again when it comes out , not according to what the colour naturally gives, but another clean contrary to what you (although an Artift,) may ex- pect. For if ftrange colours be dipt into Dyes not natural to them, they produce a forced colour of a «new texture, fuch as cannot poffibly be preconceived by the mind of man, although long and continued ex- perience might much help in that cafe. And if fuch variety may be produced by any one of thofe iingle colours •, what number in reafon might be the ulti- mate of any two or three or more of them being com- plicate or compounded? Now if fuch great numbers or varieties may be produced, i . By any one Iingle co- lour, 2.By being complicate ', how fhould we (without a certain and determinate limitation by denomina- tion or name ) ever order fuch confufed, unknown, various, *3° Poljigraphkes. Lib, J. various, and undeterminate fpecies of things, in any pleaiant, intelligible method? Since therefore 'that the matter (as yet J appears not only hard, but alfo im- poffible, we fhall commend what we have done to the Ingenuity of the Induftrious-, and defire that Candor or Favour from the Experienced, with love to correct our Errors *, which ad: or kindnefs will not only be a future obligation to the Author ^ but alfo enforce Po~ fterityto acknowledge the fame. The End of the Third Booh POLY- POLYGRAPHICES LlBER Qjl ARTUS. Qmtain'mg the Original 7 advancement and Perfection of the Art of Tainting : War* ticularly Exemplified in the (various Paintings of the ^indents. To which is added the Arc of Beautifying of the Face and Skin, according to the choiceft waves yet known : the whole Arc of Perfuming never Publifhed till now : A brief sontemplacion of Chiromanticai Idea's : together with many other things of excellent Uie, CHAP. I, Of the Original of theft Arts, I. ^ ■ X H £ Original of the Art of Painting was , J^ taken from the Forms of things which do appear % exprejfmg the fame ( as Jiidorus Pelufiota faith ) with proper colours, imitating the Life-, either fy (Polygraphias. Lib. 4. either hollow or [welling, dark.or light, hard orfoft, rough or fmooth, new or old. Of fuch things ( amongft Vegetables ) Flowers yield the greatefl: variety : of Animals, Man : of things In- animate, Landskips, &c. For this matter of imitation was prefen ted in the chief things only •, for who mould learn to imitate all things in Nature ? the greater being attained,the leifer will follow of themfeives \ if any fhall attempt lb great a burthen, two inconveniencies, faith Quintilian, will necefiarily follow, to wit, Alwayes to fay too much, and yet never to fay all. II. And this imitation of things feenwith the Bye, was much helped by the Ideals of things conceived in the mind, from the continual motion of the imagination. Wherefore as Quimilian faith (lib. 10. cap. 3. of his Inftitutions of Oratory ) " We fhall do well to u accuftome our minds to fuch a ftedfaft conftancy of " conceiving, as to overcome all other impediments "by the earneftnefs of our intention : for if we do " altogether bend this intention upon things concei- ted, our mind need never take notice of any thing "which the Eye fees, or the Ear hears. And there- fore thofe which would profit much, mull take care and pains tofurnifh their minds with all forts of ufe- ful Images and Idea's. u This treafury of the mind "f faith Cajficdoms cap. 12. de Anima) is not over- '" leaden in nailc. if it be once I uniifncd, iheArtiic ct fhall find upon any fudden occafion , all things ne- "ceffary, ready at hand-, whereas thofe which are "unprovided fhall be to feek. It is like to the Ana- lytical Furniture in Algebra, without the knowledge of which, no notable thing can be performed. Now although the imagination may be eafily moved, yet this fame excellency is not attained in an inftant : And without the ability of exprefling of the conceived Images, C/iap. i. Tlie Original of the fe Jrts. i j j Images , all the exercife of the fancy is worth no- thing. III. Tbefe Forms and Ideas were notfingly conftdered, but complicately. For whereas nature fcareely ever reprefents any one thing perfect in beauty ( in all its parts ) left it fhould be faid, that (lie had nothing more to diftribute toothers: SoArtifts of old chofe out many Patterns, which were abfolutely perfect infome of their parts, that by defigning each part after that Pattern, which was perfect therein, they might at Lift prefect fome- thing perfect in the whole. And fo when ZeUxis in- tended anexquifite Pattern of a beautiful woman, he fought not for this perfection in one particular body j but chofe five of the moft well-favoured Virgins, that he might find in them that perfect beauty, which (as LucUn faith ) muit of ncceffity be but one. And Maximns Tyrius faith, you (hall not find in haft a body fo accurately exact, as to compare it with the beauty of a Statue. And Procltts faith, if you take a man brought forth by nature, and another made by Art of Carving, that by nature ihall nor ieem the itatdier, becaufe Art doth many things more exactly: Fo which CWaffents, when that h'eiaith that Pygmalion did Carve the Snow-white Image of Ivory, with ijch a happy dexterity ,that it was altogether impoffible that fuch a woman mould be born. IV. From this manner of imitation did arife the skill of defigning •, from whence J prang the Arts of Painting Limning , Wajlnng, Cafling, a,td all others of that kind. Thefe Arts in their infancy, were fo mean, that the firit Artift was forced (as ts£lianus faith lib. 10. cap. 10. of his Hiftory') in Painting to write this is an Ox, this a Horfe, this a Dog : But asT#//v faith ( in libra 2 j 4 Tolygraphkes. Lib. 4. de clarls oratoribus) there is nothing botli invented andfinifhcd at a time. And Amobituin Ubrofecundo adverfus Centes faith, " The Arts are not together " with our minds, brought forth out of the heavenly " places •, but are all found out here on earth, and " in procefs of time, ibftned, forged, and beautified, "by a continual meditation: Our poor and needy " life, perceiving fome cafuaJ things to fall out prof- tl peroufly, whileft it doth imitate, attempt, try, flip, "reform, and change, hath out of the fame affiduous " rcprehenfion made up fome fmall pieces of Arts , " the which it hath afterwards by fbudy brought to " fome perfection. V. Theperfons who were thefirjl inventers of thefe Arts trefcarcely known ( becaufe daily new inventions were ad- dei} but thofe famous Perfons who either flrove to bring them to perfection, or add to what was already invented-) or otherwife were famous in any one particular things Hiftory has in part informed us of. The famous Paufias was the firft that attempted to bring the Art of Painting to perfection. Apelles was the fit it t'rat undertook the expreffing of invifiblc th ; ngs, as Thunder, Lightning, and the like-, the which confide ration of thtfe almoft impoflibilities made Theophylalhis Sinwcatus (mEpift. 37.) Jay, that Painters undertake to expreft fiich things, as nature is not able to do : And the fame Apelles had a certain invention and grace , proper to himfelf alone , to which never any other Artificer ever attained. And although ZwxU, Apelles, Aglaophon, did none of them (cem to lack any thing of, yet they differed very much, and had each of them fome peculiar excellency, of which neither of the other two could boaft. Here is but one Art of Cafting, in which Afoon, Polycletus, Lyfip- pus, have been excellent, yet did One very much differ from Cliap. I. Tl?e Original ofthefe Jits. i] J from another : Zeitxis did furpafs all other Artizans ill Painting womens bodies : Lyfppns is moft excellent in fine and fubtle workmanfhip : Polyclettts made ex- cellent Statues upon one Leg • Samtus did excel in conceiving of Vilions and Phantafies: Dionyfms in Painting of men only : Polygnoms molt rarely exprek fed the affections and paflions of men: Antimochm mqde noble women : NtcUs excellent in Painting of women, but moft excellent in four footed creatures, chiefly Dogs • Calamis made Chariots, with two or four horfes :, the horfes were fo excellent and exact, that there was no place left for Emulation : Enphra-> nor, the firft and moft excellent in expreffing the dig- nityj and marks of Heroical Perfons •, Areftodcms Painted Wreftlers : Serapion was moft excellent in Scenes ; Pyrtkm ( iriferiour in the Art of Painting to none) painted nothing but Coblers and Barbers : Lh* dio the firft and moft excellent in Painting Landskips : Apollo dorns, Afclcpiodorus, Androbvlns, Ale v as, were the only Painters of Philosophers, &c. VI. Another re afon of the Invention hereof, was from the m oving of the prions. For as Ssmomdes faith, (comparing Painting with Pofey) Picture is a f.lentPofey, and Poiey is a ipea- king Picture : Upon the occafion of thefe words, Pin- torch faith, The things reprcfented by Painters, as if they Were as yet doing, are propounded by Ora.ors, as done already : Paint ens exprefs in colours and lines ^ what Poets do in words *, the one doth that with the Pencil , which the other doth wkh the Pen. When Latirws Pd- cams had made a full defcription of the miferable eni of the wicked Miximus,hc calls upon all the Painters to alTift him: Bring hither, bring hither you pious Poets (faith he) the whole care and ftudy of your tedious nights : Ye Artificers alio, defpife the vulgar C^2 Ar- 1)6 tPolygraphkes. Lib. 4. Argument of Ancient Fables*, thefe, thefe things de- ferve better to be drawn by your cunning hands : let the Market-places and Temples be filled with fuch Spectacles -, work them out in Ivory -, let them live in colours ; let them ftand in Brafs -, let them exceed the price of precious Stones. It doth concern the fe- curity of all Ages, that fuch things might be feen to have been done, if by chance , any one rilled with wicked defires, might drink in innocencyby his Eyes, when he (hall fee the ( horrid and deplorable) Monu- ments of thefe our times. And Gregory Nyjfen, upon the Sacrificing of Jfaac faith, J often jaw in a Picture the Image of this FacT:, upon which I could not look^with- out tears -, fo lively did Art put the Hiftory before my Eyes. < VII. The Egyptians were the firfl invcnters of Pain- ting : The Greeks brought it (out of its rudencfs) to propor- tion : The Romans adorned it with colours : The Germans (following them) made their works more durable by painting in Oyl : of whom the Englifh, Dutch, Italian, and French, are become imitators. It is reported that the Grecians were the firft pain- ters, and that their colours were (in the infancy there- of ) only white and black .• but it appears more with reafon and truth, that the invention thereof mould be cUcribed to the Egyptians, who (before the inventi- on of Letters) (ignified their conceptions by Hierogly- phicki of Figures, Cyphers, Characters, and Pictures of divers things, as Birds, Beafis, Jnfetls, Fifies, Trees y Plants, and the like, which by Tradition they tranf- fer'd to their Children-, fo they made the Falcon to fignifie Diligence, Strength, and Swiftnefs : the Bee a King •, its Honey, Mildnefs - n its Sting, Juftice : a Ser- ym ( tail in mouth ) the revolution of the Year .- the rte 9 Envy, the Earthy a labouring Beaft -, a Mare, Hearing, Chap. !. The Original ofthefe Arts. 237 Hearing, &c. Now our bare learning to imitate is not enough-, it is rcquifite that lince we are not rlrft in invention, we mould fcudy rather to outgo than to follow. If it were unlawful ( faith Quintilian ) to add any thing to things invented-, or to find out better things , oar continual labour would be good for nothing *, for it is certain that Phydias and Apelles, have brought many things to light ■, which their Fredecejfors knew nothing of. Allies dicl all things with compleatnefs, Zeuxis, with an ineftimable grace : Protogems with an indefatigable diligence: Timanthes with a great deal of fubtilty and curiofity : Nicophanes with a ftately magnificence. Now to attain to thefe kind of Excellencies, it is necef- fary to have recourfe to variety of great Matters, that fomethingout of the one, and fomething out of the other,may be as fb many ornaments to adorn our works^ and as fo many fteps to lead us on to the door of per- fection. VIII. About the time of Philip King o/Macedon, this Art began to flourijh : growing into great efiimation in the days of Alexander and his Succejfors : from thence through all the feries of time even to this day, it hath received by degrees ;fuch wonderful advancements that it may be nowfaidy it is arrived at perfection. For without doubt there is a perfection of Art to be attained, and it is as poflible that I, or thou, or he, may as well attain it, as any body elfe,if we refolve to ftrive, and take pains, without fainting,or fear of defpair.And fince the Art of Painting is (as Socrates faith) the refem- blanceof vifible things, the Artift ought to beware that he abufes not the liberty of his imagination, in the fhapes of monftrous and prodigious Images of things not known in nature , but as a true lover of Art, prefer a plain and honeft work (agreeing with nature; before any phantaitical and conceited device whatsoever. Q^3 IX. Uft- 13 8 Polygraphkes. Lib, 4 IX. Lafily , that from Time, Form, Magnitude, Number, Proportion, Colour, Motion, Reft, Situa- tion, Similitude, Diftance, Imagination, and Light, in a (ingle and complicate con fideration, thts Art hath its tffence or beings and at lafl had by the help of indufirious and unwearied minds , its Original produBion^ and manife- fiation, Light is that only thing, without which all thofe other things from which this Art fprings, would be ufelefs ♦, without which the Art it felf cannot be. < c It cf is ( as Sanderson faith ) the heavens off-fpring, the "eldeft daughter of God, fat lux ■, the firft days Crea- tion: it twinkles in a Star, blazes in a Comet ^ " dawns in a Jewel, dificmbles in a Glow-worm ; 11 contracts it felf in a Spark, rages in a Flame, is " pale in a Candle, and dyes in a Coal. By it the fight hath being, and the imagination life, which comprehends the univerfality of all things without fpace of place : the whole Heavens in their vaft and full extent, enter at once through the apple of the Eye, without any ftraitnefs of palfage -. the fight "isafenfe, which comprehends that, which no other "fenfe is capable of-, it judgeth and diftinguifheth u between two contraries in an inftant, it confiders " the excellency and beauty of every object : the "fbnnpled Canorrvof Heaven hv nichr. the wjmrW- " ing Clouds by day , the wonderful Form of the u Rain-bow > the glorious 'matutine appearance of Un&us, Alcetas, Alexis the Poet, Anafmenes, Antigo- ms, Ariflodemus, Carins, Artimon, Callixenus, Chrifto- dorns, DemocritHSy Ephefins, Dnris, Enpbenon, Euphra- nor , Jfthmius , Hegefander Delphicus , Hippias Eleus, Hypficrates, Umblkus, Juba Rex Mauritania, Malchus Biz^tntius, Melanthins, Men&chmus, Menetor, Pamphiltts y Polemon, Porphyrins , Praxiteles, Protogcnes, Theophanes\ Xenocrates, and many others, the chief of whole works are now loft. VIII. As Arts came new ir.to eftimation, fo at length Laws were cftablijhedfor their preservation ; and pmtfli- mentsfor their prevarication. The beginning of thefe Laws wasfirft ztArgos, £- fhefiis, Thebes and Athens, as alfo in Egypt, where a workman (faith Diodoms Sicnlns) is fearfully punifn- cd, if he undertake any charge in the Commonwealth, or meddle with any Trade but his own : the which Law, faith Herodotus, the Lacedemonians did alfo ap- prove of. By means of which Laws it was, that the Artifts of thofe Nations attained to fuch a perfection of Art, as we fliall hereafter relate. IX. The fervent defire and love of emulation to excel others ; the commendable fimplicity of Art ; together with the content and fatitfaBion of doing fomething well, gave a large progrefs towards the advance of Art. It was nobly laid of Scipio Africanus, that every magnanimous fpirit compares himfelf, not only with them that are now alive :, but alfo with the famous men of all ages-, whereby it appears that great wits are always by the fting of emulation, driven forwards to great matters ; but he that by too much love of his own works, compares himfelf with no body, muft needs attribute much to his own conceits. Doft thou defire the glory of fwiftnefs ? faith Martial ( in Ep'gr. 16. lib. 244 Polygraph ices. Lib. 4. 36. lib. 12. ftrive to out-go the Tyger, and the light Oftrich •, it is no glory at all to out-run Affes. This emulation is the force of great wits, whereby our imi- tation is provoked fometimes by envy, and fometimes by admiration, whereby it falls out, that the thing we earneftly leek after, is loon brought to fome height of perfection •, which perfection confifts in exa& imita- tion, according to the fimplicity of Art, and not in gaudy appearances, which adorns the fhadows much more than ever nature adorned the fubftance. This imitation of the life gave the Artisan fame ^ which fame quickened his afpiring thoughts, adding more fuel to the flames, till fuch time, as he brought forth a molt abfolute work, whereby he conceived a joy, con- tent and fatisfaction, as durable as the work it felf, upon which he now conceived himfelf a happy man, and through a juft affiance of his vermes knows him- felf to be lifted up above the reach of envy, where he Hands fecure of his fame, enjoying in this life ( as if he were now confecrated unto Eternity ) the venera- tion that is like to follow him after his death ; thus an honelt emulation and confidence , bringing forth works o f general applaufe, procureth unto its author an everlafting Glory. Now what a comfortable thing is this, to have a fore-feeling of what we hope to at- tain to ? X. Another reafon of the augmentation of thefe Arts, was the manifold ufes thereof among men, either for good orevilpHrpofes. As in natural Sciences, where words come fhort, a little Picture givethus the knowledge of Beads, Birds, Fifties, and other forms, as well inanimate as animate : In the Tattkks^ how mould a General know how to fet his men in array, unlefs he try the cafe by defign or delineation? fo in Architecture to pourtray Platforms after Ch. 2. Farther frogrefs of thefe A) ts. 24 j after any fafhion, and to work out the Patterns of high and mighty buildings in a little wax, keeping in fo fmall an example the exact proportion of the grea- ter Structure : In Geometry the exactnefs of Lines, Angles, Surfaces and Solids : In Botonalogia, the exact lhapes of Herbs, Plants and Trees : In Zoologia, the fhapes of all living creatures : In Anthropologic the exact description of all the parts of mans body inward and outward : In Chymia, the forms of all Chymical vellels and operations : In the lives of illuflrious men and Princes, to exprefs their forms and fhapes to tie life, that age might not prevail againft them, defer- ving thereby ( as Varro faith ) the envy of the Gods themfelves : In Geography, to defcribe in fmall Maps Kingdoms, Countreys, and Cities, yea, the whole World: In Policy, as Mchal in faving her husband David, Ptolomms in the Image of Alexander, which he willingly let Ptrdiccas catch from him, fuppofing it to have been the body it felf, thereby avoiding much blood-ihed: Cyras his wooden Per pans in the Siege of Sardis , by which the Towns-men being frighted, yielded the City : Epaminondas at Thebes by the Image of Pallas did wonders : Amafis King of Egypt, his gol- den Image made of the Balin, in which his feet nfed to be wafhed, which the Egyptians religiouily worihipped, whereby he brought them to afreet him being now a Kisg, who was of an ignoble and bale Parentage •, the wooden Elephants of Perfens King of Macedonia, with which he wonted his hcrfes, that they might not be frighted in time of Battel.The Ornaments of Temples, Market-places and Galleries, places bothpublick and private. Julius Cafars I mage in wax, hideous to look to, for twenty three gaping wounds he received, did mightily ftir up the Romans to revenge his death.Wor- thymen which had deferred well of the world, had their 146 (Polygrapbices . Lib. 4- their memories conferved with their Images-, by which all thofe that afpire to goodnefs, and to follow their fteps, are likewife filled with hope. The Athe- nians have erected unro came to Protogenes, lea- ving the hope of his Vidory to behold an Artificer. Alexander the Great came alfo to ApeRes his Shop, of- ten accompanied with many Princes. It was his will that none but Polycletm alone, fhould caft his Statue in Brafs, that none but Apelles alone mould paint him in Colours, that none but Pyrgoules alone;(hould Engrave him. The eftimation of the Artifts were alio under- ftoodfrom theeiteem and high rates their works were priied Ch. 2. Farther Trogrefs of tl.efe A) ts. 247 prized at. *, a picture ofBularihus a Painter, was valued at its weight in Gold by Candanles King of Lydia : Ariftides was fo lingular in his Art, that it is reported of King Attains that he gave an hundred Talents ( which is about feventeen thoufand and five hundred pounds fterliiig) for one of his Pictures. As much had PolycletHs for one of his. Allies had for pain- ting the Picture of Alexander the Great, three thou- fand and five hundred pounds given him in golden Coin. C fo the advancement of the fame made way for its Perfection. The Invention arofe from the appearance of things natural, conceived in Idea's, as we have abundantly Jigmfied ( in thefaft Chapter of this BookJ the Advance from the bringing of thofe Idea's to light through practice {by Chap. 2. J from whence arofe things very excellent for greatnefs : very good for their ufefnlnefs , choice for their novelty, and frngnlar for their kind. II. Eafe of Invention, Plenty of Matter, andNeatnefs of Wor^ were fieps by which Art was confttmmated. For eafe of Invention gave Encouragement, Plenty of Matter gave Formation, und Neatnefs gave Delight, aii which lb confpired together, to put fomuch of emulation into the Artificer, to undertake, or endeavour to do thofa things, which in their kind might never after be ex- ceeded : this indeed was their aim of old, which al- though the antients of this Art could never attain un- to, yet did they make fuch way, that fome of their followers have done thofe things , which never any alter them could ever mend, nor themfelves fcarcely come Chap, 3. The QerfeBion of fainting ifi come near. Eafie invention fprings out of a great and well rooted fulnefs of learning - 7 by being convert fant in all forts of ftudies , having familiarity with Antiquities j the knowledge of innumerable Hifto- tical and Poetical narrations, together with a through acquaintance with all fuch motions and Idea's of the mind , as are naturally incident unto men : for the" whole force of this Art doth principally confift irt thefe things, nothing bearing a greater fway in the manifold varieties o£ Painting. III. It was the opinion of PamphilUS ( the mafier of Apelles ) that without the knowledge of Arithmetic^* Geometry, and the Opticks , this Art could not be brought to Perfection* The examples of Phidiai and Alcamenes is perti- nently brought here : The Athenians intending to fefc up the Image of Minerva upon a high Pillar, employ^ ed thofe two Workmen, purpofing to chufe the bet> ter of the two-, Alcamenes (having no skill in Gebme* try nor the Opticks ) made her wonderful fair to the eye of them that faw her near. Phidias contrariwife" ( being skilful in all Arts , chiefly the Opticks ) confn dering that the whole fhape would change according to the height of the place, made her lips wide Open* her nole fomewhat out of order, and all the reft accor- dingly, byakindofrefupination: the two Images be* ing brought to view* Phidias was in great danger to have bsen ftoned by the multitude, until at length the Statues were fet up •, where the fweet and excellent ftroaks of Alcamenet were drowned, and the disfigu* red diftorted hard-favOurednefs of Phidias his work vanifhed ( and all this by the height of the plate •, ) by which means Alcamenes was laughed at, and Phidiai much more efteemed. Of like perfection is AmHlini his Minerva -, the Image of Juno in the Temple of the* R 2 SyriM 251 tPolygraphkes. Lib. 4. Syrian goddefs •, the head of Diana exalted at Chios, made by Bupalus and Anthermus, Hercules in the Tem- ple QliAntonia^&c. An Artificer, faith Philoflratus in Procemio Iconitm y mult underltand the nature of a man throughly, to exprefs all his manners, guife, behavi- our, &c. he muft difcern the force in the conftitution of his checks, in the turning of' his eyes, in the calling of his eye-brows •, in fhort, he muft obierve all things which may help the Judgement , and whofoever is thus furnilhed will doubtlefs excell, and bring things to per- fection •, he then may ealily paint a mad man, an an- gry man, a penfive man, a joyful man, an earneft man, a lover, &c. in a word, the perfection of whatfoever may polfibly be conceived in the mind. IV. Continual obfervation of exqmfue pieces ( whether Artificial or Natural ) nimble conceptions, and tranquillity of mind) are great means to bring Art to Perfection. The works of the Antients could never have been fo exquifitc in the exprefllon of Paflions, but by thefe means. How perfectly did Zeuxis paint the modeit and chafte behaviour of Penelope •, Tlmomachm the raging mad fit of Ajax *, Silanion the frowardnefs of Apollodomt ', Protogenes the deep penfivenefs -bf Phi- life us , .Praxiteles the rejoycings otPhryne *, Parrhafius a boy running in Armour-, and Arifrides hhAnapauo- menos dying for loveof his Brother? Bodins his Image of Hercules is of the feme natnre-.Themiftius fhews us the true Image of feigned friendship •, Age lit us a molt live- ly Image ofjufike •, Apelles an admirable Picture of Slander ; thoufands of examples more might be drawn out of antient Authors to approve thefe things , if thefe may be thought not fufficient. V. This Perfetltcnalfo lyeth in the truth of the matter ', the occafion thereof, and difcretion to ufe it. "The molt antient and famous Painters did make muck Chap. 3. TbeTerfeElion of 'Painting. 2J$ much account of Tmth y and had rather lofc the neat- nefs and glory of their pieces, than to endanger the truth of their ftory •, which indeed is the great com- mendation of a Picture, for as much as Lucianfaith, That nothing can be profitable but what proceeds from truth. Occafion alio is a great matter-, the Pi- cture of Bacchm may here ferve for an excellent ex- ample, whofe paflion of love was fo clearly exprefied therein •, caiting alide his brave apparel, Flowers, Leaves, Grapes, &c. Now in reprefenting things truly according to the occafion, difcre tion ought to be your guide; tor as in Tragedies, fo alio in Pictures all things ought not to be repreiented ^ let not Medea ( faith Horace inltbro de Arte) Murder her own chil- dren in the preience of all the people *, let not the wicked Atrens boil humane tieJh openly •, there are doubtlefs many things, which had better be left our, though with lome lots of the ftory , than with the lofs of modefty •, wanton , unlawful and filthy lulls ( though they may gain the vain title of wit, yet) they diminifh not only the eftimation of the work- man, but alio ' the excellency of the work, debarring it of perfection. Precepts help Art much, in pro- pounding unto us the right way •, but where they fail, our wits mult Tupply, by warily confidering what is decent and convenient •, for this Art requireth ftudi- ous endeavours, afliduous exercitations, great experi- ence, deep wifdom, ready counfel, veracity of mind, diligent obfervations, and great difcretion. VI. To the former add Magnificence ', which gives Au- thority to things excellent. Great minded men are molt of all given to enter- tain ftately conceits; therefore an ArtizAn ought to be of a magnanimous nature •, if not, yet that atlealt he ought with a determined refolution to aim ztmag- R 3 mfhent *J4 folygrtfhiasl Lib. 4; pificem things. So it feems that nature did dilpofe jSHcophmes to a high ftrain of invention \ Nicophanes ( faith Pliny, lib. 3 5 . cap. 10. ) was gallant and neat, jo, that he did paint Antiquities for Eternity , whereby Jie was commended for the magnificence of his work, and gravity of his Art. Such Artificers therefore as dp bring any thing to perfection, mult be of an exceed- ing greaf fpirit , and entertain upon every occafion great thoughts , and lofty imaginations \ by this means they (hall gain an everlafting fame } but this is imppflible ( faith Longings ) for any who bufie the thoughts and ftudies of their life about vile and flavifh matters, to bring forth any thing which might delerve the admiration of fucceeding ages. If any Ar» tizan be not naturally of fo great a fpirit, let. him help Jiimfelf by the reading of Hifiory and Voefie\ Hiftory Cannot but infoire a magnanimous Sprit , when (he re- prefents to us fo many rare exploits, and the examples pi fo many great noble and valiant fouls, who through- fut all ages, in the midft of moll eminent dangers, have demonltrated their vertues and fpirits not only to thofe prefent, but all fucceeding times. Poefie alfo being of a haughty and lofty ftile, doth much enlarge the mind, and from, thence many excellent things are brought : The much admired Blean Jupiter which Phidias made, himfelf confefled to be fprmed after the Image of Jupiter defcribed in Homer. From the fame Poet did Apellcstymt the Image of Diana among the facrificing Virgins. It is nPt the prefent age, but the facred me- mory of all pplterity, which gives unto us a weighty and durable crown of Glory. yil. ExaEh Analogy or proportion , not only advanced ^trt, but alfo brought it a degree nearer Perfection. fhiloflratus calls it Symmetries lome Analogy >, others fiarmopy •, this U the appellation of the Greeks ? what the Chap; 3. The ferfrftion of fainting, ijj the Latines called it fcarcely appears ( as Pliny faith lib. 34- cap. 8. ) yet words equivalent in power thereto are found, as CongrMr.ce-, e quail ry, and Tully ( libro primo de Officii* ) calls it Agreement and apt compofition ; Vitrn- viniy Commodulation ', Agellius calls it a natural compe- tence ; Qu'mtilian approves the word Proportion ; by which faith Plutarch beautiful things are perfected : it *s one of thofe things which the moft High ufed in the fabrication of the world, ( Wifd. 1 1. 20. ) He bath difpofed all things in meafure and number and weight. The firfl giver* of Symmetric or Analogy was Parrha- fins ; Polycletus was a diligent obierver thereof j Afclepio- doruti an exact practifer thereof, whofe admirer was Apellesy who efteemed it to proceed out of fome per- feclions in an Artificer fiirpalling in Art, and which is moft apparent in naked and undifguifed bodies. Strabo faith, that Phidias exactly obferved this proportion in the Image of Jupiter Olympicm fitting. The lame Phidias, as Lucian reports, could exactly tell upon the firft fight of a Lions claw, how big a Lion he was to make in proportion to the fame claw. Lineal Picture is the foundation of all imitation, which if it be done after the true rules of proportion, will lively reprefent the thing delineated : this is a perfection in kind , which yet cannot be compared to the perfection of a coloured Picture. VIII. This point of Perfection was farther advanced by the exquifttenefs of Colouring. The perfection of Colouring arifeth from a certain right underftandingof each colour feverally, without which it is impoflible to mix any thing rightly, as Her- mogenes faith. The Creeks ( as Porphyrins ) call this mixtion of colours, demand, promtfe, deny, doubt, confefs, repent, number, measure, rejoyce, encourage, befeech, hin- der, reprove, admire, relate) commend, o^c. In admira- tion we hold the hand up, bent fome what backward, with all the fingers clofed : In relating we join the top of the fore-finger to the thumb-nail : Inpromiling we move it fbftly : In exhorting or commending, more quick : In penitence and anger , we lay our clofed hand to thebreaft : We clofe the fingers ends, and Jay them to our mouth when we confider, &c. It is not yet enough that the Picture or Image refernbles the proportion and colour of the life, unlefs it likewife re- fernbles it in the demeanour of the whole body ; there- fore Ca/lifirafHs calls this Art, the art of counterfeiting manners. Vfyjfes is evidently, faith Philofirams, difcer- ned by his aufeerity and vigilancy, Menelam by his gen- tle mildnefs^ Agamemnon by a kind of Divine Ma jelly \ Ajax Telamonius,by his grim look •, Locrus by his readi- nefs and forwardnefs. The belt Artifts ever change their hands, in exprefling of Gods, Kings, Priefts, Sena- tors t Orators, Muficians, Lawyers, &c. Zeuxis painted the modefty of Penelope : Echion made a new married but fliamefaced woman: Arifiides painted a running Chariot drawn with four horfcs : Antiphilus made a boy blowing the fire : Philoxemis Eretrms depicted the Picture of Wantonnefs : Parrhafms made the Hopliti- des or Pictures of two armed men, as may be feen in Pliny Ub. 35. cap. 9, 10, and 1 1. Boethius made a babe ftranglinga goofe : Praxiteles made a weeping woman, and a rejoyqng whore; Enphranqr drew the picture of Paris %6o (Polygraphkes. Lib 4. Paris as a Judge , a Wooer and a Soldier : See Pliny lib. 34. cap. 8. where you may have many other ex- amples. It is worth our pains to fee inCallifiratusthek dcfcriptions at large, whereby we may lee it is a lin- gular Perfection of Art. « X. The loft jhp of Per feel-ion is the right ordering and difpofmg of things. This order or difpofition mull beobferved as well in a picture confuting of one figure, as in a picture of many figures. The nature of man, faith Xenophon in Oeconomko, cannot name any thing ib ufeful and iair, as order :, a confufed piece of work cannot de- ferve admiration y thofe things only affect us, wherein every part is notonly perfect in it felf, but alio well diipofed by a natural connexion. It is not enough in a building to bring hair, lime, fand, wood, ftones, and other materials , unlels we take care that all this confufed ftuffbe orderly diipofed to the intent. Nature it feif feems to be upholden by Or'der, and fo are all things elfe which are fubjugatcd to the fame Law. Now the way to attain to this True order of difpofition, is firfl to conceive the Idea of the hiltory in the imagi- nation , that the prefence of the things in the mind may fuggefl the order of dilpoilng each thing in its pro- per place, yet with that fubtilty that the whole may reprefent one entire body. Secondly ,That the frame of the whole ftructure of this difpofition, may be analo- gous to the things themfelves •, fo that we may at once reprefent things which are already done, things which are doing,and things which are yet (o be done •, perfecting, as Philojhatus faith, in every one of thefe things, what is moil proper, as if we were bufied about one only thing. Thirdly, An hiftorical Picture muft reprefent the feries of the hiftory, which although the Picture be iilent, yet that the connexion might ( as it were) Chap. J. The PerfeBion of fainting. 161 were) fpeak, putting the principal figures in the prin- cipal places. Fourthly, The parts muft be connected eaiily rolling on, gently flowing or following one ano- ther, hand in hand, feeming both to hold and be upheld, free from all abruption, well grounded, finely framed andftrongly tyed up together, that the whole may be delightfome for its equality, grave for its Sim- plicity, anf graceful for its univerfal analogical com- pofure. Fifthly, That moft excellent pieces (if the hiftory will fuffer it) be fhadowed about with rude thickets, and craggy rocks, that by the horndneis of inch things, there may accrew ^ more excellent grace to the principal H £*» * sdifcords ^nfickmakc fometimes concords) from whence remits aflngu lar delight. Sixthly, That to thefe things be added verjp,. cuity, which, a( Lwm» faith, through the mutual con- nexlon of things, will make the whole compleat and perfed. Seventhly and laftly , that tte drfpofitwnof the proportion be obferved , in the due diftance of each Lure , and the pofition of their parts, of which we have faid fomething, Seftion feventh ; but m gene- ral Pliny (fi*. 35- «*• 1*0 f #frg** m th,S ^ ral difpofition of proportional diftances , we have no rules i our eye muft teach us what to do ; to which Qumnlian ailents, where he faith, that thefe things admit no other Judgement, but the judgement ot our XL Laftly, For the ahfolute Confirmation or Perfe- Bion of the Art, excellency of Invention, Proportion, Co- lour, Life and Difpofition, nmfr univerfdly concur, and confpire, to bring; forth that comely grace fidnefs, which is the very life and foul of thework^ the entire and joint Sum of all perfections. . „ It is not enough, that a Picture is excellent u one or more of the aforefaid perfections, buttheconlumna- lion %6l (polygraphices. Lib. 4. tion is, that they all concur ', for if but one be want" ing, the whole work is defective. A good invention affects the mind \ true proportion draws the eyes ; lively motion moves the foul $ exquifite colours be- guile thephantafiej and an orderly difpofition, won- derfully charms all the fenfes*, if all thefe unite, and center in one piece, how great an excellence and per- fection will appear? What a comely Grace ? this Grace it is, which in beautiful bodies is the life of beauty, and without which, its greateft accomplifhments can- not pleafe the beholder* For it is not lo much the per- fection of Invention, Proportion, Colours, Motion and Difpofition apart, which affect the fenfes, but all thofe perfections abfolutely mited , which brings forth that comely Grace , and higbeft Perfection , which Art aims at, and the Artizan ftrives after. This Grace pro- ceeds not from any rules of Art, but from the excel- lent fpirit of the Artificer *, it is eaficr attained by ob- fervation and a good judgement, than learned by Pre- cepts, 2& Quintilian in his Inftitutions lib. 11. csp. 1. learnedly obferves. And this Grace is moft graceful^ when it flows with facility j out of a free Spirit, and is not forced or ftrained out with labour and toil, which* ouite fpoils and kills the life of the work : Now this facility fprings from Learning* Study and exercitation. An and Nature mull concur to the Conftitution of this Gittu 1 Art inufc be appiied difcreetly to thofe things which we naturally affect, and not to things which we loath •, left we rails of that Glory which we feek after. CHAP* .-i 1 Chap, 4. Of depicting Saturn. i lum, wife and lifter of Saturn ) did place alio upon his head two wings, demonftrating by the one, the excel- lency and perfection of the mind •, by the other, the force of fenfe and understanding. • The Platonicks underhand by Saturn the mind, and its inward contemplation of things coeleftial , and therefore called the time in which he lived, the golden Age, it being replete with quietnefs, concord, and' true content. CHAP. Chap. 5. OfJefiBb^ Jupiter, *<5$ CHAP. V. Bow the Antients dt 'pitied 'Jupiter. 1. f\Rphem defcribes him with golden locks, having \J on his temples peeping forth two golden horns, his eyes mining, hisbreaft large and fair, having on his flioulders wings. By the golden locks isfignifiedthe Firmament, andits glo- rious army oftralttcent Stars : by his trvo Horns, the Eaft and Weft : by his eyes, the Sun and Moon : by his breafi, the fpacions ambulation of the air j and by his wings the fury of the winds. II. Porphyrias and Snidas depicture the Image of Ju- piter fitting upon a firm and immoveable feat , the up- per parts naked and uncloathed, the lower parts cover- ed and inverted •, in his left hand a Scepter-, in his right hand a great Eagle, joined with the figure of Vi- Gloria. This Image was ereEbed in Pireus, a ftarely and mag-' nifcent Gate of Athens : by the feat isfrewed the perma- nency of Gods power : the naked parts fluw that the com- pajfion of the Divine power is always manifefi to thofe of an underftanding Spirit : the lower parts covered, flew that while we wallow inthe world,andas it were rovl(d afleep With the illecebrous blandi foments thereof, that the divine know- ledge is hid and obfenredfrom w : by the Scepter isftgr.ifed his nde over all things : by the Eagle and Victoria how all things (land in vajfaUge andfubjection to the all-command' ing power. III. Martianus depictures him with a regal crown, adorned with molt precious and glittering (tones-, over his moulders, a thin vail ( made by Pallas own S hands,) 266 folygraphices. Lib. 4. hands ) all white, in which is inferted divers fmalt pieces of glafs rcprefenting the moll refplendent Stars \ in his right hand he holdeth two balls, the one all of Gold,the otherhalf Cold ,half Silver •, in the other hand an Ivory Harp with nine ftrings, fitting on a foot- cloth, wrought with ftrange works, and Peacocks fea- thers •, and near his fide lieth a tridental gold embof- fed mafs. IV. Pint arch faith that in Crete, he had wholly humane ihape and proportion, but without ears. By that was fignified that Superiors and Judges ought not to he carried away by prejudice nor perfwafion y but ft and firm, ftedfaft and upright to all without partia- lity. V.Contrariwife theLacedamonians framed his picture with four ears. By that they fignified that God heareth and under ft an- deth all things \ and that Princes and Judges ought to hear all informations , before they deliver definitive fentence or judgment. VI. Paufanias faith that in the temple of Minerva ( among the Argives ) the ftatue of Jupiter was made with three eyes \ two of them in their right places -, the other in the middle of his fore-head. By which is fignified his three Kingdoms *, the one Hea- ven ; the other V.arth *. t he \.a.(h Sea* VII. With the Eleans (a people of Greece) the Statue of Jove was compacted of Gold and Ivory, empaled with a Coronet of Olive leaves ; in his right hand the Image of Vittoria •, in his left a Scepter, on the top of which was mounted the portraicture of an Eagle, upon a feat of Gold, enchafed with the forms of many un- known birds and fifhes, upheld and fupported by four Images of Vittoria. VIII. In Caria (a place of the lefler Afia) the Statue Chap. 6. Of defining Mars. 167 Statue of Jupiter was made holding in one of his hands a Pole-axe. The re af on of this was, as Plutarch faith, from Hercu- les, who overthrowing Hippolyta the Amazonian Queen, toohjt from her, and gave it to OmphaleA^ wife a Ly- dian. TheVhtomftsunderfiand by Jupiter, the foub of the world ; and that divine fpirit through whofe Al- mighty Power, every thing receives its being and prefer- vmtion. IX. He is alfo painted with long curled black hair in a purple robe, trimmed with Gold, and fitting on a golden throne, with bright yellow clouds difperfed about him. CHAP. VI. Hovp the Anticnts depzffed Mzrs. I. X jtAcroh'uts iaith that the Pictures of Mars were .IV J. adorned and beautified with the Sun-beams, in as lively a manner as could be deviled •, with an Afpcct fierce, terrible, and wrathful, hollow red eyes, quick in their motion, face all hairy with long curled locks on his head, depending even to his fhoulders, of a coal black colour,itanding with a ipear in the one hand, and a whip in the other. II. He is alfo fometimes depicted on horfe-back and fometimes in a Chariot, drawn with horfes cal- led Fear and Horror : fome fay the Chariot was drawn with two men, which were called Fury and Violence. III. Statins faith he wore on his head a helmet moil: bright and mining, fo fiery as it feemed, there illued S 2 flames 1 6 8 folygrafhices. Lib. 4. flames of lightning •, a breaft-plate of Gold,lnfculp'd with fierce and ugly Monfters - 7 his fhield depainted all over with blood, enchafed with deformed beafts, with a fpear and whip in his hands, drawn in a Chariot with twohorfes, Fwvand Violence? driven with two churlifh Coach-men, Wrath and Deftruttion. IV. Ifidorns faith that the Picture of Mars was depaint- ed with a naked breaft. By which is fignijied that men ought not to be timorous in xtar-Jout valiantly and boldly expofe themfehesto hazards and dangers. V. Statins faith that thehoufe of A/^rj was built in an obfcure corner ofThracia,made of rufty, black Iron j the Porters which kept the gates were Horror and Mad- nefs? within the houfe inhabited Fury, Wrath, Impiety, Fear? Treafon and Violence? whofe govemefs was Dtf- cord, feated in a regal throne, holding in one hand a bright fword, and in the other a bafin full of humane blood. VI. Ariofto, defcribing the Court of ^rj,faith,that in every part and corner of the fame were heard moft ftrange Echoes, fearful fhrieks, threatnings, anddi£ malcryes-, in the midft of this Palace was the Image o$ Venue? looking lad and penlive, full of lorrow, dif- contentand melancholy,leaning her head on her arm : hard by her was feated in a chair Fury in triumph : not far from her fate Death? with a bloody item counte- nance, offering upon an Altar in mens skulls, humane blood, confecrated with coals of fire, fetch'dfrom ma- ny Cities and Towns, burnt and ruinated by the tyran- ny of War. CHAP. Ch. 7. Of deputing Phoebus or Sol. 2 69 CHAP. VII. How the Antlents defifted Phoebus or Sol. I. *|i ItAcrobiHs faith that in AJfyria was found the l\l Statue of Apollo, Phoebus or Sol, the father of tAifculapms, in the form of a young man, and beardlefs, poliihed with Gold, who ftretching out his Arms, held in his right hand a Coachmans whip \ and in his left a thunderbolt with fome ears of Corn. The Tyrant of Syracufe, Dionyfius, with fury pulled off the bear A from the figure of jfcfculapius, faying it was very incongruous that the father fiwuld be beardlefs, and the fon have one fs exceeding long. II. Bufebius faith that in Egypt the Image of Sol was fet in a fhip, carried up, and fupported by a Crocodile : and that they (before letters were invented) framed the (hape of the Sun, by a Scepter, in the top of which was dexteroufly engraven an eye. The Scep'er fgnified Government : the Eye, the power which over-fees and beholds all things. III. The Lacedemonians depicted Apollo with four cars, and as many hands. By which was fignified the judgment and prudence of Gad being fwift and ready to hear, but (low tofpeak^ and from thence grew that proverb among the Grecians. IV. Herodotus reporteth that the Phoenicians had the Statue of the Sun made in black ftone, large and fpaci- ousat bottom, but fharp and narrow at top, which they boafted to have had from Heaven. V. Lattantius faith that mPerfia, Phoebus ox Apollo was their chiefeft God, and was thus defcribed •, he had S $ the lyo Polygraphias. Lib. 4. the head of a Lyon habited according to the Perfian cu- ftom,wearing on his head fuch ornaments as the women of Per fun ufed, holding by main force a white Cow by the horns. The head of the Lion (licwcth the Suns dominion in the fign Leo :, the Cow f Jews the Moon^ whofe exaltation is Taurus : and hisforceabk holding, the Moons Eclipfe which jhe cannot avoid. VI. Panfaniai telleth that in Patra a City of Achaia, a metalline Statue ot Apollo was found in the proportion of an Ox or Cow. VII. Lucianus faith that the Afyrians fhaped him with a long beard (fhewing his perfection •, ) upon his breaft a fhield ^ in his right hand a fpear, in the top of which was Victoria \ in his left hand Anthos, or the Sun flower : this body was covered with a veftment upon which was painted the head QiMedufa^ from which dangled downwards many fwarms of makes \ on the one fide of him Eagles flying, on the other fide a lively Jslymph. VIII. The Egyptians compofed the Itatue of the Sun in the fhape of a man, with his head half fhaven. By the head half fliaven, is fignifxed that though his beauty or finning may be clouded for a time-, yet that he will return and beautifie the fame with hie prifiin bright- ik.) j j a) ifjc growing vj tve rjairs ( xvmirj Jigrttjie mi beams ) to their full extent and perfection again may de- vote. IX. Mirtianus thus defcribes him-, upon his head ( faith he) he wears a royal and gorgeous Crown, in- chafed with multitudes of precious Gems •, three of which beautifie his fore-head; fix his temples •, and three other the hindermoft part of the Crown : his hair hanging down in trefles, looks like refined Gold, and his Countenance wholly like flame : his veftment is Ch. 7. OfdepiBing Phoebus or Sol. 27 1 is thin, fubtil, and wrought with fine purple and gold *, in his right hani he holds a bright mield •, and in his left a flaming fire-brand : on his feet he hath two wings, befet with fiery Carbuncles. X. Eufebius writeth that in Elephantinopolis fa City in Egypi)the linage of Apollo was framed to the - y nefsofa man throughout the body, faveonly, that he had the head of aRam,with young and final) horns, and his afpect of a Cerulean and blewiih green, not unlike to that of the Sea. The head of the Kamfignif.es the Suns exaltation in tht fen Aries *, and the young horns the change or New of the Moonynade by her conjunction with the Sunjn which jhe loolzj blewijh. XI. He is alfo drawn with long curled golden hair, crowned with a lawrel in a purple robe a lilver bo his hand, fitting on a thione of Emeralds. There might yen fee withgreateft skill intexed, The portraiture of Phoebus lively drawn \ And his fair Sifters (I) ape thereto annexed, Whofe fhining parts feerndfhadow'd ore with ' And though With equal art both were explal And workmens care guv, r ,xh of xhem t\: . J.ae r Tet to the view great difference remain Inhabit^ fhape? afpebb, arJinthei; h For one of them mvift give the da ht : And ttf other reign Commandrefs of t he n > S . CHAR lyz Polygraphices. Lib. 4* CHAP. VIII. Bow the Antients depicted Venu$,i I. TTER Statue is framed in the fhape of amoft XI beautiful and young woman, Handing upright in a huge fhell of fifh, drawn by two other molt ugly and itrange Fifties, as Ovid at large noteth. W.Paufanias faith (lie is drawn in a Coach,throngh the airy pailages,with two white Doves(as Apuleius alfo af- firmeth)which are called the birds of Ferns. III. Horace and Vvrgil affirm that the Chariot of Ve- nus is drawn by two white Swans, of which Statins al- fo maketh mention, who faith that thofe birds are molt mild, innocent, and harmlefs, and therefore given unto Verms. IV. Praxiteles aji excellent engraver inthelfland of Gnidos, made her Image naked, and without clothes, as alio did the Grecians. By which was fignifed that ail luxurious and licentious people were by their inordinate lufts, like beafls deprived offenfe^andleft at it were naked and defpoiled of re af on y and understanding •, and oftentimes alfo gripped thereby of their riches, goods and eftates. XT J *fl-*~,+:,j, /oi*-V> +Ui+ *-]io T *. — !„.,.*.,: *... fr^txi^A and compofed the Image of Venus all armed like a Warriour, holding in one hand a fpear, in the other a fliield or target. And this was by reafon of a certain Vitlory which the women of that place got over their enemies, the people of Meflenia, which fuccefs they fuppofed to have proceeded from the ppwer and afffiance of Venus , as infpiring thefe ypomens hearts with courage, ftoutnefs and refolu- fton, VI. She Ch. 9. Of VepiEling Mercury, 27 j Vl.She is alfo depicted with yellow hair attired with black j a fcarlet, or elfe dun-coloured robe. . CHAP. IX. How the Antients dcpitfedMcKUry*. I. *T^HE Antients defcribed him in thefhape of a X young man without a beard, with two fmall wings fixed behind his moulders and ears, his body almoft all naked, fave that from his fhoulders depend- ed a thin vail, which winded and compafled about all hisbody -, in his right hand he held a golden purfe, and in his left a Caduce ns> or fnaky fraft' to wit, a (len- der white wand, about which two Serpents do anno- date and entwine themfelves, whole heads meet to- gether juft at the top, as their tails do at the lower end. This resemblance was called Concordia or Signum Pa- ris *, upon which it came topafs, that Embajfadours^and great wen in matters of State, carried always in their hand fuch a like ft off, and were called Caduceators. II. Apulems writeth that Mercury was a very youth, having very Ihort hair on his head of an Amber colour, and curled, having for a veltment only a fubtil and thin vail made of purple Silk. III. Martiamts Capella cefcribes him young, yet of a ftrong and well conipoled body, with certain young hairs of a yellowim colour fprouting out of his chin. IV. Paafamas faith that in a Province of Corinth, he was depicted like a young man carrying a ram upon his moulders: and that a Statue (brought from Ar- cadia 274 Tolygrapbices. Lib. 4. cadi a unto Rome ) erected in the temple of Jupiter Olym- picHSj had on its head a helmet of engraven fteel ; and over his moulder, a coat, who held under his arm the Image of a ram. V. Among fbme of the Egyptians his Image was fra- med with a head like a dog's, holding in his right hand a Caduceus or fnaky wand •, making with his left a green bough of a Palm. By the he ad of the dog was underfloodfubtilty and crafti- ness {no be aft- being fofubtil as a dog *, ) by the fnaky wand the power of wifdom and Eloquence In producing of peace? figni- fed by the green palm. VI. By fome he was depicted in the fimilitude of a very aged man, his head almoftbald, faving that on the fides there remained fome few hairs, Ihort and curled •, his look grim, fevere and fowre -, his com- plexion of a tawny, antient hue ; his upper garment, of a Lions skin \ in his right hand a huge pole-ax, in his left hand an Iron bow : at his back hanging a Qui- ver of fteel- headed arrows : to the end of his tongue were faftned many fmall chains of Gold, at whofeends were tyed multitudes of all forts of men, which he feemed to draw unto him :, looking always backward, to behold the innumerable troops of people following him. By this description is fignified the all powerful and at. tractive -venue of Eloquence ", which by his age is under - ftood to be found only in old-, wife and experienced men-, o£ being in them more mature andperfecl, than in thofe of younger years? of which Homer fpeaks at large in his Commendation and Praife of Neftor : from whofe mouth (faith he} plentifully rolled forth mofi pie aj ant and dul- cidfireams *, whofe pen dtfi tiled Cryflalline drops of deli- cious fweetnefs 1 whofe works and fruit s fo compleatly adorned with golden fentences, ajfwageth the malice of time ', and mid- gateth Ch. i o. DepiBing Diana or Luna, 275 gateth and allajcth the fpight of forget fulnefs, that his per- petuity is engraven in the brafs-kaved books of eternal memo- ry ', never to be blotted out. VII. He is alfo drawn with long curled yellow hair in a coat of flame colour, with a mantle purely white,trim- med with Gold and Silver; his Beaver white,with white feathers, hisShooes Golden, his Rod Silver. CHAP. X. Hove the Antients depicted Diana or Luna. L Diana, Cynthia, Lucina or Luna was according to Propertius depicted in the likenefs of a young beautiful virgin •, having on either lide of her forehead two fmall glittering horns, newly putting forth, drawn through the air in a purple colored Coach, by two fwift paced horfes, the one of a fad Colour, the other of a white. Thcfe two differing horfes Boccace faith, flieyy that (lie hath power both in the day and night. II. Claudianm faith that her Chariot is drawn by two white Bullocks,(which Image the Egyptians worfhipped with great fceal and reverence)having one of their flanks befpotted with divers ftars,and on their heads two fuch fharp horns,as the Moon hath in her chiefeft wane. III. Cicero defcribes her ftatue (which he brought out of a temple in Cicilia ) of a wonderful height, and large dimenfion, the whole body covered with a thin vail, of a youthful afpec% holding in her right hand a lively burning torch, and in her left an Ivory bow, with a Quiver of Silver-headed arrows hanging at her back. IV. The 27 6 Qolygraphices. Lib. 4. IV. The Poets (who call her the goddefs of hunting and imperial governefs of Woods and Groves)defcribe her in the habit of a young Nymph, with her bow ready bent in her hand,and a Quiver of arrows hanging by her left fide*,a fwift paced Grey-hound faft tyed to her right fide, with a collar about his neckband after her following troops of Sylvan Virgins, which are chaft, and are called the Nymphs of Diana. V. Thefe Virgins and VotrefTes of the Goddefs, we thus defcribe. Scarce mounted Sol upon his glorious Car, When ore the lofty hills, and lowly plain-, Running apace, you might perceive afar A Troop of Amaz,ons to poft amain. But when they nearer came unto your view, Tou might difcernDhnz and her Crew. A carelefs crew of lively Nymphs, defpifmg The joyous pleafures and delights of love ', Wafiing their days in rural [ports devifmg : Which know no other, nor will other prove. Wing d with defire to overtake the chafe, Away they flung with unrefified pace. Their necks and purple veined arms are bare. And from their Ivory flioulders to their knee, A C*7&»««r»/*w*w«V.4,,;« -'--•- -i Through which a piercing eye might chance to fee. Clofe to their bodies vs the fame engine d, Bedecked with pie afing flowers there inferted. Each in her hand a Silver bow doth hold, With well-fiord Quivers hanging at their backs : Whofe arrows being fpent they may be bold To borrow freely of each others packs. Thus are thefe nimble shipping Nymphs difplayd, That do attend that Goddefs, Qneen and Maid. VI. In Chap. 1 1 . Of de fitting Janus. 177 VI. In Arcadia faith Vaufanias was a ftatue of Diana, covered over with the skin of aHind,and from her moul- ders hung a Quiver of Arrows •, in one hand a burning Lamp, the other leaning upon the heads of two fer- pents, and before her feet a hound. VII. The Egyptians worfhipped her under the name of I6s\ and depi&ured her covered with a black and fable veftment,in token that (he her felf giveth no light j holding in one hand a Cymbal, in the other an earthen veflel of water, upon which as Servius faith, many thought her to be the Genius of Egypt. By the Cymbal isfiewed the nmrmurings and roarings of Nilus, when it overflows Egypt ', and by the other vejjel the nature of the Country , which ismoift and full of lakes fools and rivers. VIII. She is alio depicted with yellow hair, a glafs green mantle, trimmed with Silver - buskins Silver ; bow Golden, Quiver of various colours. IX. Nymph* Diana in white linnen to denote their Virginity, and their garments girt about them, their arms and moulders naked, bows in their hands, and ar- rows by their fides. CHAP. XI. How the Antients depicJedJatiuS. I. TAnns is depicted with two faces ; in the one of J his hands is a long rod or wand :, in the other a Key. The two faces ofjams/ignifie time ; the one being wither- ed and hoary, fiews time fafi , the other yomhfd and beard- itfs, time to come, II. Pliny 27 g (Polygraphkes . Lib. 4. II. Pliny faith that Numa King of the Roman s, caufed theftatue of Jams to be hewed outinfuch fort,thatthe fingers of his hands appeared to be three hundred fixty five, to (hew that he was God of the year, whereupon they called the firft month of the year Januarins, from Janm their God. Vnder the feet of Janus is oftentimes placed twelve Altars, (hewing thereby the months of the year, or figns of the Zodiackjy through which Sol makes his revolu- tion. III. The Phoenicians, as Cicero and Macrobim re- port, framed his Image in the form of a ferpent, hold- ing her tail in her mouth, and continually turning round. IV. Some depidedj^w with four faces, fas were thofe ftatues which were found in divers places of T»f- cany. By the four faces was fignified the four feafons of the year, Spring,Summer, Autumn, and Winter : which fome thinks to be Venus, Ceres, Bacchus and Vulcan •, andfometimes the winds with i*Eolus their Commander. CHA P. XII. How the Aniients deputed Aurora. I. T TQmer defcribes her like a young Virgin, having Xl her hair difhevelled, and hanging loofe about her Ihoulders being of the colour of the pureft gold,lit- ting in si golden chair, with all her veftments of that hue and colour. II. Virgil faith, that upon the inftant time of the fa- ble nights departure , Ihe cometh with one of her hands Chap, i j. Of depitting Juno. 279 hands full of Rofes, Gilliflowers and Lillies, taken out of a basket which fhe carries in the other hand, which fhe befprinkles on the marble pavement of the lower Heavens, adorning the Sun with unfpeakable beauty. III. Others defcribe her, holding in one hand a fla- ming torch, and drawn in a gorgeous and ftar-befpot- ted Chariot, by winged Pegafus •, which favour fhe obtained of Jnpter by many importunate requefts,pre- fently after the downfal of Bellerophon. IV. She is as it were the Herald and MefTenger of Thcebns, who receives her being from the vertue of his beams *, and is no other but that rubicund and Vermillion blufh in Heaven, which So/'s firft appea- rance worketh in the Orient , and from thence de- fending beautifies our Hemifihere with fuch a refplem dency. V. She is alfb depicted in a purple robe, in a blew mantle fring'd with Silver. CHAP. XIII. How the Antients depitfed Juno. I. QHE was fet forth by the Antients like a middle O aged woman, holding in one hand a Silver vef- fel, in the other a iharp Spear : and Home r faith fhe was drawn in a Chariot glittering with precious ftones } whofe wheels were Fbony, and their nails finefilver, mounted upon a Silver Seat-, and drawn with horfes, which were faftned with chains of Gold. II. She is oftentimes depicted with a Scepter in her hand, 280 (Potygraphices. Lib. 4* hand, to (hew that flie hath the bellowing of Govern- ments, Authorities and Kingdoms. III. Martianus depi&s her ( fitting in a chair un- der Jtqher) with a thin veil over her head, with a Coronet upon it,inchafed and adorned with many pre- cious Jewels ; her inward veftment fine and glittering, over which depended a mantle of a fad and darkifh colour, yet with a fecret ihining beauty , her mooes of an obfcure and fable colour-, in her right hand a thunberbolt *, and in her other a loud noifed Cym- bal. IM.Panfanias faith that in a temple in Corimhhsx fta- tue(made of Gold and Ivory) was adorned with a glori- ous Crown, on which was infculped the pictures of the Graces •, with a Pomegranate in the one hand,and a Scep- ter(on the top of which a Cuckow) in the other.for that J//p;'ffr,when he was firft enamoured of ^^transform- ed himfelf into that bird. Touching this flory ( and others of like kmd ) Pau- fanias/^'^, that although he did not believe fuch things to be true, nor any others, which are fo written of the Gods \ yet faith he, they are not altogether to be rejected, in that there were no fuch things reported but that they were implead ed and filled with myfieries, and carried in themj elves art inward meaning, and fecret undemanding, the which no doubt fome miqfjt by their writings have unfliadowed, if the tyranny offore-pajfed times had not defiroyed and obliterated the fame. V. Tertullian writeth that in Argos a City in Greece? the ftatueof Juno was covered all over with the boughs of a Vine, and underneath her feet lay the skin of a Li- on, which difcovei ed the hatred and difdain (he bare to- wards Bacchus and Hercules } to whomf as the Poets fay) flie was ftep-mother. VI. Some have painted h^r a middle aged woman, holding Chap. 14. DepiBing Ops Or TelluS. 281 holding in one hand a poppey-flower or head 5 with a yoke or pair of fetters lying at her feet. By the yoke was meant the hand of marriage , which tyeth man and Wife together *, and by the Poppey, fruit* fulnefs or the innumerable iffue of children, which are brought forth into the world ( fignifed by the roundnefs of the Poppey head, and its numberlefs feeds therein con- tained, ) From hence manyfuppofe her to be thegoddefs of marriage. VII. Sheisalfo painted with black Hair and Eyes, adorned with a sky-coloured mantle,or pied •, wrought with Gold and Peacocks eyes *, like the orient circles in the Peacocks trains. CHAP. XIV. How the Antients deficted Ops or Tellus, I. Ti ftArtianus faith, that Ops ( the wife of Saturn ) IV J. is an old woman, of great bignefs, continue ally bringing forth children, with whom fhe is enconv palled and let round, going in a green veltment, with a veil over her body , fpotted with divers colours, wrought with infinite curious knots, and fet with all forts of Gems and Metals. IL Varro ( out of Boccdce ) thus defcribes her : me is crowned ( faith hej with a Crown infculpt with Caftles and Towers :, her apparel green, overfhaded with boughs •, in the one hand a Scepter, in the other a Ball or Globe*, and near to her a Chariot of four wheels, drawn by four Lions. By the Crown is fignified the habitations of the earth *, by the greennefs and boughs , the increafe thereof •, T by 28z Volygraphkes'. Lib. 4. by the Scepter, the Kingdoms and Governments of the world ? by the Ball, the ronndnefs thereof , by the Chariot , the conti- nual motion, change and alteration of things', by the Lions? the wifdom and firength of mankind, by which things are carried on and managed. III. Jfidoms faith,that this Goddefs was painted hold- ing a key in one of her hands : which mews, that in the winter the bowels of the earth are locked up by reafon of cold •, which at the approach of Spring and Sum- mer is unlocked again. IV. She was fometimes depicted in the form of an anticnt woman, having her head circumcincl with ears of corn, holding in her hand apoppey-head : drawn in a Chariot ( as Orpheus faith ) with two fierce and un- tamed Dragons. V. The earth is alfo called Ceres, which many have depicted with torches , lights and fire-brands in her hands ', as Praxiteles in a temple, ieated upon a pro- montory of Attica. VI. She is alfo pictured in a long green mantle. CHAP. XV. Hm the Antients depicted Neptune and the Sea Gods. I. TW' TEptttne among the Antients is depainted with _L\ feveral countenances, fometimes with mild and pleafant looks, fometimes with lowring and fad, and at other times with a mad , furious and angry afpect •, naked, holding in his hand a lilver trident or forked mace, ftanding upright in the concavity of a great Sea (hell , forcibly drawn by two monftrous horfes, Chap, i j. 0/D^'ffwjj Neptune: 283 horfes, which from the middle downwards have the proportioned fhape of fifties, as Statins faith. TW variety ofAfpecis ( according to Virgil <*» CHAP. XX. How the Antients deptted Minerva, or Pallas. I- TV ftlnerva ( as taken for Bellona ) as Licophrones IV 1 faith, was depi&ed with a flaming fire-brand in her hand by the Antients. II. Molt Writers have defcribed Minerva in the fhape of a young woman, of a lively and frefli coun- tenance, yet of an angry look , fix'd ftedfaft eye of a blewiih green colour, compleatly armed at all wea- pons, with a long Spear in the one hand, and in the other a Cryfral fbield, or target : upon her helmet a garland of Olive branches, and two children, Fear and Horror, by her fide with naked knives in their hands, feeming to threaten one another. III. Paufanias faith, that in Greece-, the ftatue of Mi- nerva was made with an helmet, on the top of which was the fhape of zSphynx •, and on the iides thereof, two carved Griffins. IV. Phidias making her ftatue in Greece, placed on the top of her.Helmet the form of a Cock. V. She was alfo painted in Greece, fitting on a ftool, and drawing forth little fmall threads from a diftaff; for that the Antients luppofed her to be the lnventrefs of Spinning and the like. VI. Laftly (he is depicted with a blew mantle em- broider'd with Silver : and is called the Goddefs of Wifdom. CHAP. 29 o Volygrapbices. Lib. 4V CHAP. XXI. How the Antients dcpitted Vulcan. I. T TVlcan is depicted, ftanding, working and ham- V mering in a Smiths forge, on the hill <^Stna y framing Thunderbolts for Jupiter, and faihioning Ar- rows for the God of love. The opinions which the An- tients had of Vulcan were various, in which refpetl he is fh aped fometimes in one form, fometimes in another. II. Some make him lame of one leg, of a very black and fwarthy complexion, as it were all fmoaky •, of a general ill fhaped proportion in all his Lineaments % and becaufe that he is the husband of Venus, often de- picture her with him. III. Alexander Neapolitanus relateth , that in one place of Egypt was erected the ftatue of Vulcan, which held in one of its hands, the true and lively proportion of a mole •, and in his other hand a Thunderbolt. The mole was fo placed , becaufe they thought he fent ttnfpeakable numbers of moles among them, as a plague to them, which did eat, gnaw and dejlroy every thing which was good. IV. He is alfo painted lame in a fcarlet robe. CHAP. XXII. Hove the Antients depicted Bacchus. I. T^HtlofcratHs faith, that his ftatue was framed in X the likenels of a young man without a beard, of a corpulent and grofs body, his face of ?n high co- lour Chap. 22. Of Defining Bacchus. 29 1 lour and big *, about his head a garland of Ivy leaves •, upon his temples two fmall horns •, and clofe by his fide a certain beaft, called a Leopard or Panther. This description is drawn from the nature of wine, (of which as the Poets feign, Bacchus is the God ) whofe in- venter and finder out was certainly Noah, which not only Mofes, but alfo Jofephus and La&antius fpecially af- firm ^ wherefore fome fuppofe him t» be this God Bacchus. II. Claudianus faith , that his Image or Statue is made all naked *, thereby fhewing the nakednefs of thofe which abufe themfelves with wine , by which they reveal and open thofe things which ought to be concealed and kept hid. III. Dwdoms Siculus faith , that Bacchus among the Grecians was depicted in two feveral forms, the one of a very aged man, with a long beard, ftifFand thick \ the other of youthful years, of a pleafantand amorous afpect By the firfi is (l)ewedthe ejfettsof the intemperate ufe of wine-, which overcomes nature and brings with i* old age : by the other, how it chfrifkes and revives the heart, ufed moderately. IV. Macrobius faith, that Bacchus was framed fome- times in the likenefs of a young child, fometimes of a youth, fometimes of a man; and fometimes in the likenefs of decrepit old age. By thefe was Jigmfied the four feafons of the year, the vine being dcdcatedto Sol, in whom they allexifl. V. This Picture was made in the likenefs of a Bull ( among the Cyenians, a people inhabiting the farther part of Perfia. ) The reafon hereof was bccaufe Proferpina (the daugh- ter of Jove ) brought him forth in that form. VI. Phibflratus faith, that Bacchus was oftentimes crawa %<)X i ^™a ,-u ~ t~, — . <~ v . ■* - ■ c , » jJiawvMniu, luirttc ui a voung Vir- gin of a beauteous and pleafant afped, holding Out her hand to another, behind thelb, the Imagebf a young child, leaning with one of its arms upon the The Matronis that Fortune, which is already paft', the y^^rgin that which now is : and the iL, child beyondthem both, is thatwhich is to come. * l y. XzwtHsCuniHs faith, that among the people of Scythia^ Chap. 2 j. Of VeplBing Fortune. 295 Scythia, fortune was depicted in the form of a woman without feet, having round about her at her right hand a number of little wings. Being without feet, (hews that Jhe never ftands firm ; and the many wings Jhew, that her gifts and favours are no fooner given, but are prefently loft, and do as it were fly away again, before they be fully poffeffed. VI. Alexander Neapolitanus relateth, that in Greece^ her Image was made wholly of Glafs ; to fhew that her favours are brittle , and fubje& to Hidden decayes. VII. Cebes the Philofopher refembled Fortune unto a Comedy , in which many Adors appear often as Kings and great Monarchs - and preiently after become poor hihermen, flaves, bond-men , and the like. VlU. Socrates compared her to a Theatre, or com- mon meeting place, where without all order or obfer- vance men take their places and feats, without reipect to the dignity of any. Hereby is jhewed, that fie ( without refpecl of birth, Worth, merit or ft ate,) blindly, unadvifedly, and with- out any order or reafon , beftows felicities , riches and favours. m IX. In JEgira, a City of Achaia, Fortune was drawn m the fhape of a beautiful woman , who held in one of her hands a Cornucopia; in the other, the bov Cupid. By which isfignified (as Paufanias faith) that beau- ty without riches avails nothing : and indeed I may fay he is doubly fonunate, who in his love enjoys the fruition of both beauty and riches : but he is happy in the fuper- lative degree, who with the other two meets with vertue and love alfo. X. Cnaldm faith, that Fowm was with fome de- picted *9<$ Volygraphices. Lib. 4. pitted ridingonahorfe galloping-, with which fwift- nefs fliefeemsto pafs invifible, after whom foUowcth Deftmy with great wrath and fury, holding i n her hand heart " 1 ' ■* aiming t0 ^ Ilke ™«S *y her Mnf¥»g. i* pgmped her mutability. See Seel:. 4. Chap. 28. whereJJvista^asoneofthepomrs ■ 1 1 ■ m CHAP. XXIV. Hon rertue, Truth, Peace, Honour, Fame and Opinion were depitfed. I. XTErtw m Greece vm made in the form of a ViU V grtm, jlikc i a grave and aufbere woman; fitting alon h e T n 5 f ° Urr 3 uaredftone ' me ^choly, anS ing her head upon her knees. y ' ^ Being* Pilgrim ,Jhe»sJhe hath no refting place, fecure abode, or certain habitation upon the earth : the form of her jkm^em her Ufe to be full of troubles, dan^Mffil andmiferus. Seethe i.SefconofChap. \ Q . cfthi'sBooC HjEcangufla via horrendis fcatetundiquemonitris, bt vita innumens eft mterciufa periclis. Sed tamen mcolumes hac virtus ducit alumnos -*-«• j- -vu,, uc F v, 3 muL 1UUC vacinet. Proclamat longefpes, hicfunt dignalaboris Frsmia, & excipient mordaces gaudia curas. J'ax, iincera quies nullo temeranda dolore, Lsctitia hie habitant longum, line fine, per *vum. *jw* Movers do this narrow paffage bound, J*nd deadly dangers it encompass round, ret venue doth her Followers fafely guide, Left theyjhouldgo aftray on either fide. C&.if Of£>ef)iEtingTruth,i8ing Silence ,- " ren, Cornu, an horn, andpp Karan, Luceo, to mine. " The vulgar tranflation (^oi Exodus 34.29. 35.)- a- " grees with the former, to wit •, Ignorabat quod cor- c rrnta effet fades ejus. Qui videbant faciem Molls effe ^cornutam. The tranflation ofPaulus Fagm is other- lc wife, viz. Mofes nefeiebat quod multus effet fplendor "gloria vult its ejus. Et vidcrunt filii Iiracl quod mult a "effel Ch. 16. Antients depitt. Wifemen, &c 301 u ejfet dark as gloria faciei Mofis. Tremelius and Ju- u nius have it thus, ut ignorant Mofche fplendidam ejfe u fa&am cutem faciei fit*. Quod fplendida faUa ejfet u cutis faciei Mofchis : agreeing with the Septuagint, c< Ac/lS^rtf,/ n o-^'i tk y?a(j<.ct>T@~ ts nryadnrx, glorifcatus ct eft afpettus cutis feu colons faciei. VI. But Mofes is generally depi&ed with bright hair, a very beautiful Vifage,with radiant feint illations about his head, in form of hoarinefs, which in Painting is cal- led Glory. VII. Alexander the great, with brown hair, and a ruddy complexion, riding upon his horfe ; but by fome riding upon an Elephant. The reafon of this is hard to he difcerned; for as much as I find not in hijlory, that ever he ufed that beafi in his Armies, much kfs in his own perfon : except it were for that remarkable battel which he fought with Porus King of India, wherein were many Elephants: In which himfelf (as Curtius, Arianus and Plutarch relate) Was on horfebackj the name of which btafiyet lives, and is famous in hifiory to this day. VIII. Numa Pompilius with white hair Crowned with a Silvejbend or Diadem -, his robe crimfon trimmed with Gold •, his mantle yellow trimmed with Silver *, his buskins watchct and filver. IX. tALneas the Trojan Prince in a purple mantle trimmed with Gold. X. David (the King of Ifraet) with brown hair,a rud- dy complexion and a long beard. XI. Elizabeth Queen of England, pale-faced, light brown hair, and gray-eyed. XII. Dido Qyeen of Carthage in a purple or fcarlet mantle, her under-garments ' purple •, a Golden Qui- ver ; her hair yellow, tyed up with fpangles and knots of Gold. U % XUI. tot Polygraphices, Lib. 4. XIL Cnflavus Jdolphns King of Sweden with yellow fair. XIV. Mahomt the Turks, g? eat Prophet, in garments all of green. XV. German Emperonrs in a Violet-coloured robe, watchet, or light-coloured. XVI. Roman Emferours, with yellow Carrufters embroidered with Silver •, the labels of their fieeves, and fhort bafes of watchet •, the under fleeves, and long ftockings white *, a Lawrel wreath, with a Silver jewel before •, and rays of Gold , ifluing from the wreath. XVII. Pythagoras in white garments with a Crown of Gold. XVIII. Empedocles , in Violet, murry, or pur- ple, and fo generally the reft of the Grecian Philofo- fhers. XIX. -Erafmus Roter damns, yellow haired, gray- eyed, and fomewhat pale. CHAP. XXVII. The Tainting of the Sibyls, J. QlbylU Agrtya, a women in years, inarofeal gar- Gf ment, II. Sibylla Libyca an elderly woman, crowned with a garland of flowers, in purple garments. III. Sibylla Delphica, with a black garment, a young woman with a horn in her hand. IV. Sibylla Phrygia'y in red garments, having an old Saturnian hard favoured face. y. Sibylla HcrophiUy a young woman very fair in apm> Ch. 27. Of Vainting the Sibyls. joj a purple garment, and head covered with a vail of Lawn. VI. Sibylla Europea, a comely young woman,having a high, red-coloured face, a fine vail on her head, and clad in a garment of Gold work. VII. Sibylla Perfica, with a white vail, and a golden garment. VIII. Sibylla Samiafi middle aged woman, clothed in Willow weeds, having a palm in her hand. IX. Sibylla Hellefpontica, a young woman in green garments, with a round, lovely, frefh coloured face j holding in her left hand a Book •, and in her right hand a Pen. KSibylldTiburtina^n old woman in purple garments, of a hard vifage, holding in her Apron the books of the Sibylls. Thefe SihyWs for their Prophecies of Chrift are in high efteem : they are ten in number as Varro faith , yet others make twelve-, of which we are not fatisfied *, Boyfardus in his Treatise of divination, be/ides thefe ten addeth two others, Epirotica and iEgyptia. Some , a* Martianus, - will have but two •, Pliny and Solinus, but three ', iElian four ', and Salmafius but the fir ft feven. They are g enerally defcribed as young women, yetfome were old,as (lie that fold the books unto Taic^xxxifromwhence we conclude the Licen- tia pi&oria is very large. U 4 CHAP. J04 Polygraphices. Lib. 4. CHAP. XXVIII. The Tainting of Arts ^ Vertnes^ Tafjions and mi- nor Cods* I. A Rkhmetickjs painted in cloth of Gold : Geome- JL\ try fallow faced, a green mantle fringed with Silver, and a Silver wand in her right hand : Jftrono- tny with a Silver Creflant on her fore-head, an azure mantle, a watchet Scarf, with golden Stars. II. Faith is painted in white garments, with a cup of Gold : Hope in blew, with a Silver Anchor : Charity in yellow robes •, on her head a tyre of Gold with pre- cious {tones •, her chair Ivory. III. Religion in a Silver vail, with a garment, or mantle of white : Jn^ice in a white robe, and a white mantle-, with a Coronet of Silver and white buskins : Jtmocency in white. IV. Concord in a sky-coloured robe, and a yellow mantle ^ Peace in white, fcattered with liars, or a carna- tion mantle fringed with Gold, a vail of Silver, green buskins, and a palm in her hand in black : Unanimity in a blew robe, mantle and buskins •, with a thaplct of frjew Liiiies. V. Wifdom in a white robe, blew mantle, feeded with liars : Law in purple robes, feeded with Golden ftars •, a mantle of Carnation fringed with Gold ♦, purple and yellow buskins : Government in Armour. VI. Watchfulness, in a yellow robe : a fable mantle fringed with Silver, andfecded with waking eyes-, a chaplet of turnfole , in her right hand a Lamp \ in her left, a Bell : Confidence in 3, particoloured garment : Mo- (tejly in blew. VII. ptmiiy Ch. l8. Tainting Arts, Verities t&c 30J VII. Eternity in blew, feeded with Golden ftars; the Sod in white garments, branched with Gold and Pearl •, and crowned with a Garland of Rofes : Felici- ty, in purple trimmed with Silver. VIII. Love, in Crimfon fringed with Gold, a flame- coloured mantle, a Chaplet of red and white Roles : Natural- affettion, in Citron colour : Envy, in a difco- loured garment full of eyes. IX. Joy, in a green robe, and a mantle of divers colours, embroidered with flowers-, a garland of Myr- tle •, in her right hand a Cryflal Cruife , in her left a Golden Cup: Pleafure in light garments, trimmed with Silver and Gold : Laughter in feveral colours. X. Wit , in a difcoloured mantle : Jollity , in flame colour •• Pafiime in purple trimmed with Gold. XI. Opinion in black Velvet, black cap, with a white fall : Impudence, in a party-coloured garment : Auda- city, in blufh colour. XII. Honour, in a purple robe, wrought with Gold : Liberty, in white .« Safety, in Carnation. XIII. Cupid was painted (by Zeuxis) in a green robe : Hymen, in long yellow hair, in a purple or Saffron co- loured mantle : Triton ( Neptunes Trumpeter) with a blew skin, in a purple mantle. XIV. Vrania, in a mantle of azure, filled with lamps: Jlflrea the Goddefs of Juftice, in a Crimfon mantle, trimmed with Silver : the Graces all alike, as Sifters, in Silver robes. XV. Tellus, the Goddefs of the Earth in a green mantle: Ceres, with yellow hair, and a ftraw-co- loured mantle trimmed with Silver : Fcfta, daughter of Saturn, in white garments rilled with flames, XVI. Flora, jo<$ (Polygrapbices. Lib. 4. XVI. Flora in a mantle of divers colours: Prefer- pim in a black mantle, trimmed with Gold flames : Echo , ( the Goddefs of the Air and daughter of fpeech, the intirely beloved of Pan) is an invifible God- defs. Aufonus GW//*j,reporteth that me hath oftentimes dif- fwaded,and reprehended fuch, who would undertake to depaint her,and repeats the fame in an Epigram, whofe fence in Englifh is this. Surceafe thoumedlmg Artiflthy endeavour. Who for thy skill haft re aft fuch long Uv dfamel Strive not to paint my body, fhape, for never Did any humane Eyes behold the fame. In concave caverns of the Earth I dwell. Daughter ot\) Air, and of each tatling voice, In Woods and hollow dales- J build my Cell, Joying to re-report the leaf: heard noife, To grief oppref, and men difconfolate, That tell each grove their fouls vexation, Their dying agonies I aggravate, By their dole accents iteration. And he that will defcribe my form aright, Muft jltape aformlcfsfound or airyfprite. CHAP. XIX. To exprefs the Powtrs. I. T7 Temity, It is exprefled in the form of a fair MJj Lady, having three heads, fignifying Time paft, prefent, and to come •, in her left hand a Circle, pointing with the fore finger of her right hand up to 1 Heaven: Ch. 29. Of exprefsing the Towers. 307 Heaven : the Circle fignifies fhe hath neither beginning nor end. In the Medals of Trajan, (he was figured red, fitting up- on a Sphear, with the Sun in one hand, and the Moon in the other : ( by her fitting is fignified perpetual con- ftancy.) In the Medals of Fauftina, jhe is drawn with a Vail, and in her right hand the Globe of the World. Boccace, writing of the Progenie of the Gods, faith that the Antients derived it from Demogorgon, as the prin- cipal andfirft of them all, who inhabited in the middle or Center of the "Earth, encircled round about, and circum- vefted with a dark and obfufcate cloud, breathing from his mouth, a certain liquid humidity. But however what Eternity is,thc name doth clearly dif co- ver, containing in* it felf all Worlds and Ages, and not limi- ted, or me afar ed by any fpace of time. Claudius defcribes it by a Serpent that encompaffeth round with her body, the Cave or Den wherein it lyeth , fo as making a Circle, flie holds in her mouth the end of her tail, which with the ./Egyptians was the emblem of a year. All in a Circle thus fie fits involved, Whofefirm tenacity is ne'er diffolvd : She fends forth times, and them recalls again r Ages to come, andpaft fie doth retain. But according to Boccace, as Eternity hath an abfohite command over all times, fo (lie lives far hence infome re- mote and unknown vale, where humane fteps never approach- ed, but is even tin found out of the cceleftial inhabitants, thofe happy fouls, who ft and before the pre fence of the gre ate ft, that only knows all things. 11. Time, It is drawn {landing upon an old ruine > winged, jo8 (Polygrdphices. Lib. 4. w inged, and with Iron teeth. Or thus, An old man in a garment of liars \ upon his head a garland of rofes, ears of corn, and dry flicks, ftanding upon the Zodi- ack, with a looking-glafs in his hand \ two children at his feet, the one fat, the other lean, writing both in one book ; upon the head of one the Sun, upon the other the Moon. Or thus, An old man, bald behind, winged, with a fithe and an hour-glafs, having a lock of hair on his forehead. III. Fate, A man in a fair, long, flaxen robe, looking upwards to two bright flars encompailed with thick clouds, from whence hangs a golden chain. IV. Fortune, A naked Lady having an Infign or Sail overfhadowing her, Handing upon a Globe or ball. Laiftantius faith that Fortune is a vain, idle andfenfe- lefs name , ft.ewing forth mans weahnefs in attributing any thing thereto', which Marcus Tullius confirmeth, where he faith that this name of Fortune, w a: fir ft brought in to cover the ignorance of man. Alexander Ncopoli- tanus faith that in Praeaelle in a temple jhe was depicted inthefoapeandformoftwoftfters, both conjoined in one and the fame ft ante. Paulanias^f/j that her moft ancient ftatue was that whkh BupahlSwWc in Greece in (liape of a woman, upon who fe he ad was a round ball, and in one of her hands a Cornucopia. She is called the blind Goidefs, a*A biiytial T./i/Jm U\i ve/tCnn nf the Upfl-nwinrr nf Upy upcrm- '" — f 9 y> "J '—*ji-f* v J — - 'j- -•■-■£> 'J ■•"■ ' ft ant and mutable favours. Imperious Ruler of the worlds defigns, Lady of folace, pleafure and of pains : Like Tennis balls thou beat'il us to and fro, From favours todifgrace, from joy to woe ; From wars to peace, from rule to be commanded : But with unconltancy thou now art branded. Macrobius Chap.29. Of exprefs'wgthe Powers. 309 Macrobius Jk/Y& Jhe was fet forth with wings on her jhoulders, ( to jhew that foe was always at hand among men ) had by her fide the rudder of a Ship ( to jhew that foe doth rule and command} her J "elf placed upon a wheel, holding in her right hand a golden ball, and in the other a whip ; jhewing where jlw fmiled, wealth and ho- nour, and where fte frowned , c rojfes and mifery fiwuld follow. In Egypt Fortune was depicled like a Lady turning a great glafs wheel, on whofe top were many men playing, others a climbing up ', and others having attained it, pre- cipitating themfelves and falling down backagain. V. Equality, A Lady lighting two Torches at once. VI. Victory, Is exprefled by a Lady clad all in Gold, in one hand a helmet, in the other a Pomegranate : By the Helmet is meant force *, by the Pomegranate unity of wit and counfeU Auguftus drew her with wings ready to ftye, ftanding upon a Globe, with a Garland of Bays in one hand, in the other a Coronet of the Emperor, with thefe words Imperator Caefar. In the Medals of Odavius, fie is drawn with wings, fianding on a bafe, in one hand a palm, in the other a Crown of Gold. ^ VII. Peace, Is drawn like a Lady, holding in her right hand a wand or rod downwards towards the earth, over a hideous Serpent of iundry colours •, and with her other hand covering her face with a veil, as loth to behold ftrife or war. Txajzngavea Lady in her right hand an Olive branch, in her left a Cornucopia. In the Medals of Titus, a Lafly having in one hand an Olive branch, the other leading a Lamb and Wolf coupled by the ?:ecki * n one yoke- The Olive as always the emblem of peace. VIII. Providence, A Lady lifting up both her hands to Heaven with thele words Vrovidentia Deorum. Or this. 2 1 o (Polygraphices . Li b. 4. 1 thus, A Lady in a robe, in her right hand a Scepter, in her left a Cornucopia, with a Globe at her feet. VL.Concord, A Lady fitting,in her right hand a charger for facrifice,in her left zComucopiajNith the word Concor- dia. Or thus, A fair Virgin, holding in one hand a Pome- granate ; in the other a Mirtle bunch. The nature of thefe trees are fuch, that if planted though a qoodfpace one from another, they will meet and with twi- ning embrace one another* X.F(7pc i-\f fi<<1 Ac ntlmU^ f i. A - — ^-.n.' 1 .;.,_.., ^ ^„ .... UVIU5*, ».iiv ju« vv. Liiv piOLCCLlUU rtllU 111(11 gc of mountains, herbs, woods,meadows, rivers,trees,and generally of the whole life of man. III. Firfi, Napjese, Nymphs of the Mountains. Let them be drawn of a fweet and gracious afpect , in green mantles, girded about in the mid- dle -, and upon their heads garlands of honey- fuckles, wild-rofes, tyme and the like ; their actions, dancing in a ring , making garlands, or gathering flowers. They Chap. ji. Of lymphs. 317 7 hey are fo called from Nct-ms, the top of an hill,or woody valley. IV. Secondly, Dryades, Nymphs of the woods. Draw thefe lefs fair than the former, of a brown or tawny complexion, hair thick like mofs, and their at- tire of a dark green. They are fo called from A?w? an Oa\^ having their he- ginning with trees , and dying again with them. V. Thirdly, Naiades Nymphs of the floods. Draw them beautiful, with arms and legs naked, their hair clear as Cryftal-, upon their heads garlands of water-crefTes, with red leaves: their actions, pour- ing out water. They are fo called from Nw> to flow, or bubble as wa- ter doth. VI. Thetis, a Lady of a brown complexion , her hair fcattered about her moulders , crowned with a Coronet of Periwincle and Efcallop (hells, in a mantle of Sea-green , with chains and bracelets of Amber about her Neck and Arms, and a branch of red Coral in her hand. VII. Galatea, a molt beautiful young Virgin , her hair carelefly falling about her moulders like filver threads, and at each ear a fair pearl with a double fixing of them ( fometimes ) about her Neck and left Arm a mantle of pure thin and fine white, waving as it were by the gentle breathing of the air, viewing in her hand a fpunge made of Sea-froth, jhe is fo called from y£KAjac,milkz VIII. Iris, a Nymph with large wings, extended like to a femicircle, the plumes fet in rows of divers co- lours, as yellow, green, red, blew or purple •, her hair hanging before her eyes, her breafts like clouds, drops of water falling from her body, and in her hand Jrisj or the Flower-de-luce. X 3 Virgil }ift tPolygraphhes. J^ib. 4. Virgil makes her the meflenger of Jam (where fhe is ta!.en for the air,) when he faith, Jrin deCcelomipt Saturnia Juno. IK.Nymvha Dian&\ Let them be cloathed in white linnen to denote their Virginity, and their garments girt about them-, their Arms and Shoulders naked ; bows in their hands, and arrows by their fides. X. Aurora, the Morning. A young Virgin with car- nation wings and a yellow mantle •, in her forehead a itar, and Golden Sun-beams from the Crown of her head, riding upon Tegafm, with a viol of dew in one hand, and various flowers in the other , which (he feat- tereth upon the earth. CHAP. XXXIII. Of the jMwe Mufes. I. f^Lio, She is drawn with a Coronet of Bays •, in \>J her right hand a Trumpet \ in her left a Book, upon which may be written Hifioria ) her name is from praife or glory. II. Euterpe, Is crowned with a gailand of flowers, holding in each hand fundi y wind infer umenrs •, her name is from giving delight. ULThalia. Draw her with a fmiling look, and up- on her Temples a Coronet of Ivy, a Mantle of Carna- tion embroidered with filver twift and gold Ipangtes, and in her left hand a vizard *, her Ivy Ihews Ihe is mi- ftrifs of Comical Poefie. . IV. Melpomene. Draw her like a Virago, with a majeftick and grave countenance, adorn her bead with Pearls,Diamonds and Rubies *, holding m hdjfeft hand 'Scepters Chap. 3 j. Of the TS[ine Mufes. 3 1 £ Scepters with Crowns upon them, other Crowns and Scepters lying at her feet : and in her right hand a na- ked Poniard, in a Mantle of changeable Crimfon. Her gravity befits Tragick Poefie. < V. Polyhymnia. Draw her acting a Speech with her fore-finger, all in white, her hair hanging looie about her fhoulders of an orient yellow, upon her head a gar- land of the choiceft jewels intermix with flowers, and in her left hand a book , upon which let be written Suadere ^ her name imports memory , to whom the Rhetorician is beholden. VI. Erato. She hath her name from rf Ejav , Jmor y Love : draw her with a fweet and comely vilage, her temples girt with Myrtles and Rofcs, bearing an heart with an Ivor/ Key •, by her fide Oipid, winged, with a lighted torch •, at his back, his bow and quivers. VII. Terpfchore •, a cheerful vifage playing upon fome Inftrument •, upon her head a Coronet of Feathers of iundry Colours, but chiefly green •, in token of the victory which the Mules got of the Syrenes, &c. by figging. Vili. Vrania. A beautiful Lady in an azure robe •, upon her head a Coronet of bright itars *, in her right hand the Cceleftial globe,andin her left the Terreftrial. Her name imports as much as heavenly, Vrania call motus fcrutatHr & Aftra. IX. Calliope. Upon her head draw a Coronet of Gold •, upon her left arm Garlands of Bays in ftore, for the reward of Poets \ and in her right hand three books, upon which write Homerus, Virgilim, Ovidins. The Mufes had their names^ as Eufebius faith , **£<£ ?t pveiv, which is to i-ytruft, becanfe they teach the mofi honeft and laudable dftiplwes. ? X 4 CHAP. 210 ipolygrapbicesl Lib. 4, CHAP. XXXIV. Of the four winds. I. "fj Vtm, the Eaft-wind. Draw a youth with puffed Ji and blown cheeks ( as all the other winds mulb be ) wings upon his Ihoulders, his body like a Tawny- Moor, upon his head a Red Sun. II. Zephyrw, the Weft-wind. Draw a youth with a merry look, holding in his hand a Swan, with wings difplay'd as about to ling, on his head a garland of all forts of flowers. 'TV/ called Zephyrus quafi £»«? *»*»*, bringing /*£, becanfe it chertjheth and qmckneth. III. Boreas, the North-wind. Draw it like an old man, with a horrid, terrible look : his hair and beard covered with fnow, or the hoar-froft •, with the feet and tail of a Serpent. IV. Mfter , the South-wind, is drawn with head and wings wet, a pot or urn pouring forth water, with which defcends frogs, grafhoppers, and the like crea- tures which are bred by moifture. CHAP. XXXV. Of the Months of the Tear. like fnow or I. TAmary mull be drawn all in white, J hoar froft, blowing his fingers •, in his left arm a billet, 2ccA Alarms Handing by his fide. II. Febmary is drawn in a dark skie colour, carrying in his right hand Pifccs, or Fifties. ^ III. March Chap. 35. Of the ftfonths of the tear. 321 III. March is drawn tawny with a fierce look, a hel- met upon his head, leaning upon a Spade: in his right hand Aries \ in his left Almond Bloffbms and Scions •, and upon his arm a basket of Garden-feeds. IV. April is drawn like a young man in green, with a garland of Myrtle and Hawthorn-buds, winged •, in the one hand Primrofes and Violets-,in the other Taurus. V. May is drawn with a fweet and lovely afpect, in a robe of white and green, embroidered with Daftadils, Haw-thorn and Blew-bottles \ on his head a garland of white,red,Damask-rofes •, in the one hand a Lute •, up- on the fore-finger of the other a Nightingal. VI. June is drawn in a mantle of dark grafs-green \ upon his head a Coronet of Bents, King-cobs, and Mai- den-hair-, in his left hand an Angles in his right Can- cer *, and upon his Arm a basket of Summer fruits. VII. July is drawn in a Jacket of a light yellow, eating Cherries, with his face and bofbme Sun-burnt , on his head a garland of Centaury and Ty me, on his fhoulder a Sithe •, with a bottle at his girdle, carrying a Lion. VIII. Auguft is like a young man of a fierce look, in a flame-coloured robe:, upon his head a garland of wheat •, upon his arm a basket of Summer fruits \ at his belt a Sickle, bearing a Virgin. IX. September is drawn in a purple robe, with a cheer- ful look, and on his head a Coronet of white and pur- ple Grapes*, in his left hand a handful of Oats, with a Cornucopia of Pomegranates and other Summer fruits j and in his right hand a ballance. X. Ottober is drawn in a garment of the colour of de- caying flowers and leaves -, upon his head a garland of Oak- leaves with the Acorns ; in his right hand a Scor- pion •, in his left, a basket of Services, Medlars and Cheftnuts. XI. November }12 Poljtgraphices. Lib 4V XI. November in a robe of changeable green and black : upon his head,a garland of Oli ves with the fruit, in his right hand Sagittarius : and in his left bunches of Pafnips and Turneps. XII. December is drawn with a horrid aspect, clad in an Irijh rug, or courle Freeze girt about him : upon his head three or four night-caps, and over them a 7W- kiflj turbant *, his nofe red, beard hung with Iceikles j at his back a bundle of Holly and I vy, holding in furred mittens a Goat. Y/here note, it will be good to give every month its proper , And natural Landslip \ not mak&ng blojfoms and fruits upon trees in December \ nor a barren face of the Earth and trees in June. CHAP. XXXVI. Of Paint ing of the Face and Skin. I. HpWO vpaye's there be of adorning of the Face and A Skjn •, thefirfiisby Painting: thefecondis 7 by ap- plication of Excellent cofmeticks, which give a very natural, abfolute and lafiing beauty. The firft wav, whirh ic that nrPimfinn let^a jeel: matter of this Chapter. Some may wonder that wc fhould meddle with fuch a fubjedt as this, in this place -, but let fuch know; the Painting of a defor- med Face, and the licking over of an old, withered, wrinkled and weather-beaten skin,are as proper appen- dices to a Painter, as the rectification of his Errors in a piece of Canvafe : Nor is there any reafon, but that the Artiit mould fhewhis care in the one, as well as to expofe his skill in the other, fincca [ingle deformity in Chap. ]6. Of Tainting the Face y &c. 3 1 3 in the body , begets a computation of miseries in the mind, and a unity of defeVis a multiplication of Evils. And though fome think the Poets did not much amifs, to fancy the creature to behatcht in Hell, by reafon it brings with it fuch a torrent of dejeftions, yet let thofe darkned fouls, ( who are fo much af- frighted at its cloudy adumbrations ) underftand, that when time fhall have made its full revolution, them- felves may be the product of fuch a conception : But we confefs, it feeks darknefs, and only folaces it felf in oblcurity and dusky folitudes. For fuch whoic bodies have pafied the ftamp with fome faults, and Jiave milled the impreflions or reflexions of beauty, which might make them delectable in humane focie- ty, ever make choice of darknefs as their chief companion. Deformity is a difeafeefteemed the moftpernicious,and its illiie is a matter of dangerous confequence, chiefly ob fir notions to Ladies Preferment. Now to prevent this danger, to take away thefe obftru&ions, and to deliver you from the embraces of fo hideous a monfter (which fome cfteem as a Fury of Hell ) thefe Cofmeticks we have offered upon the Akar of your defeats •, proteft- ing that thcufc of thefe beaut ifiers, will make you as fit for the entertainment of Courtiers , as ever you were before for the courtfhip of Grooms or Hoftlers, and make your rufiy shins and ill-Jool^d fices , to out- shine with a radiant lnftre, the moft fplendidof all the Nymphs of Diana. Though you may look fo much like the Image of death, as that your skins might be taken for your winding-fheets , yet by our directions you may attain fuch a rofid colour, and fuch a lively chcerfulnefs, as {hall not only make you look like na- tures workmanfhip, but alfo put admiration into the beholders, and fix them, in a belief, that you are the firft-fruits of the reiurreclion. Thus we teach you lippid j 2 4 Polygraphkes. Lib. 4. lippid mortals to retrace the fteps of y:>uthfulnefs, and to transform the wrinkled hide oHHectba, into the ten- der skin of the Greatelt. of beauties ^ which then you will dull by the advance of your features, and make all conceited fhadowsof glory, to vaaifhin your pre- fence. When once your artificial heat {hall appear, others (hall feem pale with envy for your perfections j and their natural ruddiness mail only ferve them to blufliy to fee their features clouded by your fplendor, who will feem like brown bread compared with M an- chet, or rather like wooden dimes upon a fhelf of Chi- na ware, or as another once laid, likeblubber'd jugs in a cupboard of Venice glafies, or as earthern pifs-pots in a Goldfmiths fhop. By this means your fpark- ling Glories fhall fire Platonicl^ Lovers, fo that none though as cold as Saturn, fhall be able to refill your actuating flames, but mail force the ftouteft heart, to be a Sacrifice to love. If any remain unfcorched , it muft be only thofe leaden hearted Cowards y who dare not approach your flames, for fear of melting y or thofe undeferving Soldiers oi Venus ( of a frigid conftitution ) who dare not fo much as /coupon your youthful fire, for fear of being burnt to alhes. But it may chance that fome Saint or another, may condemn your hearts for evil, becaufe youftrive to make your faces good,and may like your in- fide the voorfe, becauie your out-fide may look fo well ; yet with Benjamin, refufe not the many mefles of Pottage, nor yet the many changes of Rai- ment ( although one might well enough ferve your turn ) but receive them from the hands of Jofeph, though all the reft of the Brethren be angry. Avoid not company for want of beauty, when Art affords an innocent fupply , but with confidence crucifie that evil confeience, which forbids the ule of a little oyl to make a cheerful countenance , and the drinking of a little wine Chap. 36. Of Painting the Face, &c. 325 wine to make a merry heart. Borrow our Artificial beautifiers, and become fplendid, that you may be fit to be gathered by the hand of fome ir.etamorphofed Hero j left in the garden of Deformities, growing green with fiknefsy you fhould be taken for thifiles , and fa cropp'd by Jjfes. II. To cleanfe the face and skin. Before any thing be ufed to paint, or make the skin beautiful, itmuftbemade very clean thus: firft wafn with warm water, and fweet fcented wafh-balls very well-, then rub the face with a cloth, and wafh well with water in which Wheat-bran is boiled j fois the skin prepared. Or thus, Take Sublimate one ounce, glair of fix eggs, boil them in a glafs vefiel, till they grow thick, then prefs out the water, with which warn the skin. III. To make a white Fhchs or Paint. Take Talk and powder it, by beating of it in a hot mortar, to the powdred Talk add diftilled Vinegar, boil it at a gentle fire in a wide glafs, let the fat froth that fwims at top, be taken off with a fpoon :, then evaporate the Vinegar, and mix the remaining cream with flegm of common Salt, or a little Pomatum, with which waih or anoint the face , and it will beautifie ic much. IV. Another very excellent. Take Crude Talk in powder one ounce, oil of Cam- phire two ounces, digeit till the oil is white j it is a noble Fuchs for Ladies faces. V. To make the aforefaid oil of Camfhire. Take Camphire four ounces, Bole twelve ounces, make them into balls and dry them in the Sun, then diftill them in fand in a glafs retort,into a receiver that hath diftilled rain water therein: firft there will come forth a white matter, which melts in the Alembick, and 21 6 ipolygraphkes. Lib. 4. and ftlls into the receiver, then a clearer water ; and at laft with a ftronger fire, the oil we fpeak of, fweet fcented, which rectified with fpirit of wine will be yel- low as Gold. VI. Another excellent Fhchs made of? earl. Diflblve Pearl in diftilled Vinegar •, precipitate with oil of Sulphur per Camp/warn, then fwceten and digeft with fpirit of wine •, abftract the fpirit, and you have amagifterial Fhchs will melt like Butter. VII. To make the beft Fhchs or Taint as yet known. Take Venetian Talk, cleave it into flices, digeft it in the heat of the Sun, or of a horfe-dunghil for a month, with diftilled vinegar, made of Spanifh wine, adding every day new diftilled vinegar to the former, till the vinegar be mucilaginous •, which them diftill by a lu- ted retort and a large receiver with a naked fire. Firft there comes forth the vinegar •, then a white oil,which feparate. After you have cleanfed the skin by the fe- cond Section, then firft wafli with the vinegar, after anoint with the oil : if the face be firft well wafh'd from all impurity, this one arointing may hold for a month without fading. This Cofmetick, if rightly prepared , ii Worth about five pound an ounce. VIII. An excellent Fhchs made of Bulls gall. Take Bulls galls dryed in the Sun, whofe tincture ex- tract with fpirit of wine, with which befmear the face, £ being cleanfed bv the fecond Section) leaving it on for three or four dayes, without going abroad, or ex- posing the skin to the air : at the end of the time cleanfe the face by the fecond Section: fo almoft to a miracle, the skin of the face and neck is rendredmoft gratefully white, foft, delicate and amiable. This 19 the Spanifh Fhchs which feveral Ladies now ufe. IX. To make an excellent red Fucm. Make a decoction of red Sanders ia double diftilled vinegar, Chap. 36. Of fainting the Face, &c. 317 vinegar, adding a little Alom» with a few grains of Musk, Amber-griefe, or of fomefweet Spices, and you will have a perfect red Fhchs for the face. X. Another very excellent. TaKe juice of Clove-gilliflowers , with which mix a little juice of Limons : with this paint your face, and you mall have a pleaiing red colour. XL To do the fame another way. Make a ftrong infufionof Clove-gilliflowers in re- ctified fpirit of wine, adding a few drops of oil of Vi- triol, or inltead thereof a little Alom, and the juice of a Citron or Limon ; fo (hall you have an excellent co- lour tobeautifie the face with. XII. A Fhchs or Faint not eafie to he discovered. Take feeds of Cardamoms or grains of Paradife, Cubebs, Cloves, and rafpings of Brazil, which infuie in rectified fpirit of wine tor ten dayes, over a gentle heaf, then ieparate the fpirit: this is fo perfect aFu- cus, that it may deceive any man, for this clear wa- ter gives a frelh, red and lovely colour which will laft long. XIII. A Fhchs or Cofmetkk of river Crabs. Take of the flefh which remains in the extremities of the great claws of river Grabs (being boiled J a fuf- ficient quantity, which dry gently, and then extract a deep tincture with rectified fpirit of wine-, evaporate part of the menftrmm, till the tincture have a good thicknels or body •, with which (the skin being cleanfed) anoint the cheeks firft, applying over it fome other al- bifying Cofmetick. XIV. Spanifh woolly wherewith women paint their faces red. Boil fhearings of Scarlet in water of quick-lime half an hour, of which take two pound, to which put Bra- zil two ounces (rafped) Roch Alom, Verdegriefe, of ji8 Tolygrapbices. Lib 4. of each one ounce, Gum-Arabick two drachms, boil all for half an hour, which keep for ufe. XV, To do the fame another way. Take Spirit of wine one pound, Cochenele half an ounce, raiped Brazil one ounce, Gum- Armoniack three drachms, mix and digelt till the Gum is diflblved ^ then boil it gently, and (train it for ufe, into which you may put old iinnen rags, or Spanifh wooll at pleafure. CHAP. XXXVII. Of Cojmeticks vchicb beatttifie veithont any thing of faint, I. A N excellent Cofmetick, or Liquor of Talk. J\. Take powder of Talk (made by rubbing it with pumice Hones •, or beating it in a very hot mor- tar •, or filing it with a Goldfmiths fmoothing file ) eight ounces, Sails Tartari fixteen ounces, calcine it twelve hours in a wind furnace, and fet it in a Cellar, feparating that which melts, from that which doth not : then calcine this dry Calx added to four times its weight of Sal-nitre, with a ftrong fire, fo the Talk will \\c* mol+-o/J ir»tv\ *\ /-loi»* t%jV%\^4» rr»nfo T«rnirh nAincr fo«- i« 3 LSW iliViwWU lliWV/ li VAWiil »?1UUV i»uujj IfAMJWM fc-%****^ AVti*« A Cellar will turn to a clammy liquor. This wonderfully whitens and beautifies the skin , and takes away fpots and freckles from the face : but yon mufl not leave the liquor long on y but wajh it off with decottion of wheat bran, that it corrode not the sk}n. II. To make the skin foft and fmooth. The face being very clean, by the fecond Section of the fix and thirtieth Chapter, warn it very well with a lixivim of Salt of Tartar , and after that anoint it Ch. \7- Of Painting the Face > &c. :} 19 it with Pomatum , or which is better, oil of fweet Al- monds, doing this every night going to bed; The Pomatum we have taught the way to make in our Synop- fis Me dicing lib. 3. cap. 58. Sett. 2. III. A water to cleanfe the face from Scurf e and Mo'f- phew. Take diftilled rain water fix* ounces, juice ofLimoris twelve ounces, mix them, and warn with it morning and evening, anointing after it at night going to bed with the oil or Pow^waforefaid. IV. An VngHent which brings the skin to an exquifitt beauty. Take of our Pomatum one ounce, Salt of Tartar one drachm, Musk twenty grains, mix them well, and (the face or skin being very clean) anoint morning and even- V. A wonderful Cofmetickjf great worth. Take white Tartar twenty ounces, Talk, Salt, of each ten ounces, calcine them in a potters furnace very well ; then grinding the matter upon a marble, put it into Hippocrates tiisitecie, and fet it in a Cellar or other moift place for twenty or thirty days, and there will drop from it a precious oil - which being rubbed upon the skin foftly with a linnen cloth ( the skin being duly cleanfed firft) takes away all kind oflpots, and makes the skin foft and delicate. VI. A cheap, yet excellent Cofmetich^ Take Alom in fine powder,and (hake it with whites of new laid eggs, being a little heated, till fuch time as they grow thick to an ointment, with which anoint the face morning and evening three or four days •, and it will take away ipotsand wrinkles, and make the skin grow clear and fair. VII. An excellent Mercurial Cofmetic\$wvaUnt againft pwft deformities of the skint Y fake ^io ipolygraphices. Lib. 4. Take Mercury purified from all blacknefs half a pound, Mercury Sublimate in powder as much, mix them in a Hone or marble mortar •, put them into an Alcmbick of a {trait Orifice, put on diftilled Vine- gar, till all be covered three or four fingers, letting it ltand four days,daily ftirring the lame at certain times, then it extracts a vvhitilh powder \ the whitilh Vine- gar by inclination feparate, rejecting it, and put on other Vinegar : the powder at bottom keep fo for fome days : which labour you muft fo often reiterate, till you have abundance of that white powder, which dry, and keep for ufe : anoint with it, by mixing with it a little diftilled rain water, and it will take away all blemiihes of the skin, as alio Tetters. Ufe it not too often, and beware you touch neither eyes nor teeth with it. VIII. Another of great cflimation. Take Mercury Sublimate, Saccharum Satnrni of each two drachms, Rofe water, juice of Limons of each two ounces, mix them like to an ointment, with which anoint gently at night, and the next morning with the Pomatum afore faid. IX. To make a kind of Lac Virginis, an excellent Cof- nuiich Take diftilled rainwater a quart, Sacchdritm Samrni cryftallized one ounce, mix them, and rhen warn with the water, being fettled : the fine white powder at bot- tom, is alio an excellent fucus or paint, which may be laid upon the skin if very clear : note, fome ufe Vine- gar inflead of the rain water. X. To make Oleum Tartari per dcUqniitm. Take Salt of Tartar, which put into a bag with a c rner in a moid Cellar, and the oil will diftil there, fh m in drops : with this oil you may mix a little fair w; t r, and wafli your face at night going to bed •, and the Chap.j7- Of Paintingthe Face, 8cc. 331 the next morning, the face being very clean* you may warn with the aforefaid Lac Vvrglms\ thus continuing for fome days, you may create an exquilite and lafting beauty. XI. A compound Cofmetick^efleemed by fome of gteat force. Take of the aforefaid Lac Virginia one ounce, oil of Tartar aforefaid half an ounce, mix them, with which wafh morning and night for about a weak or more* a3 you lhall fee occafion •, then anoint with the following ointment. XII. To make the CofmetichjD'mtment aforefaid; Take musk three drachms, ambergriefe two drachms* civet one drachm,grind them upon a porphyre or mar- ble Hone, v/ith oil of Ben and Rhodium of each three' ounces, with which anoint as aforefaid : note, fome inftead of the oil of Ben, ufe oil of fweet Almonds* XIII. A vetegable Cofmeiickz, Befmear your face or skin at night going to bed, with the juice of Wake Robin ; it is excellent. XIV. An incomparable Cofmetickjjf PearL DiflblvePearlsin juice of Limons or diftillcd Vine- gar, which digeft in Horfe-dung* till they fend forth a clear oil, which will fwim on the top : this is one - of the mod excellent Cofmeticks or Beautifiers in the 1 world : this oil if well prepared is richly worth feven pound An ounce. X V. A Cofmetick ointment of great worth. Take of our Pomatum aforefaid fix ounces, Sacchd* mm Satmni two ounces, mix them, and anoint morn* ing and evening. XVI. Another very good for the skj'/i. Mix SacchammSammi one drachm* in Vinegar half anounce ? which mingle with the glair of eggs, and anoint with it* V 4 XVlt ni iPolygraphkes. Lib. 4^ XVII. A Cofmetic^. wonderful to ma\e apleafing ruddy complexion. Take oil of Tartar four ounces, Alom, Sal Gem, of each one ounce, Borax, Camphire of each half an ounce, beat them well together, to which add of Bri- ony water a pint, diftil them in Balnco, and you will have your defire. XVIII. Another for the fame. Take Madder, Myrrh, Saffron, Frankincenfe, of each alike, bruife and fteep all in White-wine, with which anoint the face going to bed, and in the morn- ing walh it off, and the skin will have a gallant pleafing blufh. XIX. To make the Cofmetic\of Myrrh, very excellent. Boil eggs till they are hard, flit them and take out the yolks, fill them up with powdred myrrh, clofe them together, and lay them in a moift Cellar, and the myrrh will diflblve into oil. XX. To make a very good Wajlt to whiten the skin, and give a good complexion. Take Limons, hens eggs boiled, of each twelve, Turpentine eight ounces,diftil all in Balneo Maria, with which warn : when you warn, you may drop into it a drop, two or three of oil of Oranges or Cinamon, for fragrancy fake. XX I . A Cofmti it Kjo makf U roug h ikrrtj rnuuw. Take fweet Almonds blanched four pound, moifter them with fpirit of wine and rofe water mixt toge- ther, of each two ounces, beat them together and fr> them-, and when they begin to fmoak, put them intc a bag, and prefs them ( in a prefs made for that pur pofe ) and there will come forth a very clear oil which put into rain water, and beat it till it is exceed ing white. CHAF Ch.jS*. Of remedying the Vices of the skin. 335 CHAP. XXXVIII. OfCofmeticks, which remedy the various Vices of the skin, I. npO take away Sun-httrnings. X To glair of ten eggs put Sugar-candy one ounce, and anoint with it going to bed : or anoint with the juice of Sow-bread at night going to bed •, and in the morning w ith oil Omphacine. The like effects hath our Lac Virgims at the ninth Section of the feven and thirtieth Chapter, as alfo Oleum Tartaric and other things of like nature. II. To take away rednefs and Pimples. Firlt prepare the skin by bathing it often with the decoction of wheat-bran, and applying pultiiles of bread,milk and oil thereto : when the skin is thus fup- pled and rarified, you may cure them either by our liquor of Talk, at the firft Section of the feven and thirtieth Chapter, or mercurial Cofmetick at the fe- venth Section of the feven and thirtieth Chapter, or our Lac Virginis and oil of Tartar at the ninth and tenth Section of the feven and thirtieth Chapter, or by often waihing with juice of Limons. III. To take away Freckles. Take juice of Limons, put it into a glafs bottle, to which put fine Sugar, and Borax in powder, digeft it eight days in Sand, then ufe it •, or mix Sal Tartar* with whites of eggs, and apply it •, or often ufe our compound Cofmetick at the eleventh Section of the feven and thirtieth Chapter, or oil of Tartar alone, for fomc weeks *, but if all fail, you mult have recourfe to our Liquor of Talk at the firft Section of the feven Y 3 and }}4 Polygraphias. Lib. 4* and thirtieth Chapter, or Mercurial Cofmetick at the feyenth Section or the feven and thirtieth Chapter. IV . To take away fpots from the face or skin. This is done by anointing with oyl of Tartar for ten days-, and after all that to wafhitwith a Lixivium of Quicklime in which Sal-armomack^h^thbecn diflbl- yedfbr a long time : or you may ufe the Cofmetick at (he third SeSion of the feven and thirtieth Chapter camphorated. V. To cleanfe afcurffy skin. If the creature be fat, foment firfb with a Lixivium of Salt of Tartar •, but if lean, make a fomentation of Borrage, Buglofs and Mallow leaves, which ufe for fomedays: this being done, bath the place where the fcurfis, with Spirits Nicotian* made by fermentation, which being dryed in, anoint fir(t with oil of Tartar, then with oil of Almonds -, repeating the three laft works, lb often till the fcurf goes away. . If all thefe fail, youmuft have recourfo to our liquor of T'alkj or Mercurial Cofmetick^ or thofe at the fifth and eighth Section of the feven and thirtieth Chapter, which without doubt will perform your defire. VI. To free the Skin from Tetters and Ring-worms. Diffolve Sublimate one ounce in a glafs of Red- wine by boiling, with which warn the place morning and evening, letting it dry of it lelr, for three or lour days together, and it will certainly cure : if they be not in- veterate, our liquor of Talk at the firft Se&ion of the feven and thirtieth Chapter, or Mercurial Cofmetick may fufficfently do *, or you may anoint with this oint- ment. Take SdTartati two drachnis, burnt Alom three drachms, powder and incorporate with whites of eggs : Or this, take Sulphur vive three drachms, Camphire one drachm, Hogs-griefe two ounces, mix and make an ointment, VII, Chap, 38. Of *P aiming the Face, &c. 335 VII. To take away wrinkles from the skin- Take oil of Almonds, Ices of oil Olive, and make them into an ointment with wax, powder of Cam- phire and Maftich, with which anoint. Oil of Myrrh to anoint with, is eminent in this cafe : or wafh with a dccocYioh of Briony roots and figs of each alike : or diflblve Gum Tragacanth in Lac Virginis, and wafh with that. Excellent good is a ftrong decoction of Pomegranate pills in White-wine, to warn often with. VIII. To take away Warts. The juice of the greater Spurge with Salt anointed, takes them away, fo alio a continual wafhing with a Lixivium of Quicklime and Salt of Tartar. The juice of Vermcaria performs the fame. A plaifter of Car,- tharides with a defenfative is very good in this cafe : fo alfo this following wafh : take Saccbamm Satumi three ounces, SalrArmomackonz ounce, Vitriol common fix drachms, Quicklime eight ounces,boil all in water four pound to the confumption of the half, with which often bath the warts, and then wafh with our Mercurial wa- ter. Black Soap hath often been found very good •, but efpecially a plaifter of Turpentine. IX. To heal Chap in the skgi. Our Pomatum in this cafe is moft excellent : yet this following is commendable. Take Capons griefe mixed well with Camphire, and anoint with. Oil of Turpen- tine two drachms, mixed with Vnguentum Populeon two ounces, is very good. So alfo oil of Roles mixed with Sheep Suet and wax to an ointment. X . To heal Burnings and Scaldings. Excellent good is the Vnguentiim Ruhr am in our Sy- nopfis Medicine lib. 3. cap. 58. Sett. 1 . both to draw out the fire, and to heal. To draw out the fire alfo, glair of eggs mixed with Rofe-water, is very prevalent : Y 4 fo j} 6 Polygraphkes. Lib. 4. fo alfo is Salt, raw Onions, Soap, Yeft, Oil of Tartar and the like. To hinder the rifing of the blifters, Hens dung three ounces , mixed with hogs griefe four ounces, and Salt of Tartar one ounce is very good , fo alfo a cataplafme of Honey and crums of bread *, but belt of all a plaifber of ftrained Opium , which per- forms all the intentions to admiration. If the blifter break,it maybe prefently skinned by anointing with oil of eggs, and warning often with Lac Virginis, ftrewing upon the fore, powder of Bole, Tutty, Cerufeorthe like. XI. To take away fears and marks of the fmall Pox. Take of oil of Tartar one ounce and half, Cerufe d'uTolved in oil of Rofes one ounce, Borax and Sal Gem pfeach one drachm, mix and make' an ointment, with which anoint. Oil of Tartar alone performs this work well.: fo Salt of Tartar, mixed with powder of Myrrh and oil of Rofes. XII. To beautife the hands. To make them foft, often anoint with the oil of Al- monds or our Pomatum at night going to bed, warning them the next morning with decoction of wheat-bran : after a while warn them with Salt of Tartar, diffolved in fair water, perfumed with oil of Cloves, Oranges, Rhodium or Cinnamon. Or this, take Venice Soap dillblved injuice of Limonsone pound, Virgin-honey four ounces, Sublimate, Orice root, Sugar, Salt of Tartar,Alom,Borax of each one ounce, Balfom ofcPem two drachms, oil of Cloves one drachm, oil of Rho- dium and Cinnamon of each half a drachm, make a mixture to wafh the hands withal : Or this, take pow- der of Venice Soap one pound, Orice root eight oun- ces, Amylim fix ounces, mix them and make an oint- ment with liquid Stor ax and oil of Benjamin a fuffici- fnt quantity j it wonderfully whitens, fmooths and fweetens Ch. 39. Of making afweet Breath. 337 fwectens the hands. To anoint alfo with a Bulls gall is very good. XIII. To help hands which are fwoln, and lookjed or blew with cold. What we even now faid ( in the laft Sedion ) may be faid again here : to which we add, that a long bathing of them in a lather ofCaftle Soap, is very good if it be done : or if a repercuflive plaifter be ap- plied made of barley meal, SaccharumSaturni, and oil of Myrtles ', warning ( after the coming off of the Ca- taplafme) with juice of Limons or white-wine Vine- gar : a plaifter of Turpentine mixed with Salt is good. Often to anoint the hands with oyl of Roles, Almonds, or Pomatum at night, and the next morning with the LacVirginhs prevails much. Oil of Annifeeds, Cara- ways and Fennel prepared chymically, as alfo Cloves and Oranges, mixed with oil of Almonds and often nfed, are eminent above all other things. CHAP. XXXIX. Of making afvoeet Breath. I. A Stinking Breath comes from one of the fe four cau- xX fes, viz. Putrified Lungs, defective Teeth, a di- fiemper of the Head, or obftruttion of the Stomach. II. To remedy a Stinking Breath coming from putrified Lungs. Take Vnguentnm Nieotian<& one ounce, Oleum Suc- cini two drachms, mix them and anoint the breaft out- wardly •, inwardly give cleanfers, fas oil of Sulphur allayed with Rofe water) morning and evening-, as alfo Antimmum Diaphoreticum ten grains five times a day J} 8 Tolygraphicesl Lib. 4. day for feveral days together •, then heal by giving oil of Almonds mixed with a few drops of oil of Cinna- mon, or Pills of Turpentine • Laftly, morning, noon and night let this bolus be abhibited, take Nutmegs, Mace, Ginger , of each fifteen grains , honey two drachms, oil of Cinnamon ten drops, mix them, and continue it for fome weeks. Ill . To he If the defetts of the Teeth. 1 . If the teeth be furred over, rub them every morning with cremor Tartar* in powder, and wafh them with White-wine. 2. If the teeth be black;-, allay oil of Sul- phur or Vitriol in Rofe- water, and fcowr them well therewith, with the end of a fbick and a rag, till all the blacknefs be gone *, then rub them with oil of Almonds perfum'd with oil of Cinnamon. 3. If the teeth be Aw/f ,firft rub them with this powder, take Galls, Pome- granate flowers, Sumach, Cyperus,of each one ounce, Roch Alom half a pound, powder them all for ufe : then ufe this Gargarifine. Take Galls one ounce , Myrrh, Pomegranate peels of each half an ounce, boil them in White-wine vinegar for a Gargarifme. Laftly, morning, noon and night wain the gums with good red Wine •, by this means the teeth will be faftned and the gums reftored. 4. If they be in danger of rotting *, take aHies of Harts-horn, magiftery of Coral of each „..„ -»,.., ....u ~„ :.. fL- _ j . 1 - . c . *i . r /--•.• , %JH\, ^uncc, 111U3A., UL HULCctU tUClCUl Uil Ui l^lllllrilllUll, ten grains, mix for a dentifrice to rub the teeth withal, it will keep them white and found. 5. If they be rot- ten and hollow ; make little pellets of ftrained Opium, Myrrh and oil of Cinnamon, and put them into the hollow tooth. 6. If theyach ; ufe the aforefaid pellets, or make little ones of Laudanum Paracelfi, and put them into the hollowrfefs ; or if they be not hollow, tye a little pill of the fame up in a fine thin rag, and hold it between the aking teeth , 7 . Iftheyftink}, often wafh Chap. 39. Of making a {wet Breath. 339 wafh them with wine or fpirit of wine, in which a few drops of oil of Cinnamon and adept Rofarum isdif. folved. IV. To reiki fe a Stinking B/eath arifngfrom diflempcr cf the head. Confider the caufe of the diftemperywhether it arifes from the Pox, Impofthumes, or the like, and fol- low the method inftituted in the cure of thole difeafes^ and then the caufe being taken away, the effects you will find will foon ceafe •, yet neverthelefs thefe follow- ing pills are excellent : take Calx of refined Silver made by fpirit of Nitre, and well dulcified by warning In warm rain water, one ounce, Re fin* Scammomi one ounce and half, mix them for a mafs of pills, of which take eight or ten grains at night going to bed every third, fourth or fifth day. V. To retlife a Stinking Breath arifngfrom the obfirti' ftion of the Stomach. This is done by opening and cleanfing the Stomach thus. Take every evening going to bed half a drachm of PU. Ruff for ten or twelve days together : Or thus, firft vomit with Vinum Benedittnm one ounce or more, according as Strength requires, twice or thrice •, then take Filula Radii half a drachm at a time, in the morn- ing fafting,drinking after it fome warm broth or pofiet drink, which repeat every third or fourth day four or five times. VI. To reltife the Breath-) when itfmells of any thing that is eaten. Chew Coriander feed or Zedoary in the mouth , drinking a good draught of wine after •, the fcent of the wine is taken away by eating fo wr apples or Quin- ces, or by chewing troches of Gum-Tragacanth perfu- med with oil of Cinnamon. CHAP. ?40 Polygraphices. Lib. 4. CHAP, xl: Of beautifying the Hair. I. ""f^O dye the Hair black. JL This is done with the Calx of Luna (ma8e by Spirit of Nitre) mixed with fair water, and the hair wa- rned therewith, with a Spunge : it is the molt excellent thing of that kind thatis yet known. II. To keep the hair from falling off. Take Myrtle berries, Galls, Emblick Myrobalans of each alike, boil them in oil Omphacine, with which anoint : it is an excellent Medicine, yet as old as Galen. III. To remedy Baldnefs. This is a hard thing to cure, yet the following things are very good. Rub the head or bald places every morning very hard with a coarfe cloth, till it be red, anointing immediately after with Bears griefe : when ten or fifteen days are paft, rub every morning and evening with a bruiled Onion, till the bald places be red , then anoint with honey well mixed with Mu- ftard-feed, applying over all a plaifter of Labdanum mixed with mice dung, and powder of Bees : do this for thirty days. If ail the former fail, bath with a de- coction of Bur-dock roots, made with a Lixivium ( of Salt of Tartar ) two parts, and muskadel one part -, immediately applying this Unguent t take Thapfi or Turbeth one drachm(in powder)Bears griefe one ounce, mix them, which ufc for fixty days •, if this make not the hair come, the defect is incurable. IV. To take axvay hair from places where it fhodd not grow. Take Quicklime four ounces, Auripgmenuim one ounce Chap. 40. Of beautifying the Hair. 341 ounce and a half, Sulphur vive, Nitre, of each half an ounce, Lixivium of Salt of Tartar a quart, mix and boil all fo long in a glazed earthen pot, till putting a quill therein, all the feathers peel off, and it is done. Firft foment the place with warm water a little before you ufe the aforefaid medicine •, a quarter of an hour after wafh with very hot water •, then anoint with the aforefaid Unguent, and in a quarter of an hour it will do the work : when the hairs are fain away, remem- ber to anoint with oil of Rofes '-, now to keep them from ever growing again, anoint for fome days with an ointment made of the juices of Henbane and Night- ihade, Opium and Hogs griele. V. To make the hair curl. Wafh the hair very well with a Lixivium of Quick- lime, then dry it very well, that done anoint it with oil of Myrtles, or oil Omphacine, and powder it well with fweet powder, putting it up every night under a cap : if the party be naturally of a cold and moift con- jtitution, the warning, anointing and powdring mull be perpetually ufed once or twice a week during life, the hair being put up every night. VI. To make hair lanhjtnd flag that curls too much. Anoint the hair throughly twice or thrice a week . withoilofLillies, Roles, or marlh- mallows, combing it after it very well. VII. To make the hair grove long and [oft. Diftil Hogs griefe or oil Olive in an Alcmbick with the oil that comes there-from anoint the hair, and it will make it grow long and foft ; ufe it often. VIII . To preserve the hair fromfplitting at the ends. Anoint the ends thereof, with oil Omphacine, or oil of Myrtles,they are eminent in this cafe to preferve the hair from fplitting, fo alfo an ointment made of Honey, Bees wax and oil Omphacine or Bears griefe. CHAP. •*% Tolygraphices, Lib. 4* CHAP. XLI. Of the Art of Perfuming in general. I. ¥ N this Art two things are to be confidered, vitt X 1 • The way and manner of making of Perfumes. 2. The way and manner of Perfuming. II. The Perfume it felf is confidered, 1 . In refpect of its Form. 2. In refpect of its Compofition. III. The Form of the Perfume is either Water, Oil, Eflence,Unguent, Powder, or Tablets. IV. The Making and Compofition is taken from the Form and matter. V. The Matter is either Vegetable, Animal or Mi- neral. VI. The way of Perfuming is according to the mat- ter to be perfumed. VII. The matter to be perfumed is either natural, as Hairs, Skins, Cloaths, Air, &c or Artificial, as Po- manders, Powders, Wafh-balls, Soaps, Candles, and other things of like nature. CHAP. XLII. Of the matter of which Perfumes are madel I. TpH E ground of Vegetable Perfumes , is taken X from Flowers, Seeds, Herbs, Roots, Woods, Bark* and Gums. II. The chief Flowers for this ufe, are of Clove- Gilliflowers, Rofes, Jafww, Lavender, Oranges and Saffron. ■> III. 'The Chap. 43. Of the oil of *Ben. 34J III. The chief Seeds or fruits are Nutmegs, Cloves, Carraways, Grains, Seeds of Geranium Mofchatum, and the Nut Ben. IV. The chief Herbs are Geranium Afofchatum, Bafil, fweet Marjoram, Tyme, Angelica, Rolemary, Laven- der, Hyfop, fweetTrefoyl, Mint and Bay-tree leaves. V. The chief Roots are of Calamus Aromaticus, Gin- ger, China, Caryoyhyllata, Indian Spicknard and fweet Orrice or Iris. VI. The chief Woods are of yellow Sanders, Xyle- balfamum, Lignum Aloes, and Rhodium. VII. The Barks and feels are of Cinnamon, Mace, Oranges, Limons and Citrons. ' VIII. The chief Gums are Frankincenfe, Olibanum, Labdanum, Styrax, liquid Styrax, Balfamum Verum, Ambergriefe,5f)'^^ Calamita, Benjamin, Amber, Cam- phire. IX. The chief matters of Perfumes taken from Ani- mals, are Musk, Zibet, Cow-dung and other turds. X. Of Minerals there are two only, which yield a Perfume, and they are Antimony and Sul/hur. CHAP. XLIII. Of the Oil of Ben. I. 'TpHE little Nut which the Arabians call Ben, is X the fame which the Latins call Nux Vnguenta* ria *, and the Greeks Balanus Myrepfica ; out of which is taken an Oil, of great ufe in the Art of Perfuming. II. To make the Oilof Ben. Blanch the Nuts, and beat them very carefully in a mortar, and fprinkle them with wine, put them into an earthen or Iron Pan, and 344 Qolygraphices. Lib. 4. and heat them hot, then put them into a linnen cloth, and prefs them in an Almond prefs •, this work repeat, till all the Oil is extracted, fo have you Oil of Ben by exprefllon. III. In like manner you may exprefs the Oil out of Citron feeds, incomparable for this purpofe, to extrad the fcent out of Musk, Civet, Amber and the like, be- caufe it will not quickly grow rank, yet Oil of the Nut Ben is much better. IV. This oil of Ben hath two properties •, the one is, that having no fcent or odour of it felf,it alters,changes ordiminifhesnotthefcentofany Perfume put into it : the other is that it is of a long continuance, fo that it fcarcely ever changeth, corrupts or putrifies, as other oils do. V. To make a Perfume thereof, put the Musk, Am- ber, &c. in fine powder thereinto, which keep in a glafs bottle very clofe (topped, for a month or more^ then wfe it. VI. Or thus, Blanch your Nuts, and bruife them, ( Almonds may do though not fo good ) and lay them between two rows of Flowers, fuppofe Rofes, Jafemin, &c. or other Perfumes •, when the Flowers have loft their fcent and fade, remove them, adding frefh ones ^ which repeat fo long as Flowers are in feafon •, then fnueez out the oil, and it will be moft odoriferous. VII. Laftly, by this laft you may draw a lweet fcent out of thofe Flowers, out of which you cannot diftii any fweet water. CHAP, Chap. 44. Of fweet tVatersl 345 CHAP. XLIV. Qftftoeit Waters, I. '"Tp/& firfi fweet water. X Take Cloves in powder two drachms,yellovir Sanders, Calamus Aromaticus of each onefcruple, Ajha Rofarum Damafcenarum fifteen pound , digeft lour days, then diftill in an Alembick-, to this new diftilled water put in powder Cloves, Cinnamon , Benjamin, Storax Calamita of each one drachm, diltil again in Balneo ; laftly put the water into a glafs-bottle with Musk and Ambergriefe of each ten grains, keep it clofe ftopt for ufe. II. The fecond fweet Water. Take Damask Rofes exungulated three pound, Flowers of Lavender and Spike of each four ounces, Clove-gilliflowers , and Fltfwers oi Jafemin , of each two pound, Orange-flowers one pound, Citron peels four drachms, Cloves two drachms, Cinnamon, Storax Calamita, Benjamin, Nutmegs,of each two fcruples all in powder. Aqua Rofarnm fix pound, digeft ten dayes, then diftil in Balneo : to the diftilled water add of Musk and Ambergriefe of each thirty grains. III. The third fweet Water. Take Rofes, Clove-gilliflowers of each one pound, Flowers of Rofemary, Lavender, Jafemin, Marjoram, Savory, Time, of each three ounces, dry Citron peels one ounce, Cinnamon, Benjamin, Storax Calamita, of each two drachms,Nutmegs,Mace,of each one drachm, bruife the Herbs and Spices well, digeft in the Sun two days, then diltil in Balneo : to the diftilled water add Musk in powder one fcruple, Z IV. The j 46 Polygraphkes. Lib. 4. IV. The fourth fweet Water. Take Cloves, Cinnamon of each one drachm, Mace, Grains, Musk, Ambergriefe, Citron peels of each half a fcruple, Benjamin,Sfon*A- Calamita of each one fcruple, Aqua Rofarum twelve pound, digeft fifteen days, then diftil in Balneo. V. The fifth fweet Water. Take Rofemary-flower water, Orange-flower water of each five pound, Ambergriefe one fcruple, digeft ten days, then diftil in Balneo. VI. The fixth fweet Water. Take Rofes two pound , Macaleb half a drachm, Ambergriefe ten grains, bruife what is to be bruifed, digeft in fand three days, then diftil in Balneo. VII. The feventh fweet Water. Take green peels of Oranges and Citrons of each four drachms, Cloves half a drachm, ilowers of Spike fix ounces , Aqua Rofarum Damafcenamm fix pound, digeft ten days, then diftil in Balneo. VIII. The eigh 1 L- fweet Water. Take of the water at the fifth Seftion fix pound, Musk ten grains, mix and digeft them for ufe. IX. The ninth fweet Water. Take Aqua Rofarum , Aqua Flomm de Jafemin of each four pound, Musk one fcruple, digeft ten days, then diftil in (and. X. The tenth fweet Water. Take Damask-rofes , Musk-rofes , Orange-flowers of each four pound, Cloves two ounces, Nutmegs one ounce, diftil in an Alembick, in thenofeof which hang Musk three fcruples, Amber two fcruples, Civet one fcruple, tyedup in a rag dipt in bran, and the white of an egg mixed. XI. The eleventh fweet Water, called Aqua Nanfa or Naphe. Take Chap. 45. Of Perfuming Oils. $47 Take Aqua Rofarnm four pound, Orange- flower* water two pound, waters of fweet Trefoyl, Lavender, Sweet Marjoram of each eight ounces, Benjamin two ounces, Storax one ounce, Labdanum half an ounce, Mace, Cloves, Cinnamon, Sanders, Lignum Aloes of each one ounce, Spicknard one ounce ; all being grofly beaten, digeft a month, then in a glafs retort diftil in Balnea* XIL The twelfth fweet water, called Aqua Mofchata* Take fpiritofwine two pound, Musk three fcruples, Amber two fcruples, Civet one fcruple, digeft in the Sun twenty days clofe flopped in a glafs veffel •, a drop of this water put into any other liquor, will very well perfume it. So may yon extraSi the [cent out of fweet FloWers, with this difference, that they lie but a little while, kecanfe their' earthy fubflance will make the fpirit ill-favoured* CHAP. XLV, Of Perfuming Oils* ** "V*® ma h Perfuming Oils by infufiotti i This is taught fully at the fifth SecYton of the three and fortieth Chapter aforegoing. II. To make Oleum Imperialct i Take Ambergriefe four drachms, Storax Calamity eight ounces , Rofe-water, Oleum Rofmm of each two pound, oil of Cinnamon and Cloves of each half a drachm, put all into a glafs, and digeft in horfe dung^ twenty days : this done,gently boil all for a quarter of an hour, which then let cool -, with a fpoon take offthe oil which fwims a top , to which put of Musk and 2 2 Zibet 34 8 Volygrafiices. Lib. 4: Zibet of each two drachms, digeft all in a gentle heat for twenty days, and keep it for ufe. Where note the Amber and Storax at bottom will ferve to make fweet balls of, to lay among cloaths, or beads to carry in ones hands \ or for a perfume to burn. III. To make Oil of Cinnamon. Digeft Cinnamon grofly bruifed in fpirit of Wine, fharpned with oil of Salt, in a glafs veflel, with a blind head clofely luted, in a gentle heat for ten days, then diftil in an Alembick, as we have more at large taught in our Synopfis Medicine lib. 3 . cap. 47. fefl. 1. it is a wonderful Perfume, the moft fragrant and pleafant of all Oils, as well in tafteas fmell : the ufe of it will cer- tainly take away a ftinking Breath. IV. To make OilofRofcs, called adeps Rofarum. Take Damask Rofes, pickle them with Bay fait, and after three months, with a large quantity of water di- ftil in afhcswitha gentle fire, fo have you Oil, and Spi- rit or water, which keep for other diftillations.Wec%r/« hath it thus, Rofarum folia, in umbra aliquandiu ajfervafa in matula vitrea magna ponuntur , cnjui fit fundus lams, & ad di- midium vas impletur : inde ajftwditur ipfis Rofarum foliis tantum aqua rofacea (lillatitia, quantum fatis fuerit , ut optin.e made ant : appofiteque pileo vitreo caco, ftipatifque sptur.c iitnpi Cera gwmntiia, quindecim uitvus eqmno jimo maccrantur : fie tamen, ut mutato, cum frigefcere cceperit y fimo, color aqualis fervetur. Appofito mox matula roflra- to pileoy igne moderato cinerum, aqua omnis elicitur : qua rurfus in eadem matula, optime priHs A facibus mundata, ablutaque ponitur , & calentis aqua balneo Untiffmo igne elicitur, dum tota in vat recipiens abeat. Nam in fundo matula remanent oleum rofarum , colore rubmm , p e rfpi- fuumj & Mofchi odm fuaviter fragrant. This Chap. 46. Of (Perfuming EJfencesl 3 4 j> This is the greateft of all vegetable perfumes, and of an ineftimable value. V. To make Oil of Calamus Aromaticus. It is made as oil of Cinnamon: it is a very great perfume, helps a ftinking breath, vomiting, weak me- mory, &c. VI. To make Oil of Rhodium. It is made as oil of Cinnamon : is a very excellent perfume, good for the head, breath and the fenfes. VII. To make Oil of Indian Spicknard. By infufion it is made by the fir ft Section ', by di ft illation j as oil of Cinnamon. It is an eminent Perfume. VIII. To make Oil of Benjamin. Take Benjamin fix ounces in powder , which dif- folve in oil of Tartar and AquA Rofarum of each one pound, which diftil with a clofe pipe in an Alembick. So is made oil of Storaxand Labdanum. IX. To make Oil of St or ax compound. Take oil of Ben , or fweet Almonds one pound, Storax groily beaten four ounces, Benjamin, Cloves, of each two ounces, digelt ( till the Gums are melted ) over hot coals j then prefs out the oil diligently. CHAP. XLVI. Of Perfuming Effences. I. TT 1 /^ way to extract Effences is fomewhat di A cult, viz. by Dift illation. Calcination, Digeftion or MenftrtiUm. II. If by Menjlmum, ufe not a watry one for a watry eflence*, nor an oily one for an oily efTence *, becaufe being of like natures, they are not eafily fepa - Z 3 rated', 2hices. Lib. 4.' rated \ but on the contrary, chufe an oily Menftruum for a watry efTence, and a watry Menftrwm for an oily efTence. III. If the efTence of any metal be to be extracted by a corrofive menftruurnffcex the work is done,feparate the falts from the waters, and ufe only thofe falts which will be eafily taken out again •, Vitriol and Alom are ve- ry difficult to be feparated by reafon of their earthy fubitance. IV. To extrafl the cjfence out of Musk^ Ambergriefe, Civet, and other Spices or Aromaticks. Mix the perfume with oil of Ben, which in a glafs- bottle fet in the Sun or Sand for ten days, then {train it from the dregs, and the efTence will be imbibed in the oil. Then take Ipiritof Winc,and diftiiied fountain wa- ter,which mix with the faid oil, and digeft for fix days: then diftil in fand •, fo will the efTence and water afcend, ( the oil remaining at bottom without any fcent ) that efTence and water diftil in Balneo in a gtafs velfel, till the water be come off, and leave the efTence in the bot- tom in the form of oil. V. Another way to do the fame. Infufe the matter in fpirit of Wine a fufficient quan- tity, digeft and ferment for ten days., then diftil in land, as long as any water will come over ( but have a care of burning,) which diftiiied Liquor draw ottin Balneo^mtti a very gentle heat and the quintefTence will be left in the bottom, of a liquid form. VI . To extract the ejfence out of Herbs and Flowers, as of Sweet Marjoram, Bafil, Orange-power s-, Jafemin, &C. Bruife the matter, and put it into a glafs veflel to fer- ment in Horie-dung for a month •, then diftil in Balneo : let it in dung for a week again, and diftil in Balnea again •, which reiterate fo long as it will yield any li- quor •, j:ut the diftiiied matter upon the Caput mor- Chap. 47. Of fer fuming Unguents. 3 5 1 mum, diftilling thus for fix days : draw off the water in Balneo •, and the effence remaining exprefs in a prefs : which being a week fermented in dung, will yield the perfed fcent, colour and vertues of the matter defired. VH. To extract the ejfence out of Salts. Calcine the Salt, and grind it very final], then lay it upon a marble in a moift Cellar, fetting under it a pan to receive the diflblution ^ therein let it ferment for a month, then with a gentle fire diltil in Balneo : caft away the infipid water, which comes from it •, and fen that which remains in the bottom, to ferment another month, then diltil out the infipid water as before *, re- peating this work fo long as any infipid water may be drawn : then evaporate away all the moifture , and what remains is the quinteilence of Salt. Where note, l.That thefe Saline quintejfences as they may be ufed, will draw forth the perfett andcompleatejfeme of any vegetable whatfocver. 2. That the ejfence of Salts thus drawn, willjcarcely come to two ounces in abound. CHAP. XLVII. Of Perfuming Unguents. !• HpO make Unguentum Pomatum, or Ointment of X apples. Take Hogs Lard three pound , Shecps Suit nine ounces, bruiied Cloves one drachm, Aqua Rofarmn two ounces, Pomwaters pared and diced one pound, boil all to the Confumption of the Rofe- water •, then ftrain without prefllng, to every pound of which add oil of Rhodium and Cinnamon of each thirty drops. Z 4 II. To 2ji Tolygrafikes. Lib. 4. II. To make a compound Pomatum. Take of the Pomatum aforefaid, (without the oils) four pound, Spicknard, Cloves of each two ounces, Cinnamon, Storax, Benjamin of each one ounce (the Spices and Gumsbruifed and tyed up in a thin rag ) Rofe-water eight ounces -, boil to the Confumption of the Rofe- water, then add white wax eight ounces,which mix well by melting, ftrain it again being hot •, and when it is almoft cold,mix therewith oil of Muskfmade by the firft Section of the five and fortieth Chapter ) then put it out, and keep it for ufe. III. Another excellent Ointment. Take hogs griefe one pound , Saccharum Saturni two ounces, mix them well by gently melting them •, to which add oils of Musk and Ambergriefe of each half an ounce, let them all cool, and beat the Unguent well in a mortar, and keep it for ufe. IV. To make. Dnguentnm Mofchamm. Take hogsgriefe one pound,Ambergriefe, Mofch of each one drachm and a half , ( ground with oil of Ja- femin upon a marble ) adeps Rofamm half an ounce ( ground with Civet one drachm ) mix all together into an ointment which keep for ufe. r>tf * n -\r T -*7 T T T v> it. n r. ALV iii. Of Perfuming Powders. I. TpO made Powder of Ox dung. JL Take red Ox dung in the month of May and dry it well, make it into an impalpable Powder by grinding : it is an excellent Perfume without any other addition - 7 yet if you add to one pound of the former, 1 ; . • ■ Musk, Chap. 48. Offerfuming Towders. 30 Musk, ana* Ambergriefe of each one drachm, it will be beyond comparifon. II. To make Cyprian Powder. Gather Musk mofs of the Oak in December, January or February-, wafh it very clean in Rofe -water, then dry it,ftcep it in Rofe-water for two days,then dry it again, which do oftentimes •, then bring it into fine Powder and fierce it *, of which take one pound, Musk one ounce, Ambergriefe half an ounce, Civet two drachms, yellow Sanders in powder two ounces, mix all well together in a marble mortar. III. Another way to make the fame. Take of the aforefaid powder of Oak-mofs one pound, Benjamin, Storax of each two ounces in fine' Powder ^ Musk, Ambergriefe and Civet of each three drachms, mix them well in a mortar. IV. A Sweet Powder to lay among cloaths. Take Damask-rofe leaves dryed one pound, Musk hall a drachm, Violet leaves three ounces, mix them and put them in a bag. V. Another for the fame or to wear about one. Take Rofe leaves dryed one pound, Cloves in pow- der half an ounce , Spicknard two drachms, Storax, Cinnamon of each three drachms, Musk half a drachm, mix them and put them into bags for ufe. VI. Powder offweet Orrice, the firft way. Take Florentine Or rice root in powder one pound, Benjamin, Cloves of each four ounces in powder, mix them. VII. Powder of Florentine Orrice , the Second Way. Take of Orrice root fix ounces, Rofe leaves in pow- der four ounces, Marjoram, Cloves, Storax in powder of each one oucc^, Benjamin, yellow Sanders of each half an ounce, Violets four ounces. Musk one drachm, Cyperus j e * Tolygraphices . Lib. 4. Cyperus half a drachm, mix them : heing grofly pow- dered, put them into bags to lay amongft linnen: but being fine, they will ferve for other uies, as we ftiall fhew. VIII. Powder ofOrrice roots, the third way , excellent for linnen in bags. Take roots of Iris one pound,fwectMarjoram twelve ounces, flowers of Rofemary and Roman Camomil, leaves of Tlme y Geranium Mofchamm, Savory of each four ounces, Cyperus roots, Benjamin, yellow Sanders, Lignum Rhodmm,Cition ycc\,Storax, Labdanum,C[oves y Cinnamon of each one ounce, Musk two drachms, Ci- vet one drachm and a half, Ambergriefe one drachm, powder and mix them for bags. This compofition will retain its ftrength near twenty years. IX. Powder ofOrrice, the fourth Way. Take Orrice roots in powder one pound, Calamus jiromatkHSiCloves, dryed Rofe leaves, Coriander feed, Geranium Mofchamm of each three ounces, Lignum siloes, Marjoram, Orange peels of each one ounce, Sto- rax one ounce and a half, Labdanum half an ounce, Lavender, Spicknard of each four ounces, powder all and mix them, to which add Musk, Ambergriefe of each two fcruples. X. Pulvis Calami Aromatici compofitus. Take Calamus Aromattcus, yellow Sanders of each one ounce, Marjoram, Geranium Mofchamm of each one ounce, Rofe leaves, Violets , of each two drachms, Nutmegs, Cloves of each one drachm, Musk half a drachm, make all into powder, which put in bags for Linnen. XI. Another of the fame. Take Calamus Aromaticus* Florentine Iris roots of each two ounces , Violet flowers dryed one ounce, round Cyperus roots two drachms, adeps Rofamm one drachm ^M I ,»«, #-,*,-" .f\ ? VW', * ,,«. Ch ap. 4 9 • Of Tcr fuming Balfams. 3 j y drachm and a half, reduce all into a very fine powder : it is excellent to lay among Linnen, or to ftrew in the hair. XII. An excellent perfuming Powder for the hair. Take Iris roots in fine powder one ounce and a half, Benjamin, Storax^ Cloves, Musk of each two drachms : being all in fine powder, mix them for a Perfume for hair Powder. Take of this Perfume one drachm,Rice- flower impalpable one pound, mix them for a powder for the hair. Note, fome uie white ftarch, flower of French Beans and the like. CHAP. XLIX. Of Perfuming Balfamsl Ii "J^fAtural Balfam perfumed. XN Take Balfamum vernm one ounce, Musk, Am- bergriefe, Civet of each two fcruples, mixthem, for a Perfume : it is the moft fragrant and durable of all Perfumes. II. An odoriferous compound Balfam. Take of the aforefaid Balfam perfumed one ounce, oils o{ Rhodium and Cinnamon of each two drachms, mixthem : this is an incomparable Perfume, and bet- ter than the other for fuch as are not affected fo much with musk. III. Balfamum Mofchatum. Take oil of Musk one drachm, oil of Cinnamon half a fcruple, Virgin wax one drachm and a half, melt the wax, and mix them according to Art. IV. Another very good. Take Cloves , Cinnamon , Lavender, Nutmegs of each 5 5 <* folygraphkes. Lib. *£ each two drachms, oils of Cloves and Fhodinm of each half a drachm , Wax three drachms, I lusk and Amber- griele of each ten grains, mix them into a Balfam. V. Another very excellent for thofe that love not the [cent efMush^andthe tike. Take oil of Geranium Mofchatnm ( made as adeps Rofarum by the fourth Section of the five and fortieth Chapter) adeps Rofamm, oil of Cinnamon of each one drachm, Virgin wax fix drachms, melt the wax, and mix the oils for a Perfume. CHAP. L. Of Perfuming Tablets. I. *Tp»0 make red Muskardines or Tablets. X Diflolve Gum Tragacanth in Rofe-water, fo t hat it may be as thick as Geliy : which make into parte with the following compofition. Take Amxlum one pound, fine Sugar half a pound, Cochencle two ounces, Musk three drachms, all being in fine powder, mix them, and make Tablets with the aforefaid Mucilaee ot lragacanth, fquare, long, round, or of what form J v ;[ lv " iV ;' w*m« "*y "i«»Ai wvcn, outor wtnch bread natn been lately drawn: but be fureyoudry them till they be as hard as horns. If. Another fort of red Tablets. Take of the aforefaid compofition one pound, Cloves, Cinnamon, Nutmegs, Ginger of each two ounces, Cochenele one ounce, all being in fine powder, make into Tablets, with the aforefaid Mucilage, and dry as aforefaid. fe w.r* Chap. 50. OfPerfumingTablets. 357 III. To mak§ yellow Tablets. Take Amylum one pound, fine Sugar half a pound, yellow Sanders four ounces, Saffron two ounces, (or you may dip the Amylum in ftrong tincture of Saffron, and then dry it again ) Musk four drachms, all being in fine powder,make the mafs into Tablets with theafore- faid Mucilage, adding oil of Cinnamon in drop* two drachms, dry them carefully in the made. IV. Another fort of yellow Tablets. Take Amylum dyed with tincture of Saffron one pound, Sugar half a pound, Saffron two ounces, Nut- megs, Cinnamon, Ginger of each one ounce, Carro- ways half an ouqce, Musk three drachms, Ambergriefe one drachm, all in fine powder make into Tablets, as aforefaid , adding oil of Cinnamon two drachms •, which dry in the fhade, till they be as hard as Horn. V. To make Mnf car dines or Tablets of any other colour. You muft make them after the lame manner, only adding the colour you do intend-, and in this cafe we think that it is better that the Amybm be dipt in the tincture, and dryed firft before you ufe it. Where note, that thefe Tablets when ufed are to be held in the mouth, in which they will dhTolve, thereby cheering the heart, reviving the fenfes, comforting the fpirits, ftrengthning nature, rcftoring the body, and indeed nobly perfuming the breath. For them that do not love Musk, you may make them without, ufing inltead thereof fo much the more oil of Rofes or Cinnamon. CHAR jj 8 tPolygraphices. Lib. 4. CHAP. LI. Of making pomanders for Bracelets, I. r ~f*Hefirftfm.Take Orrice powder, Cloves,Mace, X Cinnamon, of each half an ounce, yellow San- ders, Styrax, fweet Ajfa of each two drachms, Amber- griefe, Musk of each one drachm, Balfam of ?er«, oil c£ Rhodium of each one fcruple , Civet two drachms, all being in fine powder ( except the Balfam and Oil ) mix together , and make into pafte with mucilage aforefaid, of which form Beads, drying them in the fhade for ufe. II. The fecond fort. Take Storax Labdanum one drachm and a half,Benjamin one drachm, Cloves,Mace, Spicknard, Geranmm Mofchatum of each ten grains , Musk, Ambergriefe of each fix grains *, with mucilage make a Pomander for Bracelets. III. The third fort. Take Damask-Rofe leaves exun- gulated two ounces, beat them impalpable : Musk, Ambergriefe of each two fcruples, Civet one fcruple, Labdanum one drachm with mucilage of gum Traga- canth, inRofe-water aforefaid, make a Pomander for Bracelets. IV. The fourth fort. Take Storax, Benjamin of each an ounce and half, Musk two drachms , oil of Cinnamon one drachm , with Mucilage aforefaid make a pafte of Pomander, very excellent. CHAP^ ****..r <^'*^*Uafol^&.tfs'~&*Vil& ! &i\ -wi^i Chap. 5 1 . Offer fuming WajhcfaUs. j 5 9 CHAP. LIL Of Perfuming Wafb balls* I. *T*0 make Barbers Waft-balls. X Take purified Venetian Soap fix ounces, Ma- caleb four ounces, Ireos, Amylnm of each feven ounces, Cloves two ounces, Labdamm, Annifeeds of each one ounce,Nutmegs, Marjoram,Cyprefs-powder, Geranium, Mofchatnm, Camphire of each half an ounce, Storax li* cjnida half a drachm, Musk ten grains, all being in fine powder, with a little fine Sugar, beat all in a mortar, and make them up into Wafh-balls. II. To do the fame another way. Take of the faid Soap two pound, juice of Macaleb two ounces, Cloves, Orrice of each three ounces, Lab* danum two ounces, Storax one ounce, all being in fine powder, mix with the Soap, of which make balls, dry- ing them in the fhadow. III. To make Balls of white Soap. Take of white Soap five pound, Lis four ounces, Amylum^ white Sanders of each three ounces, Storax one ounce , all in powder, lieep in Musk-water , of which make parte for Wafh-balls. IV. Another fort very good. Take of white Soap four pound, Orrice fix ounces, Macaleb three ounces, Cloves two ounces, all in pow- der mix with the Soap, with a little oil of Spike, Rho.- dium or the like, of which make Balls. V. Another was to make them of Goats fat. Make a ftrong Lixivium of Pot-afhes, as that a new laid egg will fwim thereupon, which boil with Citron peels ; take of this Lye twenty pound, Goats fat two pound, 360 Tolygraphkes. Lib 4. pound, boil it for an hour, then flrainit through a lin. nen cloth into broad platters of fair water, expofing it to the Sun, mix it often every day till it begins to grow hard,of which you may form balls, which you may per- fume with Musk half a drachm, Civet one fcruple, oil of Cinnamon ten grains. CHAP. LIIL Of perfuming Soaps. I. **T*0 parifie Venetian Soap. J Cut it fmall, to which put fome Rofe -water, or other perfuming water, boil them a while , then ftrain it and it will be fweet and good, then take off the Soap which fwims a top with a fpoon, and lay it upon a tyle, and it will prefently be dry, being white, free from filth and unctuofity. II. Another way to do the fame. Grate the Soap, and dry it in the Sun, or an Oven, powder and fierce it, then moiften it with fome fweet water or oil of Spike,which dry again ( in the fhadow ) and keep it for ufe. III. To make white mmked Soap. Milk of Macaleb one ounce, Musk, Civet of each ten grains , mix them and make ail into thick cakes or rouls. IV. Another kind of fweet Soap, Take of the oldeft Venice Soap, which fcrape and dry three days in the Sun (purifying it as aforefaid) two pound, Jreos, Amykm of each fix ounces, Storax liqmda two ounces, mix them well whilfv hot 5 which put into pans to form Cakes. CJi ap . 5 4. Of burning Perfumes. j 6 1 T. T0 w^% /0/r Soap of Naples. Take of Lixivium of Pot-aihes ( fo ftrong as to bear an egg ) fixteen pound,Deers Suet two pound, fet them upon the fire to fimper •, put all into a glafed velfei with a large bottom, fet it in the Sun for a while, ftirring it five or fix times a day with a ftick, till it wax hard like paffce. Then take of this pafte, to which put Musked Rofe-water •, keep it eight days in the Sun, itirring it as aforefaid, fo long as it may be neither too hard nor too foft^ then put it up in boxes or pets. VI. To make the fame Soap, mussed. Put to the laid Soap, Rofe-water two pound, fine musk in powder half a drachm^ then mix the faid water as before. VII. Another exquijite Soap. Take of the aforefaid Lixivium or oil of Tartar />«• deliquium twelve pound, oil Olive three pound, mix them, fAmylnm two pound, Roman Vitriol one ounce in powder, Glair of eggs two ounces, put all together, and ftir continually for four hours time, then let it ftand the fpace of a day and it is done. You may per- fume it as before - this makes the hair fair. VIII. Another exceeding the former. Take Crown-foap, Vine-alhes of each one pound, make it into Cakes with powder of Roch Alom and Tartar of each alike , which you may perfume at pleafure. IX. To get the juice or milk^of Macaleb. Take the fweet and odoriferous grains of Macaleb^ which beat in a mortar ( with Rofe-water,or fomc per- fuming- water ) till it becomes like pap, then prefs out the juice or milk -, which ufe within two or three days left it fpoil. Aa CHAP, 361 Volygraphkes. Lib. 4. CHAP. XIV. : Of Burning Perfumes* I. nr*0 make perfumed lights. JL Take Olibamm two ounces, Camphire one ounce, beat them into powder, of which make, with wax, balls or rowls, which put into a glafs lamp with Rofe- water and lighted with a candle, will give a fair light, and a very good fcent. II. Another for a Lamp. Take fvveet oil Olive one pound, Benjamin, Storax in powder one ounce, Musk, Ambergriefe of each one fcruple, mix all with the oil, which put into a lamp to burn .• and the oil will yield a fragrant odour. III. To make perfumed Candles. Take Labdawm^ Myrrh, Xylo-aloes, Styrax calamita of each one ounce and a hal£ Willow Charcoal one ounce, Ambergriefe, Musk of each ten grains, make them into pafte with mucilage of GumTragacanth in Rofe-water, which make into rouls like Candles, and dry for ufe. IV. A perfume to fmoal^and burn. Take Labdamm two ounces , Storax one ounce, Benjamin, Cloves, Mace of each half an ounce, Musk, Civet of each ten-grains, all in line powder, make up into cakes with mucilage of gum Tragacanth in Rofe- water,which dry •, and keep among your cloaths,which when occafion requires, you may burn in a chafing- difh of coals. V. Another fmoaking perfume to burn. Take Labdanum two drachms, Storax one drachm, Benjamin, Frankincenfe, white Amber, Xylo-aloes of each Chap, j j. Of Animal Ter fumes. j£j each two fcruples, Ambergriefe , Musk of each five grains, make all into Cakes asaforefaid. VI. Another very excellent. Take Storax, benjamin of each one ounce, wood of Aloes half an ounce, Ambergriefe, Musk, Civet, Balfam of Peru, oil of Rhodium, ofeach two fcruples, Ivory burnt black a fufficicnt quantity, powder what is to be powdered, and mix all together *, which make into a parte, with the Ivory black and the mucilage aforefaid - make little cakes and dry them, which keep in glafles clofe ftopt for ufe. VII. Another very good, bvt of lefs cofl;. Take Olibanum one pound, Styrax Calamita and Lt- quida of each eight ounces, Labdanum lix ounces, Wil- low charcoal a fufficient quantity, with mucilage of Tragacanth, make a parte as aforefaid. CHAP. LV. Of Animal and Mineral Perfumes* I. ^T^He Animal Perfume o/Paracelfus. X Take Cow-dung in the month of May or JW, anddiftil it in Balneo •, and the water thereof will be an excellent perfume, and have thefcent of Amber- griefe. See our SynopfisMecjicinalib.?,. cap.-j^.fect.^. II. Lard muskified, a great perfume. Tak hogs lard very pure one drachm,Musk,Civet,of each half a drachm, mix them well for boxes. III. The Mineral Perfume of Antimony. Diflblve Antimony in oil of Flints, Cryltal or Sandy coagulate the fomtion into a red mafs, put thereon Spirit of Urine , and digeil till the Spirit is tinged *, A a 2 pour 564 Pdygraphices. Lib. 4. pour it off, and put on more , till all the tin&ure is extra&ed :, put all the tindures together , and evapo- rate the Spirit of Urine in Balnco, and there .will re- main a blood-red liquor at bottom , upon which put Spirit of Wine, and you (hall extract a very pure tin- cture imelling likeGarlick : digeft it a month, and it will fmell like Balm , digeft it a while longer, and it will fmell like Musk or Ambergriefe. Befides being a perfume, it is an excellent ludorifick, and cures the Plague, Fevers, Lues Venerea, &c. IV. After the fame manner you may mak$ as fubfiantial a perfume of Sulphur or Brimfione. The making of the oil of Flints, we have taught at thefeven and fiftieth Setlion of the nine and twentieth Chapter of the third Bool^ CHAP. LVI. Of the AdulttrAtion of Musk , civet and Ambergriefe. BT reafon that thefe choke Perfumes art often adulte- rated or counterfeited , we (hall do our endeavour to mjcover the cheat, left any being deceived ihcieby favald fuffer loft. I. MusJ^is often adulterated by mixing Nutmegs, Mace, Cinnamon, Cloves, Spicknard of each alike in a fine or impalpable powder with warm blood of Pigeons , and then dryed in the Sun , theR beaten again, and moiftned with Musk- water, drying and re- peating the fame work eight or ten times •, adding at laft a quarter part of pure Musk by moiftning and mixing with Musk-water •, then dividing the mafs into feveral C/iap. 57. Of ferfumingQoth^&c. 365 feveral parts, and rouling them in the hair of a Goat, which grows under his tail. II. Others adulterate it tbm : By filling the Musk-cods with Goats blood, and a little toafted bread, mixed with a quarter part of Musk, well beaten together. The cheat isdifcerned by the brightnefs of the Goats blood. III. Or thus, Take Storax, Labdanurn, powder of Xylo-aloes, of each four ounces,Musk and Civet of each half an ounce, mix all together with Rofe- water. The cheat isdifcerned, by its eafie dhTolving in water, and its different colour and fcent. IV. Or thus. Take Goats blood, powder of Angelica roots, Musk, of each alike, make a mixture. V. To adulterate Civet : Mix with it the Gall of an Ox, and Storax liquefied and warned : or you may adulterate it by the addition of Honey of Crete. VI. To reft ore the loft fcent toMusk^ or Amber griefc. This is done, by hanging it fome time in a }akes or houfe of Office •, for by thefe ill fcents its innate vertue and odour is excited and revived. CHAP. LVII. Of the way of Perfuming cloth 3 Skins, Gloves And the like* I. '"TV) Perfume Shins or Gloves. JL Put a little Civet thereon here and there, (if Gloves,along the feams ) then waih in Rofe or musked water four or five times, or fo long as that they favour no more of the leather, preiTing them hard every time *, then lay them in a platter,covered with the faid water, A a 3 mixed ^66 tpolygraphkes] Lib. 4. jnixed with powder of Cyprefs, a day or two-, take them out, prefs them,and dry them in the fhadow : be- in half dry, befmear them a little with Civet mix'd with oil of Jafemin or Ben, on the inward iide chafing them with your hands before a fire, till you think that the Civet hath pierced or gone through the leather :, leaving them fo a day or more •, then rub with a Cloth that the Gloves or Leather may grow foft •, leaving tjiem Co till they are almoft dry, being drawn and ftretched out*, then hold them over fome burning Per- fume to dry, and wetting them again with Musk- water, do thus twenty times •, laftly, take Musk and Amber- griefe a fufficient quantity, which mix with oil of Ja- Jemin,Ben]amin or Ben, diflblve at the fire with a little perfumed water, with which (with a pencil.,) ftrike the Gloves or Leather over on the outfide, befmearing the feams with Civet ; laftly lay them for fix or eight days between two mattreiles, fo will the Skins or Gloves be excellently perfumed. II. Another way very excellent. Take three pints of Wine, Sheeps fuet or fat one pound,boil them together in a veflel clofe covered, this done, wafh the Griefe fix or feven times well with fair water,tben boil it again in White- wine and Rofe- water of each one pound and a half, with a finall fire, till the put pulp of fweet Navews roaftcd half a pound, boil all mRofe-waterhalf an hour, theq ftrain it, and beat it in amortar, with a little oil of Jafemin and Musk, with which befmear your Glovesf after due warning as afore^ &id ) rubbing it well in by the fire. III. Another way for Gloves. Wa(h new Corduban Gloves, wafh them well three or four days ( once a day) in eood White-wine, pref- fjng and fmoothing them well j laftly, walh them in musked Chap. 5 8. Of making Ink. 367 musked water, letting them lye therein for a day, then dry them with care. This done, deep Musk^ Amber, BazJl of each one drachm in a quart of fvveet water, in which diflblve gum Tragacanth three drachms, boil all gently together, and' in the boiling add Zibet one fcruple, with which befmear the Gloves, rubbing and chafing it in, then drying them according to Art. IV. Or fW,Firit warn the Gloves or Skins in white- wine, then dry them in the (hade •, then wafh them in fweet water, mixed with oil of Cloves, and Labdamim of each alike: laftly, take Musk, Civet, Ambergriefe of each the quantity of fix grains, oil of Musk half a drachm, mucilage of gum Tragacanth fifteen grains, mix them well together in a moitar, which chafe into the wafh'd Gloves before the fire. V. Cloths, Linnenor Woollen, Coders, Trnnki and the like,arebeft perfumed(with little coftj with the fmoak of burning Perfumes. CHAP. LVIII. Of making various forts of Ink, I "¥""0 make good blacky writing Ink. 1 Take ponderous galls three ounces in pow- der, White-wine, or in place thereof rain- water, which is better, three pound, infufe them in the Sun or in a gentle heat two days: then take Roman Vitriol well coloured and powdered, which put therein, and fct all in the Sun for two days more •, (hake all together, to which add of good gum Arabick in little bits one ounce with a little white Sugar, which diflblve over a gentle fire. Aa 4 W.To j68 folygraphkes. Lib. 4. II. To make red writing Ink. Take Rafpings of Brazil one ounce , white lead, Alom,ofcaciitwo drachms, grind and mingle them, infufe them in Urine one pound, with gum Arabic^ eight fcruples. III. Another way to make red Ink. Take Wine-vinegar two pound, Rafpings of Brazil two ounces, Alom half an ounce, infufe all ten days ; then gently boil , to which add gum Arabick five drachms, dilfolve the Gum, ftrain, and keep it for ufe. IV. To make green Inl^to write with. Make fine Verdigriefe into pafte with itrong Vine- gar, and infufion of green galls, in which a little gum Arabick hath beendilfolved, let it dry, and when you would write with it, temper it with infufion of green Galls aforefaid. V. Another way to make green Jnkjo write with. Dilfolve Verdigriefe in Vinegar, then ftrain it, and grind it with a tittle honey and mucilage of gum Tra- gacanth, upon a porphyry Hone. VI . To make slew In^to write with. Grind Indico with honey mixed with glair of eggs of glew-water, made of Ifinglafs diffolved in water, and ftrained. VII. Tomabe ypo \*witit!p Inf* c^ Vermilion. Grind Vermilion well upon a porphyry ftone, with common water •, dry it and put it into a glafs vcifel, to which put Urine, make all together, let it fettle, then pour off the Urine •, and pitting on more Urine, re- peat this work eight or ten times, fo will the Vermilion bcwellcleanfed-, to which put glair of Eggs tofwim on it above a fingers breadth, ftir them together, and fetling abitract the glair : then put on more glair of eggs, repeating the fame work eight or ten times alfo, to Chap. 59. Of making Sealing Wax. 3 69 to take away the fcent of the Urine : Iaftly,mix it with frefh glair, and keep it in a glafs-veflel clofe ftop'd for ufe. When you ufe it, mix it with water or vinegar. VIII. To make Printers black- This is made by mingling Lamp-black with liquid varnifh, and boiling it a little, which you may make thick at pleafiirc. You muft make it moifter in winter, than in Summer •, and note that the thicker Ink makes the fairer letter. If it be too thick, you muft put in more Linked oil, or oil of Walnuts, lb may you make it thicker or thin- ner at pleafure. IX. To make red Printing Ink. Grind Vermilion very well with the aforefaid liquid Varnifh or Linfeed oil. X. To make green Printing Ink. Grind Spanilh green with the faid Varnifh or Lin- feed oil as aforefaid : And after the fame manner, may you make Printers blew, by grinding Azure with the laid Linfeed oil. CHAP. LIX. Of miking Sealing Wax. I. ""T^C? make red Staling Wax. A Take white Bees-wax one pound, Turpen- tine three ounces, Vermilion in powder well ground, oil Olive, of each one ounce, melt the wax and Tur- pentine :, let it cool a littk, then add the reft, beating them well together. II. To do the fame otherwife. This is done by taking away the Vermilion, and ad- ding j7 o Tolygrapkices. Lib. \. ding inftead thereof red Lead three ounces, to the for- mer things, III. To make greenWax. Take Wax one pound , Turpentine three ounces, Verdigriefe ground, Oil Olive of each one ounce, com- pleat the work by the firft Section. IV. To make blackWax. Take Bees- Wax one pound , Turpentine three ounces, black earth, Oil Olive of each one ounce, mix and make Wax as aforelaid. V. T o make Wax per fumed. This is done by mixing with the OilOlive aforefaid, Musk, Ambergriefc, or any other eminent Perfume, as oil of Cinnamon, adeps Rofarum,or the like one drachm, more or lefs, according as you intend to have its fcent extended. VI. After the fame manner you may make Sealing wax of all colours, having what fcent you pleafe •, by mixing the fcent intended, with the OilOlive, and put- ting the colour in, in place of the Vermilion. CHAP. LX. Of the various wayes of making Artificial Pearls. I. ''T^HeftrJlWay. Diflblve mother of Pearl in fpirit A of Vinegar, then precipitate it with oil of Sulphur per Campanam ( not with Oleum Tartari, for that takes away the fplendor ) which adds a luftre to it •, dry the precipitate, and mix it with whites of eggs *, of which mafs you may make Pearls, ofwhatlargenefs you pleafe , which before they be dry, bore through with a filver Wire , fo will you have pearls fcarcely to Chap. 60. Of making Artificial Tearls. 371 to be difcerned from thofe which are truly natural. II. The fecond way. Take Chalk, put it into the fire, letting it lye till it breaks •, grind it impalpable, and mix it with whites of eggs , of which form pearls, boring them as aforefaid ; dry them, then wet and cover them with leaf fdver. III. The third way. Take prepared Crabs-eyes ground into impalpable powder, and with giair make Pearls •, which bore, as aforefaid*, dry them, and boil them in Cows milk ; then in the fhade (free from duft) dry them well •, they will pleafe. IV. The fourth way. Take Potters earth, and make them of what form you pleafe-, dry them in the Sun, or in the gentle heat of a furnace *, then wet them with glair of eggs, lightly coloured with Bole-armoniack, and cover them with leaves of filver, being firft wet with water: when they are dry, polifli them with a tooth, and they will be Oriental. Then take bits of Parchment, and wafh them in warm water, till the water grows fomewhat thick, boil and fbrain it,and ufe it warm : then fatten each pearl through its hole upon a fine piece of wire, and plunge them into the water of Parchment, taking them out again-, then turn them round, that the glewy liquor may equally cover them •, thus the filver whitenefs will the better (nine through, ib that the pearls will feem to be truly natural, and be- ing compared, will rather exceed. V. The fifth way. Calcine Mufcle and (hail /hells in a Crucible, till they are very white, even asfnow-, with glair make Pearls, which bore by the firft Scdion,dry them in the Sun -, dip them in red wine, dry them again, and they will be fair. Vl.The fixthway. Take Sublimate two ounces, Tin- gUfs one ounce, mix them, and iublime them toge- ther, and \ou will have a fublimatc not mferiour to the j 7 2 Tolygraphices . Lib. 4. the beft orient Pearls in the world,of which, with glair, you may form what you pleafe. VII. The fevemh way. Take any of the aforefaid particulars , and mix them ( inftead of glair ) with ground Varnifh, ( made of gum Amwa y and the Al- cool of wine ) of which make pearls-, thefe will in all refpe&s be like the natural \ for thefe will no more diifolve in water, than the truly natural-, which all thofe that are made of glair of eggs are unavoidably fiibject to. VIII. The eighth way. After difiblution, precipita. tion, edulcoration , ficcation and formation, put the pear-Is into a loaf of bread, and bake it in the Oven with other bread, fo long till the loaf is much burnt, then take them out, and wafh them, firit in good juice of Unions, then in clear Spring-water-, and they will be as fair as the truly natural. Or after baking, give them to Pigeons to eat, keeping them clofe up, and in the dung you will find the pearl exceeding fair: where note, you mult give the Pigeons nothing to eat in three days time. IX. The ninth way. After difiblution of fmall oriental pearls in juice of Limons, make the form thereof with clarified honey, moiftning your hand with AquaMellis^ this done, perfect them as before. X. The tenth \\\ty. Take filtrated juice of Limcns, powder of pearl, of each fix ounces , Talk^ one ounce, put them into a glafs, and ftop it dole, let it fifteen days in horfe-dung , and it will be a white pafte :, of which form pearl, bore them,and dry them in the Sun } at laft in pafte of barley meal ( •j«,. a barky loaf) four fingers thick, flick the pearl , fo that they may not touch, ftop the holes, and cover them with pafte -, fet it into an Oven, and bake it with bread, and you will find them hard and clear. XlThe Chap. 60. OfmakingArtificial Pearls. 375 XI. The eleventh way. Having formed them of the matter intended,bored and dryed them, put them into Quickfilver, fet over a glowing heat,ftirring them well about, that the Quickfilver may ftick to them •, then dip them into glair of eggs, upon a glowing heat, and they are done -, or being dry, boil them in Linfeed oil, and wafh them in warm water. XII. The twelfth way. Take pearl three ounces, pre- pared Salt one ounce, filtrated juice of Limons, fo much as will cover them four fingers breadth : let it ftand fo long till it be a pafte:, the glafs being very clofe {top- ped, lhake all together five or fix times a day •, and when it comes to pafte, put it into a glafs with ftrong fpirit of Vinegar, lute another glafs over it •, digeft it three weeks in a cool place under the earth, fo long till all be diflblved, then mix it with a little oil of eggs, or fnail- water,till it be like pearl in colour •, then put this pafte into filver moulds and clofe them up for eight days; after which take them out, and bore them by the firft Section, and put them again into the mould for eight days-, this done, boil them in a filver porringer with milk ? laftly , dry them upon a plate, in a warm place, where neither wind nor dult may come, and they will be much fairer than any oriental pearl. XIII. T/jf thirteenth way. After the preparation of the matter in juice of Limons, or Aqua fortis, with clean hands make them into pafte, and wain them in diftilied water, which put into edulcorate calx of filver, and digeft in Horfedung for a month, fo will they be fair and very oriental. XIV. The fourteenth way. Diflblve the matter in Aqua fortis ( which let over-top it a fingers breadth ) in a glafs gourd, till all be incorporated into one bo- dy, which put into filver moulds, which have holes through them, and having ftood one day, bore them through 374 tPolygraphices. Lib 4. through the holes, as they lye in the mould with a fil- ver needle : being quite dry, take them out, put them into a glnfs clofe covered in the Sun, till they be quite dry, then put them upon a filver wire} and let them lye covered in their own fat, (that is, that fatty ilib- ftance, which fwims on the top of the menftruum in their diffolution ) fo long till they are very fair, then being ftrung, put them into a glafs egg, and let them ftand nine days in digeflion, and they will be as fair as the natural. XV. The fifteenth way. Take Tobaccopipe clay, of which form little beads ( by Sett. 14.) dry them in the Sun, and burn them in a Potters furnace, then cover them with Bole- Armoniack , tempered with whites of eggs \ being dry, dip them in water, lay on leaf filver, which dry again, and polifh them with a tooth: then take clean (havings of parchment, cut fmall, and wafhed well with warm water •, boil them in a new pot, with a flow fire, till they become fome- what thick, ftrainit, and being warm, put in the pearl upon a needle or fine wire, that the hole may not be flopped, take them out, turn them round, that the water or glew may not fettle in one place , dipping them fo often ( drying them every time) till they be thick enough, and they will appear full as fair as the truly natural . XVI. The pxttenth way. Take the impalpable and fnow-white calx of Talk, and with our bell Varnifli make a pafte -, of which form peals , and bore them with a lilver wire, on which let them dry : this done, make a mixture of the Alchool of the incomparably pure red diaphoretick Mercury, calx of talk aforefaid, fhell gold and filver (in Lib, 2. Chap. 21. Sett, i.) in a jufl: and due proportion ( as by many tryals you may find out ) in which roul your pearls till they be all Chap. 6 1. A brief difcouvfe of Metals. 37 j all over perfectly covered , then verniih them with our aforefaid verniih, which let dry according to Art, and if needbc,polifh with the impalpable powder of Putty and water. CHAR LXI. A brief difcourfe of Alchimy , and firjl of Metajis in General. I. TPHe Mineral Kingdom is divided into Metals, A Semi-metals, Salts and Stones. II. Metals are in number feven, viz.. Saturn, Jupi- ter, Mars, Sol, Venus, Mercury and Luna, called by the Vulgar, Lead, Tin, Iron, Gold, Copper, Quickiilver and Silver. III. The Semi-metals are Antimony, Tinglafs, Cinna- ber and Zinl^ IV. The Salts are chiefly Vitriol, Sulphur, Arfnick, Allom, Nitre, Borax and Salt. V. The chief Stones are Lapis Calaminaris, Tutia, Lazuli, and Lime ftone. VI. Now out of thefe the Alchymift defigns three things, to wit, 1. Either the Counterfeiting of the fine Metals. 2. Or the feparation of fine Metals out of the bafe : or, 3. The Generation of the fine Metals out of the bafe, by tranf mutation. VII. The counterfeiting of the fine Metals, is done by giving the colour, and body, of a fine Metal to that, which is bafe : as the tinging of Lead into a Gold Co- lour-, the whiting of Copper •, the reduction of Mer- cury or Quickfilver. VIII. The Separation of fine Metals out of bafe, is done }7^ (Polygraphias. Lib. 4. done by attracting of the particles or Atoms of the fine ( contained in that bafer ) into one heap or mafs, that they might not be carried away by the wings of the Volatile or bafer Metal. Thus it appears 1 there is a large quantity of Gold, in Lead, Tin, Copper and Silver : and much Silver in Tin, Copper , and Iron : the proof of this is manifefi by the parting fay ( as they call it ) to wit the teft by ftrong waters \ by which yon may find that one pound of Lead will yield near three or four penny weight of filver, and one of Cold : One pound of Tin will yield fomething above an ounce of Silver '-, and about two penny weight of Gold or more ; One pound of Silver will yield about one ounce of Gold' and Copper about a quarter of the fame quantity or more, &c. but this is according to the goodnefs of the Metals, and the skill of the undertaker ; for by this way of Separation, what is gotten will never pay the coft, it re- mains therefore, that we fear ch out fome way more profita- ble, the which in the following lines , to the true fons of Art , we {hall faithfully prefent according to the beft of our knowledge : But we are bound to be a little the more obfcure , for the fakes of fome ingrateful men by whom we know our juft meaning will be* traduced ; our ski 11 in ^ rt abufed ; and our perfon fought to be rent and defiroyed, Jhould we but adventure to be fo open , as to give them the clear knowledge thereof. Let others jearco as we have done y it is fome fatisfattion, that the matter here fought , is really in rerum natura , the which joined to the cer- tainty of another s attaining thereof, may give life to future hopes, which as the precurfor of better things may point at the great work, it felf. IX. The matter of tranfmutation is done by that great powder, tinSbm-e, Elixir , or ftone of the Philofophers , which according to the opinion of Parace //kr,and others theraoft learned, wc (hall iigniSe in few words. By Chap. 6i. O/Saturn, or Lead. J77 By this tintture ox Elixir according to the judgement ofPhilofophers the whole body of any Metal (being feparated from its impurity ) is changed into fine Gold. CHAP. LXIL Of Saturn, or Lend* I. QAtum is a cold,grofs, dull and heavy body, replete O with much impurity, yet full of a golden feed* II. It is tinged into a pure golden colour by calcina- tion thereof with Antimony, and imbibing the calx thereof with the fpirit ofVenus, lapis calaminaris, tutia^ and Zin^ feverally prepared, and mixt ana. and then reduced, adjoining to every ounce of Lead in calx a penny weight of the golden fulphur of Venus. III. Its Lunar property is extra&ed, by a fimple calci* nation with Arfnicl^and Nitre ana. and imbibition "of the faid calx for about ievcn days in the Oil of Salt. IV. Or thus. Take of our Seed or Salt of Luna one ounce, of the Salt of Venus one ounce and a half-, of the crude body of Saturn one ounce, mix, and melt rhem \ then feparate, and you fnall have the Satumian Luna y with confiderable advantage. Bb CHAP, j?8 iPolygraphices* Lib. 4. CHAP. LXIII. Of Jupiter or Tin. I. TVpiter is much a more noble body than Saturn, J and (as we faid before) abounds much more with a Solar and Lunar feed. II. It is reduced into the Imitation of filver by often melting of it, and quenching of it in the fpirit of slrfmckj or by calcination of it with Lime ( three ounces to a pound of Jupiter granulated ) and then by often extinguishing of the lame in the fpirit of uirfnick, aforefaid. III. The Luna is extracted out of it thus : Let Ju- piter be married to our Luna of the lame ftatureby the Priefl Mercury, after which let them drink their fill of the Mineral fpirit of the Grape •, then put them to bed in Taurus the exaltation of Luna and houfb of f . which wins* von muftclir> bv the means of Mars, elfe you will iofe her : Thus, take of the Seeds of Mars, and the eldeft Son of old Saturn ana. make them contend with mother Tellus , for three whole days and nights, till they conjoyn and beget a Son, white as Luna , and fixt as Sol. This Sun will by force take Jupiters wife from him , and being fruit- ful caufe her to bring forth a plentiful and profitable iflue. IV. Or thus 3 Kill Jupiter ( in conjunction with Luna) Chap. 63. Of Jupiter,V Tin. j^cjl Luna ) by the fire of Tellus, then revive the dead body ( after It is impregnated with the Mineral fpirit of the Grape ) by the help of Saturn, and you have a nume- rous off-fpring of Luna,. V. Or thus, Marry Jupiter to Luna ; then marry hint to her daughter, and join thefe uTues together , and they will fympathetically attract and join all the feed of Luna into one family or lump. VI. Or thus, Which is both thebeft and eafieft way. Take Jupiter and melt him, then quench him ten times in the fpirit of mother Tellus , till he is reduced very fmall and low: this done, join him withthc Daughter of Luna calcined with mother Tellus, and the work is over. This is very profitable, and the mofi ufeful of all, but by reafon of the unworthinefs of this generation, it can* not admit of any explication* VII. The Gold is thus extracted : marry Jupiter to Venus, and their ofF-fpring to Sol by the means of Prieft Mercury -, put them to bed ( in the life of Phoebus ) for three whole days and nights, afterwards make them drunk with the fpirit of the daughter of Venus, then make a perfect conjunction with the eldeft Son of Sa* turn, and you mall have what you fought. VIII. Or thus, Calcine Jupiter granulated one pound, with Quicklime four ounces, mix all with the Calx ^ of Venus and Luna ana. calcine again for three days, im- bibe in the fpirit of Venus (that is, the fixed oil) for feven days, then reduce to a regulus with Saturn, and afterwards feparate with Antimony* Bb2 CHAP. 3&o Volygrafhices. Lib. 4; CHAP. LXIV. Of Mars, or Iron. I. Ti /JArs is yet a more noble body, but harder and I VJ. more replete with fcoria or filth, yet very full of a Solar and Lunar fulphur. II. It is converted into Copper by the Oilorfpirit of Venus : into brafs by the means of Lapis Calaminaris y and made to imitate filver by impregnating its calx in the burning fpirit of Arfnici^ III. It has much Silver and Gold in it, but they are extracted with great difficulty •, thus, firft melt the body with an equal quantity of7V», Lead and Copper ? this done, granulate it and imbibe the body with Oil of Venus very ftrong, then calcine it with the butter of Arfnick^ ( if you extract its Silver,) or Antimony ( if its Gold ) imbibe this calx over a gentle heat in the ftrongelt oil of Flints or Sand for ten days : then reduce it. ^tl/ii'. LAY. 0/Sol, or Cold. I. Q#{ is the pureft of all Metals, and the very per- O lection of the Mineral kingdom, at the which, all our pains, labours and endeavours aim. II. This Cold of it felf is dead and without force or power, but being quickned, and enlivened, it has an Chap.66. Of Venus, orQpper. }?t an inward geminating germinating property , which be- ing raifed and brought forth by its innate life ( till now lockt up ) can dilate it felf ( having a fitting womb to receive *>)into an hundred times its own quantity *, and thereby tranfmnte and change the Mercurial property (which is indeed immature Gold) of all Metals into its own nature and kind. III. This immaturate Gold in the bodies of all Metals would have come to perfedion of its own accord, had it been ennobled with a fufficient life and heat, to have caufed fuch a natural fermentation and excretion of the abounding filth and drofs, in which the fo fmall par- ticles and Atoms of the Seminal golden property was latent, or buryed. IV. The quickning of the inward life of this Metal is folelydone by the help of the Seed of Metals, to wit Mercury, but how or after what manner we (hall more plainly Ihew iaChap. 77. CHAP. LXVI. Of Venus , or Copper. I. T TEnus is the fineft of the bafe Metals, and con- V tains more of a Golden fulphnr than them all. II. She is Whitened, and made like unto Silver, by calcining it with butter of the daughter aihuna^ and Salt of Tartar, and then reduced by Saturn, and being often melted and extinguifhed in the faid butter. III. Or thus, To the afore reduced Verms , being Bb % • melted 381 folygraphkes. Lib. 4. TO dted add ( for an ounce of 'Venus ) two penny weight of our white fixed Merc my. IV.She is made of a Golden colour by often changing the calx ( calcined with the Son of Saturn ) in the fpirit of Antimony, Zink^, Laps Calam'tnam, and lapis tmia : then reduced by being melted with a fufficient quantity of Lapis Tutia, and ten or twelve times melted, and quenched in the aforefaid fpirit. V. Her Silver is extracted as that of Tin by the third Sett, of Chap. 6^. Or thus, Calcine her, withW- ter of the daughter of Luna, to which calx adjoin the calx of Luna ana. and reduce with Saturn. VI. Her Gold is extracted thus : Calcine her with the Son of Saturn : then calcine Luna with the fame alfo : put both theie calces together and calcine for three days with theSe have with a great deal of diligence and jludy com- pared Chap. 69. Offhilofopbick Work 3 8 J pared their fayings one with another ; and\s>e have by a long and continued exercifc and practice in the Mine- ral wori^, found out not only the natures of Metals, and in what degrees cf purity they fland in one to another ', but we have alfo found out many excellent Secrets , of real Worth and Value , by which, although we cannot pro- fefs a knowledge of the great worl^ it felf, yet we thereby fee not only a pojfibitity, but alfo a probability thereof in nature ( to that man whom it fliall fo far plcafe God to enlighten} and therefore judge we may in fome mcafure the better undertake to difcourfc the fayings of thofe Wor- thies, who having attained the Myflerie thereof, thought good in Cloudy and Mysterious terms to publijh the fame to the world, that none but the truly worthy Sons of Art might be partakers thereof. In the following lines then, . we fliall tell you what has been told us, and what we do conceive thereof by the com- paring of the fayings of the mofi excellent men together, fuch as we re Paracelfus, Lullius, Ripley, Bacon, and others -, and this in fo c one if c a manner, that the opinions and judge- ments of all thofe men ( though far afunder in words ) may center not only in truth it felf, but alfo in the narrow com- pafs of the following Sections ; the which that we might fo perform, we exprefs our conceptions of their fenfe in a lan- guage confonant thereto. I. The feed of Gold is lodged in all Metals. This is apparent from their generation, whofe origi- nation is Mercury, which is indeed immaturateGold -, and fo remains Immatnrate in the bafer Metals till a ripening and meliorating fpirit quickens that feminal property lodged in the womb of impurity. II. This feed of Gold may be quickned or made to live. This is done through the death of the firft mat- ter, j 8 6 Tolygraphkes. LibJ 4. ter, and difjtofition of the fecond to a refufcitation or refurrection of that innate, energetical, and femi- nal life , and that only by the Spirit of Mother Tellns, III. This femen being qnickned , dilates it felf into other bodies , and tranfmwtes them into its own pro- perty. That is juft as the feminal life of Vegetables tranfmutes or changes that fuccus or humidity of the Earth proper to themfelves into their own forms and natures •, and fo of a little feed there becomes a great tree : fo that as the Earth is the womb out of which fo fmall a feed becomes a great tree, by the tranfmuting property of the innate ieminal life in the feed : fo all the bale Metals are the womb unto that feminal purity : in which womb if the feed be diipo- ied rightly, there will be as certain a generation and encreafe •, and the purity of the bafe Metals will be tranfmuted into that feminal property to a vaft aug- mentation. IV. That this may be rightly done, the bodies of the bafe Metals muft be opened and prepared. That is, they mull be brought into a mortification, that that ftrong band which has hitherto chained the feminal life may be broken, and fo the energetick^ oje-st'ie ih'v be fe*" 2S liber*"" * *"h'° ' c T>e r forme r ' k" the flying dragon who devours all that he comes near : this being done , the femen muft be caft into this mortified body (impregnated with the fpirit of Mo- ther Tellns ) that it may there generate, tranfiriute and fix. V. This may be done in any of the bafe Metals ; but they ( like the Earth ) yield an encreafe according to their de- gree in purity • fo that more of the body of a pure Metal is tranfmuted, than of an impure. As Chap. 69. Offhilofophkk Work 387 As barren Earth cannot yield fo great an encreafe as a fertil foil ? fc neither can a bafe Metal yield fo great an augmentation as a more fine. VI. The body of the bajer Metals being fitted , the femen tnufi be cafi into the fame to generate. That is, there is to be a conjunction of the femen or true Golden ejfence with the prepared body to be tranfmuted : now you muft be careful you ufe not the fimplebody of any Metal for t\m femen , for then you will be deceived ; the matter in which the gene- rative fpirit is lodged is another thing : if you bury a whole tree or plant in the Earth, that will not ge- nerate, and bring forth another tree, but periih and rot, the feminal or generative vertue and life is clog'd and loaded, and fo is ineffective:, but if you bury the feed of the fame tree, you may have another or more according to the quantity of feed fown :, the fame ycu muft underftand in the generation of Metals , and of the Golden work •, it is not Gold which will generate Gold, but the feed of Gold. VII. This femen muft be Volatile. Otherwife it cannot tranfmme, for nothing but a Vo- latile fpirit or eflence can dilate and fpread it felf : a fixed matter cannot operate at all, for all fixed things are dead, and their life remains in a central Itate, not fit for coattion. This is evident in the Volatile Salts of Vtnegar and Quicklime, which furpafs the Art of man to attain fimple*, but if you mix a Lixivium of Quick: lime with Vinegar, you may have a large quantity of Salt, and that fixed, which was before unattainable. Thus you fee out of two Volatile things, a third abfo- lutely fixed is produced *, and this is the condition of this great work. VIII. It mufibe of an unchangeable blood-red colour. Otherwife it could not tingj for were it only yel- low, 2 8 8 tPolygraphices. Lib. 4. low, it would create only a faintifh kind of green : but this our Philofophick tincture, generates Gold of the higheft and pureft nature , and having the deepeft yellow. IX. This Semen is made Volatile by the defirublion of its external form. That is, nature mull be brought to action, that the inactive body may let fall its Semen, out of which the Golden tree of the Philoibphers is produced. X. This Semen is made blood-red by impregnating of it with the fpirit of Mother Tell us. It is neceflary that there be a common band to con- join the bodies, which are to be united : as the bodies of the bafe Metals which are the womb for this feed arc to be mortified : fo muftthat body be,out of which you extract the 5 it (hews manifold difeafes of the heart, and alfo a Prodigal perfon. VI. If it be crooked, unequal, of various colours, and cut by other lines, it fhews an evil habit of the Liver and difeafes thence proceeding, one illnatured and foolilh. VII. If Itraight drawn and well coloured, Ihewswit, honour and health. VIII. If it has a parallel or fifter, it gives inheritances. IX. If continued with little hard krffrs , it fhews Murder according to the number of thofe knots. X. If it terminates with a Fork or Angle towards the Mount of Luna, it fhews a foolilh, hypocritical, ill-na- tured perfon, if it tends to the Menfal, it fhews a flan- derons and envious perfon. XI. When it cuts the Vital eminently to the Mount of Venus qx foror Martis , efpeciaily if the fame be of a ruddy colour, fhews danger of thieves and many ill difeafes, threatning life. CHAR 39 * Tolygraphkes* Lib 4. CHAP. LXXIL Of the Cephalic a or he ad- line. ■I. *TpHe Cephalic a arifeth below from the Cardiac a, JL and is drawn thence to the Epatka, thereby making a Triangular Figure. II. Making iuch a perfect figure ^ and it having a lively colour, without interfedion, declares one of great prudence , and a peribn of no Vulgar Wit or Fortune. III. So much the more perfecl the Triangle, fo much the more Fortunate, and it ihews a man very wife, tem- perate and couragious. IV. If the Triangle beobtufe, it fhews an evil nature, clownifl) and rude,ii there be no Triangle, it is ftill worfe, and fhews the perfonto be foolijl), a liar and prodigal, and generally one of a (hort life. V. The higher Angle being Right, or not very Acute , fhews a generous man ; but if it be very acute, or if it touch the Line of Life under the mount of the middle finger , it declares a miferable , hard and covetous wretch, it alfo forefhews a confumption. VI. The left Angle made upon the Epatka in the ferient ( being a right Angle ) ihews a profound un- derlranding. VII. The Cephalic a calling unequal and irregular clefts to Mom Luna , thereby conftituting ftrange Characters, fhews a dull head, and danger by the Sea, in Men : but in Women difcontents, mifcarriages and the like. VIII. But carting equal lines , it prefages the con- trary in both Sexes : to wit, in men wifdom> andfa- cefs Chap. /}. Of the Line of Fortune] 393 cefs at Sea, and in Women, contentment) and happy child- bearing. IX. If the Cephalka make a cleft or apparent Star, upward to the Cavea Martis, it fhews boldnefs , and magnanimity of mind : but if it let the fame fall downward-, it manifefts deceit and cowardife. X. The Cephalka joyned to the Reftncla, by a re- markable concourfe , fhews a happy and joyful old Age. XI. But if it be drawn upwards, ( in form Ike a ForkJ towards the place of Fortune , it fliews much fubtilty and craft in the management of affairs. XII. If in this Fork, the Character of ® Sors be found, it Ihcws Riches and Honour, by the mans own induitry. CHAP. LXXIIL Of the Menfal Line 3 or Line of Fortune, I. *TT*He Menfal or Line of fortune ( called alio JL Lima thoralis ) takes its original from under the Mount of Mercury, and extends it ielf towards the Mount of Jupiter. II. This line if it be long enough and without incifures, fhews ftrength of body, and tonitancy of mind •, the contrary if it be ftort, crooked or cut. III. If it terminates under the Mount of Saturn, it fhews a foolijfi, idle and deceitful perfon. IV. If in this line be found certain pricks or points, it fhews a lecherous perfon. V. If the fyatica be wanting-, and the mnfd be C c annexed j p 4 PdygrapUcts* Lib- 4. annexed to the Vital, it forefhews either beheading? hanging or Other untimely death. VI. If from the Menfal, alineafcends to the fpace between the Mounts or Jupiter and Saturn, another to the fpace between the Mounts of Saturn and Sol • and a third to the fpace between the Mounts of Sol and Mercury, itfignifies an envious, turbulent and conten- tious perfon. VII. A little line only thus drawn to the fpace be- tween the Mom Saturn* & Solis , Ihews labour and forrow. VIII. If annexed to the Epatica, making therewith an acute Angle, the fame. IX. The Menfal projecting fmall branches to the Mons Jovis, Ihews honour and glory. X. But if it be naked orfmgle y it Ihews poverty and dijrrefs. XI. If it cuts the Mount of Jupiter, it fhews a cove- tous mind, and great pride. XII. If it fend a branch between the Afats Jaw & Satumi, it fliews in a Man, a wound in his head *, but inaWoman, mifcarriage or danger in child-bearing. XIII. Confufed little lines in the Menfal, fhewfick- nefs and difeafes : if under the Mons Satumi, in youth : under the Mons Solisjn the middle Age : under the Mons Mercurii, in old Age. XIV. Laftly, It there be no menfai at aii, itfnewsone faithlefs, bafe, inconfiant and malicious. CHAP. Chap, 74. Of Cauda Draconis. 3^5 CHAP. LXXIV. Of the Reftri&a , or Cauda Draconis. I. *TpHe Reflricba is that Line which divides the Hand I. from the Arm, either by afingle, duple, or triple tranfcurfwn \ thereby determining the tb vfaxil* fitvov or fitbjeft of Art ; which by fome is called the Difcriminal line. II. If the ReftriSla be double or treble, and extended in a right and continued trad, it (hews a healthful con- ftitution of body, and long life. III. That line which is nearefb the hand continued without incifure, and of a good colour ; fhews riches-. IV. But ifitbe^/rbr crootgd, or cut in the middle, it mews weaknefs of body arid poverty. V. A line drawn from the Reflritla to Mons Luna, fhews poverty , imprifonment and private enemies. VI. If that line be crooked, it doubles all the evil, and fhews a perpetual fhvery or niifery. VII. But fiich a line being clear and ftraight, arid extended to the Mons $m&, fhews many journeys and peregrinations both by Sea and Land. . VIII. If it extend to the Mons Jovis, it forefhews tftimation and Ecclefiaftich^digmty, but that the man mall live in a ftrange countrey. IX. If to the £patica, it fhews honefty, truth arid fin- cerity, and one of a healthful and long life. X. If to the Mons Soils, a great* and certain good, and gives honour and command in the Common- Wealth.- Cc2 XI. Arid 5» 6 tPolygrapkices. Lib. 4. XI. And fo from the fame reafon , paffing to the Mom Mercurii , it fhews a learned and ingenious foul : but if it reach not that Mount, but is broken about the middle, it fhews a lying, prating, idle per- fon. XII. If it afcends directly to the Mom Saturni , it fhews an inheritance in land : but if it be crooked , it fhews a covetous perfon , and one of a very ill nature. XIII. A line running from the Reftritta through the Mans Veneris, fhews poverty, adverfity and want, and that by means of fome women or woman- kind. XIV. A crojs orftar upon the Reftrittay fhews a happy and long life. XV. One or more Stars upon the Reflritta by the Mom Veneris mWomen, fhews lewdncfs, difhonour and infamy. CHAP. LXXV. Of the SaturnUy or Line ^/"Saturn. I. HTHis Line is that which afcends from the Re J firitha through the middle of the Vola, toth Mom Samrni , which line if it be cut or parted, i called Via combnfla. II. This being full , and extended to the Mot. $dtumi y fhews a man of profound cogitations, of gre? wifdom V and an admirable counfellor in all gru attions. III. If it be coming it is an evil fign, forefhewin mar iChap.76. Of the Mount of Jupiter, \<)7 many misfortunes , and poverty in one part of life. IV. Kline drawn from the Vital through the Epatica to the Mom Satumi, making an angle with the Lima Satumia, forefhews imprifonment, and captivity, and many misfortunes. V. The Satumia bending backwards in Cavea Mar- tis towards the ferknt, the fame. VI. This line filled with unufud and inaufpkious cha- ratters, (hews unhappinefs and difafters. VII. A graft line running from the interval of the Mom Jovis to the menfal, and breaking or cutting of it, fhews difeafes or wounds in thebejjy or parts ad- jacent. CHAP. LXXVI. Of the Mount of Jupiter. I. "TpHe Mount of Jupiter is the tuberculin under A the fore-finger. II. If upon the Mount of Jupiter there be 2. Star or a double crofs it forefhews, riches , profperity , and happinefs , one born to noble and glorious anions, one honeft, affable, courteous, and renowned, a ge- nerous foul indeed , and faithful in all their under- takings. III. The fame, if this Mount is adorned with a paral- lel line, or a line fweetly drawn , between it and the Vital, it fhews great dignities, and eftimation with great men. IV. But if this Mount be vitiated, with a Char a- Uer like a half Gridiron , it Ihews unhappinefs, cala- Cc 3 mities. J?8 folygraphices. Lib. 4. mities , poverty , difgrace and depofition from ho- nours and dignities ; loifes by women- kind, and difeafes in the heart and lungs. V. The fame, If a line cutting this Mount, tends to the Mount or line of Saturn ; this alfo threatens an Apoplexy. VI. Laftly, ACrofs, but elperially a clear red Star pn this Mount, is a fignal and fure demonstration of a fplendid life-, repkat with honour and glory, riches and an Eternal name. CHAP. LXXVII. 0/7foCavean the Mons Veneris. III. Mars is Fortunate fo often as the foror Martis appears red, clear and fweetly drawn, and when either Stars or Croffes are found in his Cavea or Triangle • and thereby is fignified courage, boldnefs, magnani- mity, fortitude and ftrength : the man is imperious, flrong, and a great eater. IV; But if the Triangle be infortunated by evil lines from the Mons Veneris or Luna, the pcrfon is litigious, fcornfiil, proud, difdainful, deceitful and wicked-, a fhief, leher, robber, murtherer, and mall have a life ^vhtlly filled with unhappinefs. V. The Chap. 7 8. Of the Mount of the Sun/jrc 399 V. The Character 1? Saturn in the Triangle, fhews a danger of falling from fome high place. VI. A crooked line afcending from the Triangle to the MonsSamrni, (hews imprilbnment. VII. A line from the faid Triangle towards the Re- firifta, terminating under the Mom Luna, ihews many peregrinations, journeys and travels. VIII. The foror Martis augments all the good fignifi- ed by the Cardiaca or line of life, but particularly it promifes fuccefs in war, and the love of Women. CHAP. LXXVIII. Of (be Mount of the Sun, and Via Solis. I. 'T^He Mount of the Sun is the tuherculum under the _L ring-finger. II. The Via Solis, is a right line running down from the Mount of Sol-, to the Triangle of Mars. III. A Star or Stars upon the Mom Soils, (hews one faithful and ingenious, and that he mall attain to great honour, glory and dignity , be honoured of Kings, Princes and great men •, one of a great and magnanimous fpirit, wife, juft and religious. IV. But a perpendicular thereon cut or croft with a line from the Mom Saturni, fhews pride, and arrogan- cy, aboafter, a poor bafe fpirit, and one that mall fall into irrecoverable miferies. V. The Via Solis clear, and not broken, or cut by any ill line, fhews honour in the Common- wealth , and the favours of Kings and great Princes. ■ VI. But it being cut or confufed* or hart by any Cc 4 lme 400 Polygraphias. Lib. 4. line from either the Mount or line of Saturn, it fhews jthe contrary,poverty and the hatred of great men. CHAP. LXXIX. Of thf Mount of Venus , and the Cingu- lum Veneris. jf. HT~He Mount of Venus is the tuberculum of the J Thumb. II. The Cingulum Veneris or girdle of Venus, is a piece pr fegment of a Circle drawn from the interval or (pace between the Mons Jovis & Saturni, to the interval or fpace between the Mons Soli* and Mercurii. III. A clear Star, or furrows that be red and tranf verfly parallel upon the Mons Veneris, and it much ele- vated,lhews one merry,cheerful and amorous , it fhews alfo one faithful, juft and intire, one with whom an incor- rupt ed tye of fricndflrip ( being once made ) is durable for ever i it alfo figmfies great fortune or eftate and fub- ftance by a fweet-heart or lover. IV. Bnt this mount infortunated by evil lines,or lines from evil places, and irregular figures fhews a lecherous perfon, an Adulterer, a poor, bafe, fordid wretch, who ihall Ipend hisfubftanceon whores. V. The Character of the A Trine Afpetb on this mount, fhews a great fortune by marriage. Vh The Mo u^t of Venus void of lines and incifures, /hews a rude, effeminate and foolifh perfon, and one 1 ri- diculous, and unfortunate in wedlock. yiL The Cingulum Veneris ., or girdle of Venus, fhews Chap. 80. Of the Mount of Mercury. 401 mews intemperance and luft in both Sexes , a bale and beftial life ; a filthy Sodomite, who abufes himfeif with beafts. VIII. If it be broken or dijfetted, it fhews infamy and difgrace by luft and lechery. CHAP. LXXX. Of the Mount 0/ Mercury. I. '"T"*He Mount of Mercury is the tuberculum under the JL little finger. II. This Mount happy and fortunate with a Star, or parallel crojfes, or the Character of the A Trine Afyett^ fhews wit and ingenuity, and makes the perfon a great Orator, gives him fubftance by Arts and Sciences, and the underitanding of fecret myfteries in Alchymy, Mu- ficl^, Tainting, Aerology, and Philology, and raifes the perfon to dignity by means of his own wit, prudence and induftry. III. But this Mount afflicted, or without lines , or hurt by a line from the Mount of Saturn, (cutting the Mount of Sol) or from the Triangle of Mars, ihews a poor, low and dull wit , a perfon of no audacity or courage, a meer coward, a Iyer, pratler, thief, cheat, traitor, and onefaithlefs, andfometimes melancholy; mad or frantick. IV. Thefe judgements are the more firm where the lives and fignatures are fair, firm and clear : but if they be dull or obfeure, thefe judgements are more dubious and intricate. V. A line from the Mom Luna to the Mons Mercurii not cut or broken, fhews a man eminent and famous in ^01 ipolygraphkes. Lib. 4. in his trade or profeflion (among the common people) letitbewhatitwill. CHAP. LXXXI. Of *fo Mons Luna?, And the ViaLaclea. I. •T , He Mons hunt ( called aUb f trims aferiendo. the JL fmitingpart) is the mount comprehended un- der the tubercular* of Mercury , between the menfd and Reftritta. II. The Via lofte*, or Milky way, is the line run- ning upwards from the Reftritta through the feriens or Mons Lun&. HI. The Mons Luna filled with happy Characters ( as we have before hinted ) fhews one honeft, jult and honourable, and makes a man famous through a Kingdom, gives him the praife of the common peo- ple, and the acquaintance of great and noble Ladies \ and makes him happy in Navigation. IV. But being infortunated by evil Characters, cr a trapezia, or evil lines from the Triangle of Mars. or lines broken, or cut with oblique Angles, it fhews one of a various, poor and inconitantlife, a beggar, a perfon envied by almofl all people, one wicked, treacherous and deceitful , a perfon fubjed to travel, captivity or banifhment. V. If the good lines on the ferient be fair and come* ly, they premonftrate fo much the more happinefs, and in women fmitfulnefs : but the evil lines pale, fo miH"ht'° more evil. VI. The Via Idha or milky way , well propor- tioned Chap. 82. Of the Mcnfa or Tahle. 40J tioned and continued, fhews fortunate journeys, both by Sea and Land, great wit , and the love and fa- vour of Women-kind , chiefly of Ladies and great Women. VII. But if this line be cut or crooked, it ihews un- happinefs, and a poor and low eftate. VIII. If it be whole and extended to the little fin- ger, it fhews a great good beyond expectation. CHAP. LXXXIL Of the Menfa, or Table. I. HpHe Menfa is the interval or fpace betwixt the X menful and Epatica, the which is given or at- tributed to Fortune 1 from whence the Table is called the place of Fortune. II. The Menfa being large and broad, and repleat with j good figures, fhews riches and treafure, one of a liberal magnanimous fpirit, and of long life. III. But fmall and narrow, fhews poverty or a flen- der and mean fortune, a niggard, a coward , a pitiful poor, fearful and mean foul IV. A little circle in the Menfa (hews a great wit, and a profound perfon in Arts and Sciences. V. The Menfa terminating in an Angle under Mont Jovis by the concourfe of the Menfal and Caydiac or Vital line, fhews faKhood and treachery, and one of fhort life. VI. A Grafs or Star, within it,clear and of good pro* portion, especially under the Mount of Sol, (hews honour and dignity, by means of great and Noble men, and encreafe 404 Tolygraphices. Lib. 4. encreale of Noble men : if it be the Character of y, Jupiter, it (hews Ecclefiafiical preferment. VII. The fame Crofs or Star, being doubled or tripled wonderfully encrealeth the aforefaid good fortune -, but cut or confofed by other little lines , the faid good is much diverted , and Anxieties and troubles threatned. •VIII. Good and equal lines in the Menfa , fhew good fortune •, evil and diftorted or crooked , the contrary. IX. A Crofs or Star in the Menfa over Mons Lun<$, fhews fortunacy in travelling. X. If there be no ngnfa, it Ihews a cloudy and ob- fcure life and fortune. CHAP. LXXXIII. Of the Thumb and Fingers, I. A Line furrounding the Pollex or Thumb jlX. in the middle joint , fhews the perfon fhall be hanged. II. A line palling from the upper joint of the Pollex to the Cardiaca^ fhews a violent death, or danger by means of fome married woman. III. Overthxyart lines, clear and long underneath the nail and joint of the Thumb , mew Riches and Honour. IV. Equal furrows drawn under the lower joint thereof, (hew Riches and Inheritances. V. The firft and fecond joint free from incifures, fhe w a flothful and idle perfon. VI. Overthmrt lines in the uppermolt joint of the Index Chap. 85. Of the Thumb and Fingers. 40 j Index or fore-finger ,fhew inheritances j but fnch in the middle joint, fhew a fubtil perfon. VII. Right lines running between thofe joints in the Index •, fhew {in Women) a plentiful illiie } (in Men) a nimble tongue. VIII. If they be in the firfi joint near Mom Jovk y they fhew a pleafant and courteous difpofitioa •, and a man of a generous foul. IX. But a Woman who hath a Star in the fame place, IS lafcwious and vehorifh. X. Little gridirons in the joints of the Me dins or middle-finger, an unfortunate and melancholy perfon : but Equal and parallel lines fhew fortune by dealing in Metals. XI. A Star there,fhews a violent death by drowning or Witchcraft, or the like. XII. A Grofs line rifmg from the Mans Samrni^thiowgly the whole finger to the end thereof, fhews a meerfool or mad perfon. XIII. In the Annular or Ring-finger, a line riling from the Mom 5o/«,itraight "through the joints thereof, Ihews honour and glory. XIV. In the firfi- joint of the Annular , equal lines fhew trcafure and honour : overthwart lines, the hatred of Kings and great men ', but if interfered, their envy fhall be abated. XV. In the Auricularis or little-finger, aStr.r in its firfi joint near the mount thereof, ftiews one of ingenui- ty, and a good Orator. XVI. Evil Characters and obtufie Angles the con- trary : thofe unfortunate figns in the firfi and fe'cond joints , fhew a thief: in the loft joint, one perpetual- ly inconftant. XVII. Some Authors predict the number of W . ss or Husbands , by the number of little lines in the out- moft 4© 6 (Polygraphices. Lib. 4. moll: part of the Mons Mercurii -, but in my opinion thofc things ought rather to be fought out in the Mount of Venus. XVIII. And as in the Mounts good or evil Chara- cters, are Omens of good or evil fortunes ; fo alio on the fingers they fignifie the fame. XXIX. The firfi joint near the mount (hews the firfi Age : the fecond joint, middle Age : and the lafi joint, old Age: but it is our opinion, that the directions of the principal fignificators in every Geniture, more properly demonftrate the times in which the good or evil (ignified by thofe marks or lines, mail more cer- tainly happen. A note concerning the Good and Evil Lines, Murks or Characters. XX. The good lines, marks or Characters are parallels, as = or || double or treble, and the like , CrofTes as 4- or x : double Croffes and the like : Stars as the Sextile Afpect * or the like : Ladders-fteps and Quadrangles as D or CD : the trine afped as A: An- gles as the right or acute, or a mult-angle, &c. the Characters of Jupiter and Venus, as % 2, and other the like a kin to thefe. XXI. The Vnfortunate and evil Characters are de- formed, irregular and uncouth figures, broken lines, crooked lines, gridirons, the Characters of 1? Saturn and 6* Mars : the oppofition Civet & Booty to gi Id Ambergris Artificial pearls Alchymy in general Ambergris Ejjence B Brows Body to draw Belly Bodies to (bade Btafls to draw Bafe Burnifbing iron Brufh Blacks 76.142.149.1^2.188 Blues 76.83.84,85-105.142.149 163.168,165,170.185.225. Browns 77*143 ,6 9 28 Birds 78 19 364 Blots to tah out 370 Bones to dye 375 Bones to fof ten 350 Br i jilts to dyt Blue dye 15 Blacl^dye 19 Bacchus to depict 22 Boreas to depict 23 Burnings and Scalding* 29 Breath to fwetttn 40 Baldnefs 52.62 Blac^, (fax 62 Baljams perfumed Balfamum mofchatum Bracelets perfumed • C Cromitict Crions or Pajlils torn ah Charcoals 80 Compares 3 circle 87 Cone $ Cylinder 86 Copies to reditu 1 1 8 €ircumferent Streak? 1 2 1 Crofs in mating a Fat* 123 Circular Bodies 130 Catopt ric^s 148 Center to find 148 Colouring Banqueting Rooms and bedchamber Chiromantick. Demonjiration 160 Cushion 165 171 179 181 184 188 »74 188.192 192 204 215,216 216 217 222,223 223 ibid. 225.227 227 290 323 53* 340 370 ibid. 558 Bole amoniack. Blue bict Bay color Burnifrt Gold and Silvtr Banly to color Boughs to limn Bric^wall to limn Brajs to limn Beafts, bears to limn Blue Velvet 146 Sattin Buff to paint Brazil Buildings Black*efsto deftroy Buckthorn birr its Butter of Antimony Ealfamura Saturni Brajs to varnish Brafs to make Brafs to tinge "Brafs to whiten Brafs to cleanft Copies of Letters Colors for Limning Cemfe Crimfon bright 81 Crim. Crimjon Lake Colors for Draptry Crimfon Garments Carnation Cloth of Gold, 192,193 Changeable S#k 155.157 china Difiet Dd 3 1 3.102 2.54 4.44 ib. 6 >4 >5 58.4* 44 45 . 4* 5* 57 75.75 77 Cad ib. 82 84.170 14*404 •4.163 84 85 71 it The Table. Colors to prepare Colors to temper Colors to calcine Collens earth Cherry-flone blacl^ Colors to ma^e Colors dead Clouds to limn Cottages 1 1 8 Childrens Hair Chambers j 2 1 89.143,144 90.143.169 90. 143 103 ibid, ibid. 107 ij$ Caflles 116 Children n$.\\9 121 Copper 123 Clovejuliflow. 1 24 Cornflour 125 Cucifmers \C abb age 125,126 Cherries 126 coney 131 Cap " 131 Crocodile 132 Colours tofyep from spinning 142 Colours for a fair complexion 1 44 Colors ufed into the Church ibjd. Complexion brorcen-i blac£ 145 Cloth to paint 148 Colours for Landslip 151.171 Choice of copies or patterns 157 Cochenel 166.180,181 "Coral • fty/w or 7/'« to-varnifh Copper to blanch Crocus Martis what copper to tinge, whiten Crucibles 'Cafting, the manner of it r-sj ""••f Chalcedon to maty 'Carbuncle to counterfeit Cleth to dye Crimfon dye thronos what Court 0/Mars 'Chariot ofDhm fares 282. 30$. Charon CozVity 304 Concord 304. 369 Confidence 304 Cupid 30$ Cajurnnia * 512 Crocodile what 213 fljo f /ty. ^ 1 $ Calliope s 1 9 169 184 *74 185.188 187 203 205 iuy 2IO ibid. 225 228 263 268 275 287 Cofmetic\ ofTall>_ 326.325 Cofmeticl^of Pearl 331 Chaps in the styn 33$ Cloth,Cofftrs to perfume 367 Chiromancy 589 Cephalic^Line 392 Cyprian poW^r Characters good and evil Cauda Draconis 39$ Cavea Martis 39$ D Drawing tvhat I Doe fling what 15 Drapery *1'91 Diapering and Antique 32, 33 Draught of a Picture 34 Direft Radiations 38 Dioptric^ 384$ Diftance in Perjpeftive 41 Diagonals 42 Difcolor. of Plates to remove, 6$ Deep purple 80 r>^ «<*£* io7 Degrees of coloring 113 Dwd children 126 Dta^ wm d»^ women ibid. Dfw'/j to //»» ibid. Z><* %£ *'« £>•*/« 2 28 Dijpofition of things in right order \ 260 Diana to *fr/>/# 275 Diogenes, Democrates 300 David, Dido 30 i Dcmogorgon 307 Dejliry 316 Dijjimulation 312 Danubius 315 Dryades 317 December to depift 322 The Table: £ Frefco 161 Ear to form 1 7 Flory blue 167 Extreme parts to draw 18 F left color 169 Envy to exprefs 2$ Flctstyxnd Furnace 203 Engraving $i.$5«$7 Feathers to dye 223 Etching 59-^4 Fairies and Fauns to depi ft 286 Emeralds to lima 98 Fortune to depict : 293.309 Emerald color 104 .,10$ Fame : ■97.319 Eagle to limn 128 Fear 299 Faith 304 Elephant to limn 1 30 Felicity j J05.312 Eafel 140 Flora 306 Fate 309 Enamel to maty \%\ 7.213 Fruitfulnefs 312 Estimation of Painting and Pain- February to depict 320 ters 246 , 247 Face to cleanfe & beaut if e .3. 2 $ Exquifitenefs of colouring 255 Fucus white ibid. Eyes their power 158 Fucks of Pearl 326 Epicurus to depict < 300 Fucus of a Bulls Gall ibid. Euclid to depict ibid. Fucus red 326,327 Elizabeth £. of England 301 Freezes 33? Empedoclcs, Erafmus 3c 2 Fingers 404 Eternity 305,306 Envy 305 G Echo ' 306 Equality ' 309 GlafsPerJpeclhe 4M2 Euterpe 318 Erato 319 G raving and its Injlrum* 5»-5$ Eurus 320 Gravers 51-53 EpaticbLine 390 Graver to hold $4 F Gums for limning 73^74 Feathers 2 Gold and Silver liquid 73.86 Fact of man to draw 15 Greens 76.82^83,84 ,85.105. Feet to [hade 23 142.149.163.167,: 168,169, Fear to exprefs ]. 2$ 170.185. Fore[hortning 26 Green Bice .73 Flowers to draw 29 Glafs Grey 80 Frame and Trough 62 Grey 81 Finijhing the Etching wor\ 68. Green light ibid. 7 1 - Gold burnijhed 87 Flame color 8 1 Gold to diaper on 83 Fire color 86.151 Cold Armoniacf^ ibid. Feathers to color 86 Glair of Eggs to maty 87 Fair complexion 106 Groundcolours what €9.145 Flowers to limn 124 Grinding Stone 91.142 Fruits 1 26 Gold Armor 97 Fowls 128 Falcon 129 General Obfervatiens In Limning Fifbes 133 Frog ibid 10* Face to paint 152 Grey Hair to limn 121 Dd 4 Go!* The Table. Gold to limn * 23.150 Grapes to limn 127 Griffon 129 Goofe 128 Grinding-Stone to cleanfe 142 Green Vtlvit 146 Sattin 147 Garments to faint 149,1 50.1 70 Galleries 160 Glafs to paint 163.187 Gambogia 166 Gold to varnifb 174 Green tin ft are 187 Glafs to tinge 187,188 Gold to color and {often 1 90 Go/rf 7r« 0/ f/tf Philofofhers , 200 G /f 227,228 Geometry, its ufe 251.304 GUucus to depict 283 Galatea to depift 28 3.3 1 7 Guftavus Adolphus 302 German Emperors ibid. Government 304 Graces to depitt 205 Ganges fo d*p/72f 314 filoves to perfume 365 Gr«« I»£ fo wwz Ao £//d 2 1 5,2 1 (5, 2 1 7 Inl^greento mal^e 219,220 In^blue 220 fcorj The Table. jvory to whiten ideas their ufe inventors ofVaintjngwho^ ^234 Jupiter todepia *** janus 277 J uno J* Mice and innocence WW 1 Joy, Jollity, impudence Injuria 312 Ind«s Iris 3i7, January June, July Juice ojMacaleb inl^to ma^e Jupiter or tin iron or Mars K,nuctyes Knives to engrave with Kali of what ufe light to chooje Life to imitaXe Landslips 7.9.94 10 12.30.44.65.98. HI.s38.i5i.i59 love to express 2 * Line . ' J?.' 41 Linea Joviahs , Saturnwlis , Solaris, Mercurialis, Lunans, Stellata 47 Luna her Signification , 48 limning and its materials 7 3 liquid gold and filvtr 73.86.16 5 lal^e gum 224 landslip to limn 1 98. m 232,233 Light and (hadow icer leopard to limn 1 31 Leather to paint 148 La W.j£//> f /><*/»« 151 I/fe <*«*! motion 1 56.257 Logwood 165.182 Lapis Lazuli to imitate 178 Lignum Nephriticum 179.182 Liqitor to maty color le\s 183 Leather to varnijh 1 7 $ Leather to color yellow 181 Lwd to tinge and purge 1 97,1 98 Ltnen to gild 217 Light its nature and quality 2 38 Luta to depict 275 Law 304 Lrw 30$ Laughter ibid* L;forty ibid. Liquor of Tal£ 328 Lac Virginis fe Crimfon light blue Leaves 0) Trees Limning Table 8c.167.182 81-151 81 ibid. 82.103.170 85 86 92.111 Mixed forms 6.28 Mxfclesto draw 9«io Mafier to chocfe 10 Magnitude 37 Menfa 47 74 Mars his Signification m 48 77 Mercury his Signification, ibid. Maflicot 79 Murry 80.83.104 Manner of fitting > 94 Miniture ibid. Minium 77.102 Mountains to limn i*7 Maible pillars 122 Afttafc to Wow * 23 Marigold The Table." Mtr'tgtUtdftmx Melons to limn Mulberries to limn Mice 130 Monkey Madder Mixing of colors Marble to imitate Mercury fublimate Mercunus Vita; Mineral ctlors 184 Minium what Metals to mafy tough Metals to tinge lilej Gold Mitals to mtlt Materials ofCafting Medal or form Metals to gild 21$. Maximus his end Magnificence of worlds Mars to depict Mercury Minerva Mofes Mahomet Modefly Mercy Mufes to depict Melpomene Months to depict March, May Morphew to tal^e away Matter of Perfumes Mlkj>f Macaleb Mineral Perfumes Mars or iron Mercury or QuicJ^filvtr Mus\its Effence Mufcadines to mal^t Menfa or Table Mens Lun-t Mons Solis Mount of Venas Mount of Mercury ibid. 127 131 166 169 177 184 ibid. 113,214 187 109 ibid. 202 ibid. 203 218.221 235 253 267 273 289 300,301 302 304 311 ?i8 ibid. 329 321 3*9 3*?j55° 340 361 363 380 383 350 357 403 402 399 400 401 N We \6.\\a Nafyd body to (hade 22 Needle to etch with 61 .64 Needles to whet 6i Nafyd bodies to limn 1 14. 1 1 9 Night Sty 1 51 Natures help in Painting * 241 Nymphs of Diana 27 6, 277. 318 Neptune to depict Nemefis Night Numa Pompilius Natural affection Nilus Niger Nymphs Napatae Naiades November Natural Line O Oval Out Schetches Optice Object Orthographia Oile-ftone Oy I prepared Orpiment j Orchal nl... J, f Orient Viilet Otyr Obfervations of Limning Old bodies to limn 114.119,120 Owl to limn 120 Oxen to limn J31 Orange color 148.1 $0,167 Old painting to cleanft 154 Oil of Tartar 180.330 Oil of flints or Sand Oa^-Plates Oil of Turpentine 282.284 284 298 301 305 313 3i5 ibid. ibid. 317 322 390 444 8 37>38 37-4 2 39 52 do 78 80 79 84 102 io<5 201 204 ibid. Original The Table: Original ofthefe Arts 231 Opticas their ufe 251 Ops to depict 28 1 Oceanus to depict 284 Opinion to depict 289.30$ October to depict 321 Oil of Campbir to mafy 325 Ointment Cofmetic^ 3 3 1 Oil o/Ben 343 Oils oflnfufan 347 Oleum Imperiale ibid. Oil ofcinamon 348 Oil ofKofes 347 Oil of Calamus Aromatic. 349 Oil 0/ Rhodium ibid. Oil of Indian Spiefyard ibid . Oil of Benjamin ibid. Oil oJStorax compound ibid. Ox-dung Powder 352 Orrice Powder 353 Polygraphice what 1.2 Piftura 1 Pencils Proportion Pajfion Pens 3*91.141.165 2.254 2 3 Pafiils to mafy 3.102 Precepts of Drawing 4 Polygon 5 Pictures to reduce 6 Plafter-wor^ 7.9 Particular Obfervat. in Drawing 7 Pattern to place 9.11,12 Pd/tf of d W48 22 pafftonstoexprefs 25.156.158 Picture to extend or contract %6 Perfpective 37 Prattice ofperfpeftivt 43 Plates to polish 53-59 P/fr to varnifh 174. Putty what j86 Purple to dye 188 P£ iiofophers Trees 200, 201 Pip to blow with 204 Pledgets of wool ibid. Pearls artificial 210 Proportions of mineral Colors 213 219 226.228 233 235 Pro- per to »wro7* Painting whence Pajftons their ufe The Tabic: ftfgttfs of painting 239 ferfeftion of painting 1 50 Parfiphilus his opinion 2 5 1 Proportion its ufe 2 54 Perfection of Painting what 261 Ttace to depitt 297.309.304 Phoebus to depict 269 Poppy its fignification 28 1 Vm to depict 28$ Pan bis fignification 286 Phuo to depict 287 Pares 288 Pallas 289 pleafure 299 Pythagor. 302 Pltsfure 30$ Ptf/?/'»« ibid. Proferpin. 306 Providence 309 P/tty 311 Penitence 312 Po or Padus fo ^/>/V7 3 1 5 Polyhymnia ?o depict 31 9 Pimples 333 Perfuming Oils 347 Perfumed Lights 362 Perfume 0/ Paracelfus 363 Printing Inl^ 369 Pbihfophic^wor^ 384 Perfuming Effences 349 Pomatum compound 352 Perfuming powders ibid. Pomanders jor bracelets 358 Quul^filver to harden 189 Huick-ftlver to tinge 189,100 Qgiclrftlver to fix j 8 9 £>uic\(tlver or Mercury 38 3 Radiations what Radiations refected Roulto poUfiwitb % 22 37,38 38 54.§6.(53 fle<& ' 76.82-105.142.149.163 Red Lead 77.102 K»/tf 78 ita/frt Sattin Ruffet to fhadow Rubies to limn Ruby color Ruins to limn Roefy ibid. 98.151 104,105 116 122.171 Rofes 124 Radices 125 Red Velvet 146 Sattin 147 XfdSfy 151 K«i varnifh to ma^t 175 Kfi Tincture 185 Ruby artificial 210 K^ rfye 226.228 Ruffet dyi 226 Right ordering of things 260 Roman Emperors 302 Religion 304 K/Wj to w# 78.102.169 Sap-green 73.170.181 Saffron 79.167 Saw/*. 80.163 Saffron The Table. Saffron color 8 1 Scdrlet color 81.84*149 Std Crimfon 8 1 Silver burnifhtd 87 Sire for burnifhed Gold 8 8 Silver to diaper on ibid . Sattin blac^ 84.147 Sattin white 85.148 Sattin ruffet ibid. Sil^ changeable 8 $.1 70 Sty color 85.172 Straw color 85.119 Steeped colors 89 Shadows for colors 9 1 Shells for colors 92 Sitting to limn 94 Sapphyrs to limn 98 Sapphyr color 104,105 Silver blac^ 104 Swarthy complexion 106 Stytolimn 115.172 Satyrs 120 Sandy grounds 1 a 2 Silver 123.150 Straw-berries 127 Swan 128 Stor^ 129 SJ>«p ^ 1 go Serpents 132 Streining Frame 1 40 Stay or Moll-flic^ 141 S(\ f 4 141.154.1 7 2 Significations of colors 1 4 3 Swarthy complexion 145 Sattins to color 147 Sea-green Velvet 146 Stair-cafe 159 Summer- houfes 1 60 Syrup of Violets 180.182 $;>*«/> ofclove-gilliflowtrs 1 8 1 Spirit of Salt 182 Sublimate 1 84 Silver to varnifh 174 Sf